Part No. 10178SL
Service Manual
GroundsmasterR 4300--D
Preface
The purpose of this publication is to provide the service
technician with information for troubleshooting, testing
and repair of major systems and components on the
Groundsmaster 4300--D.
This safety symbol means DANGER, WARNING,
or CAUTION, PERSONAL SAFETY INSTRUC-
TION. When you see this symbol, carefully read
the instructions that follow. Failure to obey the
instructions may result in personal injury.
REFER TO THE OPERATOR’S MANUAL FOR OPER-
ATING, MAINTENANCE
AND ADJUSTMENT
INSTRUCTIONS. Space is provided in Chapter 2 of this
book to insert the Operator’s Manual and Parts Catalog
for your machine. Additional copies of the Operator’s
Manual and Parts Catalog are available on the internet
at www.Toro.com.
NOTE: A NOTE will give general information about the
correct operation, maintenance, service, testing or re-
pair of the machine.
The Toro Company reserves the right to change product
specifications or this publication without notice.
IMPORTANT: The IMPORTANT notice will give im-
portant instructions which must be followed to pre-
vent damage to systems or components on the
machine.
E The Toro Company - 2010
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table Of Contents
Chapter 1 -- Safety
Chapter 5 -- Electrical System
Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -- 2
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -- 5
Safety and Instruction Decals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -- 6
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 3
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 4
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 6
Electrical System Quick Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 17
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 19
Component Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 22
Service and Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 44
Chapter 2 -- Product Records and Maintenance
Product Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -- 1
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -- 1
Equivalents and Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -- 2
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -- 3
Chapter 6 -- Chassis
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 2
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 2
Service and Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 4
Chapter 3 -- Kubota Diesel Engine
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -- 1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -- 2
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -- 3
Service and Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -- 4
KUBOTA WORKSHOP MANUAL, DIESEL ENGINE,
05--E3B SERIES
Chapter 7 -- Cutting Decks
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 2
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 3
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 4
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 5
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 6
Service and Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 8
Chapter 4 -- Hydraulic System
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -- 2
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -- 3
Hydraulic Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -- 9
Hydraulic Flow Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -- 10
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -- 22
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -- 26
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -- 32
Service and Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -- 60
SAUER--DANFOSS LPV CLOSED CIRCUIT AXIAL
PISTON PUMPS REPAIR MANUAL
Chapter 8 -- Foldout Drawings
Hydraulic Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 3
Electrical Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 4
Wire Harness Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 6
SAUER--DANFOSS LPV CLOSED CIRCUIT AXIAL
PISTON PUMPS SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS
PARKER TORQMOTORTM SERVICE PROCEDURE
(TC, TB, TE, TJ, TF, TG, TH AND TL SERIES)
SAUER--DANFOSS STEERING UNIT TYPE OSPM
SERVICE MANUAL
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
Safety
Table of Contents
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Before Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
While Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Maintenance and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
SAFETY AND INSTRUCTION DECALS . . . . . . . . . . 6
Groundmaster 4300--D
Page 1 -- 1
Safety
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Instructions
Your Groundsmaster meets or exceeds safety standard
specifications when weights are installed according to
information in the Operator’s Manual. Although hazard
control and accident prevention are partially dependent
uponthedesignandconfigurationof the machine, these
factors are also dependent upon the awareness, con-
cern and proper training of the personnel involved in the
operation, transport, maintenance and storage of the
machine. Improper use or maintenance of the machine
can result in injury or death. To reduce the potential for
injury or death, comply with the following safety instruc-
tions.
WARNING
To reduce the potential for injury or death, com-
ply with the following safety instructions.
Before Operating
1. Review and understand the contents of the Opera-
tor’s Manual and Operator Training DVD before starting
and operating the machine. Become familiar with the
controls and know how to stop the machine and engine
quickly. A replacement Operator’s Manual is available
on the Internet at www.Toro.com.
5. Since diesel fuel is highly flammable, handle it care-
fully:
A. Store fuel in containers specifically designed for
this purpose.
B. Do not remove machine fuel tank cap while en-
gine is hot or running.
2. Keep all shields, safety devices and decals in place.
If a shield, safety device or decal is defective, illegible
or damaged, repair or replace it before operating the
machine.
C. Do not smoke while handling fuel.
D. Fill fuel tank outdoors and only to withinan inchof
the top of the tank, not the filler neck. Do not overfill.
3. Tighten any loose nuts, bolts or screws to ensure
machine is in safe operating condition.
E. After refueling machine, install fuel tank and fuel
container caps.
4. Assure interlock switches are adjusted correctly so
engine cannot be started unless traction pedal is in
NEUTRAL and PTO switch is OFF (disengaged).
F. If fuel is spilled, do not attempt to start the engine
but move the machine away from the area of spill-
age. Avoid creating any source of ignition until fuel
vapors have dissipated. Wipe up any spilled fuel.
Safety
Page 1 -- 2
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While Operating
1. Sit on the seat when starting and operating the ma-
chine.
5. Before getting off the seat:
A. Ensure that traction pedal is in NEUTRAL.
2. Before starting the engine:
A. Apply the parking brake.
B. Lower and disengage cutting decks and wait for
all movement to stop.
B. Make sure the traction pedal is in NEUTRAL and
the PTO switch is OFF (disengaged).
C. Apply parking brake.
D. Stop engine and remove key from ignitionswitch.
C. After engine is started, releaseparking brakeand
keep foot off traction pedal. Machine must not move.
If movement is evident, the traction pedal linkage is
adjusted incorrectly; therefore, shut engine off and
adjust traction pedal linkage until machine does not
move when traction pedal is released (see Opera-
tor’s Manual).
6. Anytime the machine is parked (short or long term),
the cutting decks should be lowered to the ground. This
relieves pressure from the hydraulic lift circuit and elimi-
nates the risk of the cutting decks unexpectedly lower-
ing to the ground.
7. Do not park on slopes unless wheels are chocked or
blocked.
3. Do not run engine in a confined area without ade-
quate ventilation. Exhaust fumes are hazardous and
could possibly be deadly.
4. Do not touch engine, radiator or exhaust system
while engine is runningor soonafter it is stopped. These
areas could be hot enough to cause burns.
Groundmaster 4300--D
Page 1 -- 3
Safety
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Service
1. Before servicing or making adjustments, lower cut-
ting decks, stop engine, apply parking brake and re-
move key from the ignition switch.
12.Disconnect battery before servicing the machine.
Disconnect negative battery cable first and positive
cable last. If battery voltage is required for troubleshoot-
ing or test procedures, temporarily connect the battery.
Reconnect positive battery cable first and negative
cable last.
2. Make sure machine is in safe operating condition by
keeping all nuts, bolts and screws tight.
3. Never store the machine or fuel container inside
where there is an open flame, such as neara waterheat-
er or furnace.
13.Battery acid is poisonous and can cause burns.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes and clothing. Protect your
face, eyes and clothing when working with a battery.
4. Make sure all hydraulic line connectors are tight, and
all hydraulic hoses and lines are in good condition be-
fore applying pressure to the hydraulic system.
14.Battery gases can explode. Keep cigarettes, sparks
and flames away from the battery.
15.When changing attachments, tires or performing
other service, use correct supports, hoists and jacks.
Make sure machine is parked on a solid level floor such
as a concrete floor. Prior to raising the machine, remove
any attachments that may interfere with the safe and
proper raising of the machine. Always chock or block
wheels. Use jack stands or appropriate load holding de-
vices to support the raised machine. If the machine is
not properly supported, the machine may move or fall,
which may result inpersonal injury (see JackingInstruc-
tions in this section).
5. Keepbody andhands away from pinholeleaks inhy-
draulic lines that eject high pressure hydraulic fluid. Use
cardboard or paper to find hydraulic leaks. Hydraulic
fluid escaping under pressure can penetrate skin and
cause injury. Fluid accidentally injected into the skin
must be surgically removed within a few hours by a doc-
tor familiar with this form of injury or gangrene may re-
sult.
6. Before disconnecting or performing any work on the
hydraulic system, all pressure in the system must be re-
lieved by using all of the hydraulic controls (see Reliev-
ing Hydraulic Pressure in the General Information
section of Chapter 4 -- Hydraulic System).
16.If major repairs are ever needed or assistance is de-
sired, contact an Authorized Toro Distributor.
17.When welding on machine, disconnect all battery
cables to prevent damage to machine electronic equip-
ment. Disconnect negative battery cable first and posi-
tive cable last. Also, disconnect the wire harness
connector from the machine controller and disconnect
the terminal connector from the alternator. Attach weld-
er ground cable no more than two (2) feet (0.61 meters)
from the welding location.
7. Use care when checking or servicing the cutting
decks. Wear gloves and use caution when servicing
them.
8. To reduce potential fire hazard, keep engine area
free of excessive grease, grass, leaves and dirt. Clean
protective screen on machine frequently.
9. If engine must be running to perform maintenanceor
to make an adjustment, keep hands, feet, clothing and
other parts of the body away from the cutting decks and
other moving parts. Keep bystanders away.
18.At the time of manufacture, your Groundsmaster
conformed to the safety standards for riding mowers. To
assure optimum performance and continued safety cer-
tification of the machine, use genuine Toro replacement
parts and accessories. Replacement parts and acces-
sories made by other manufacturers may result in non-
conformance with the safety standards, and the
warranty may be voided.
10.Do not overspeed the engine by changing governor
setting. Toassuresafety andaccuracy, check maximum
engine speed with a tachometer.
11.Shut engine off before checking or adding oil to the
crankcase.
Safety
Page 1 -- 4
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Jacking Instructions
CAUTION
When changing attachments, tires or perform-
ing other service, use correct supports, hoists
and jacks. Make sure machine is parked on a
solid, level surface such as a concrete floor.
Prior to raising machine, remove any attach-
ments that may interfere with the safe and
proper raising of the machine. Always chock
or block wheels. Use jack stands or other ap-
propriate load holding devices to support the
raised machine. If the machine is not properly
supported, the machine may move or fall,
which may result in personal injury.
2
1
Figure 1
1. Front wheel
2. Front jacking point
Front End Jacking
1. Apply parking brake and chock both rear tires to pre-
vent the machine from moving.
2. Position jack securely under the rectangular pad on
the frame axle tube, just to the inside of the front wheel
(Fig. 1).
2
3. Jack front of machine off the ground.
1
4. Position jack stands under the frame as close to the
wheel as possible to support the machine.
3
Rear End Jacking
1. Apply parking brake and chock both front tires to pre-
vent the machine from moving.
Figure 2
2. Place jack securely at the center of the rear axle un-
der the axle pivot bracket. Jack rear of machine off the
ground.
1. Rear wheel
3. Jack stand location
2. Rear axle pivot bracket
3. Position jack stands under the frame to support the
machine.
Groundmaster 4300--D
Page 1 -- 5
Safety
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety and Instruction Decals
Numerous safety and instruction decals are affixed to
the traction unit and cutting units of your Groundsmas-
ter. If any decal becomes illegible or damaged, install a
new decal. Part numbers for decals are listed in your
Part Catalog. Order replacement decals from your Au-
thorized Toro Distributor.
Safety
Page 1 -- 6
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Product Records and Maintenance
Table of Contents
PRODUCT RECORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
EQUIVALENTS AND CONVERSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Decimal and Millimeter Equivalents . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
U.S. to Metric Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Fastener Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using a Torque Wrench with an Offset Wrench . . 3
Standard Torque for Dry, Zinc Plated and
Steel Fasteners (Inch Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Standard Torque for Dry, Zinc Plated and
Steel Fasteners (Metric Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Other Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Conversion Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Product Records
Insert Operator’s Manual and Parts Catalog for your
Groundsmaster at the end of this chapter. Additionally,
if any optional equipment or accessories have been
installed to your machine, insert the Installation Instruc-
tions, Operator’s Manuals and Parts Catalogs for those
options at the end of this chapter.
Maintenance
Maintenance procedures and recommended service in-
tervals for your Groundsmaster are identified in the Op-
erator’s Manual. Refer to that publication when
performing regular equipment maintenance.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 2 -- 1
Product Records and Maintenance
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Equivalents and Conversions
0.09375
Product Records and Maintenance
Page 2 -- 2
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Torque Specifications
Recommended fastener torque values are listed in the
following tables. For critical applications, as determined
by Toro, either the recommended torque or a torque that
is unique to the application is clearly identified and spe-
cified in this Service Manual.
Asnoted inthe followingtables, torquevalues shouldbe
reduced by 25% for lubricated fasteners to achieve
the similar stress as a dry fastener. Torque values may
also have to be reduced when the fastener is threaded
into aluminum or brass. The specific torque value
should be determined based on the aluminum or brass
material strength, fastener size, length of thread en-
gagement, etc.
These Torque Specifications for the installation and
tightening of fasteners shall apply to all fasteners which
do not have a specific requirement identified in this Ser-
vice Manual. The following factors shall be considered
when applying torque: cleanliness of the fastener, use
of a thread sealant (e.g. Loctite), degree of lubrication
on the fastener, presence of a prevailing torque feature
(e.g. Nylock nut), hardness of the surface underneath
thefastener’shead orsimilar conditionwhich affectsthe
installation.
The standard method of verifying torque shall be per-
formed by marking a line on the fastener (head or nut)
and mating part, then back off fastener 1/4 of a turn.
Measure the torque required to tighten the fastener until
the lines match up.
Fastener Identification
Grade 1
Grade 5
Grade 8
Class 8.8
Class 10.9
Inch Series Bolts and Screws
Figure 1
Metric Bolts and Screws
Figure 2
Using a Torque Wrench with an Offset Wrench
Useofanoffsetwrench(e.g. crowfootwrench)willaffect
torque wrench calibration due to the effective change of
torque wrench length. When using a torque wrench with
an offset wrench, multiply the listed torque recommen-
dation by the calculated torque conversion factor (Fig.
3) to determine proper tightening torque. Tightening
torque when using a torque wrench with an offset
wrench will be lower than the listed torque recommen-
dation.
If the listed torque recommendation for a fastener is
from 76 to 94 ft--lb, the proper torque when using this
torque wrench with an offset wrench would be from 72
to 89 ft--lb.
Offset wrench
Torque wrench
(effective length of
torque wrench)
A
Example: The measured effective length of the torque
wrench (distance from the center of the handle to the
center of the square drive) is 18”.
B
(effective length of torque
wrench + offset wrench)
Themeasuredeffectivelengthofthetorquewrenchwith
the offset wrench installed (distance from the center of
the handle to the center of the offset wrench) is 19”.
TORQUE CONVERSION FACTOR = A / B
Figure 3
The calculated torque conversion factor for this torque
wrench with this offset wrench would be 18 / 19 = 0.947.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 2 -- 3
Product Records and Maintenance
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Standard Torque for Dry, Zinc Plated and Steel Fasteners (Inch Series)
Grade 1, 5 &
8 with Thin
Height Nuts
SAE Grade 1 Bolts, Screws, Studs &
Sems with Regular Height Nuts
(SAE J995 Grade 2 or Stronger Nuts)
SAE Grade 5 Bolts, Screws, Studs &
Sems with Regular Height Nuts
(SAE J995 Grade 2 or Stronger Nuts)
SAE Grade 8 Bolts, Screws, Studs &
Sems with Regular Height Nuts
(SAE J995 Grade 5 or Stronger Nuts)
Thread Size
in--lb
in--lb
N--cm
in--lb
15 + 2
N--cm
169 + 23
192 + 23
328 + 34
350 + 45
475 + 56
542 + 56
1130 + 113
1299 + 136
2260 + 282
2542 + 282
N--m
in--lb
23 + 3
N--cm
262 + 34
282 + 34
463 + 56
486 + 56
678 + 68
768 + 79
1582 + 169
1808 + 192
3390 + 339
3672 + 373
N--m
# 6 -- 32 UNC
# 6 -- 40 UNF
# 8 -- 32 UNC
# 8 -- 36 UNF
# 10 -- 24 UNC
# 10 -- 32 UNF
1/4 -- 20 UNC
1/4 -- 28 UNF
5/16 -- 18 UNC
5/16 -- 24 UNF
10 + 2
13 + 2
147 + 23
17 + 2
25 + 3
29 + 3
41 + 5
13 + 2
18 + 2
25 + 5
30 + 5
282 + 30
339 + 56
31 + 4
43 + 5
42 + 5
60 + 6
48 + 5
68 + 7
48 + 7
53 + 7
53 + 7
65 + 10
105 + 15
128 + 17
ft--lb
599 + 79
734 + 113
1186 + 169
1446 + 192
N--m
100 + 10
115 + 12
200 + 25
225 + 25
ft--lb
140 + 15
160 + 17
300 + 30
325 + 33
ft--lb
115 + 15
138 + 17
ft--lb
3/8 -- 16 UNC
3/8 -- 24 UNF
7/16 -- 14 UNC
7/16 -- 20 UNF
1/2 -- 13 UNC
1/2 -- 20 UNF
5/8 -- 11 UNC
5/8 -- 18 UNF
3/4 -- 10 UNC
3/4 -- 16 UNF
7/8 -- 9 UNC
16 + 2
16 + 2
22 + 3
30 + 3
41 + 4
43 + 5
58 + 7
17 + 2
18 + 2
24 + 3
35 + 4
47 + 5
50 + 6
68 + 8
27 + 3
27 + 3
37 + 4
50 + 5
68 + 7
70 + 7
95 + 9
29 + 3
29 + 3
39 + 4
55 + 6
75 + 8
77 + 8
104 + 11
142 + 15
163 + 16
285 + 28
325 + 33
508 + 52
569 + 58
813 + 81
904 + 89
30 + 3
48 + 7
65 + 9
75 + 8
102 + 11
115 + 12
203 + 20
230 + 24
359 + 37
407 + 41
583 + 61
644 + 65
105 + 11
120 + 12
210 + 21
240 + 24
375 + 38
420 + 43
600 + 60
667 + 66
32 + 4
53 + 7
72 + 9
85 + 9
65 + 10
75 + 10
93 + 12
115 + 15
140 + 20
155 + 25
88 + 12
95 + 15
140 + 20
165 + 25
225 + 25
260 + 30
119 + 16
129 + 20
190 + 27
224 + 34
305 + 34
353 + 41
150 + 15
170 + 18
265 + 27
300 + 30
430 + 45
475 + 48
7/8 -- 14 UNF
NOTE: Reduce torque values listed in the table above
by 25% for lubricated fasteners. Lubricated fasteners
are defined as threads coated with a lubricant such as
engine oil or thread sealant such as Loctite.
NOTE: The nominal torque values listed above for
Grade 5 and 8 fasteners are based on 75% of the mini-
mum proof load specified in SAE J429. The tolerance is
approximately + 10% of the nominal torque value. Thin
height nuts include jam nuts.
NOTE: Torque values may have to be reduced when
installing fasteners into threaded aluminum or brass.
The specific torque value should be determined based
on the fastener size, the aluminum or base material
strength, length of thread engagement, etc.
Product Records and Maintenance
Page 2 -- 4
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Standard Torque for Dry, Zinc Plated and Steel Fasteners (Metric Series)
Class 8.8 Bolts, Screws and Studs with
Regular Height Nuts
Class 10.9 Bolts, Screws and Studs with
Thread Size
Regular Height Nuts
(Class 10 or Stronger Nuts)
(Class 8 or Stronger Nuts)
M5 X 0.8
M6 X 1.0
57 + 6 in--lb
96 + 10 in--lb
19 + 2 ft--lb
644 + 68 N--cm
1085 + 113 N--cm
26 + 3 N--m
78 + 8 in--lb
881 + 90 N--cm
1503 + 158 N--cm
38 + 4 N--m
133 + 14 in--lb
28 + 3 ft--lb
M8 X 1.25
M10 X 1.5
M12 X 1.75
M16 X 2.0
M20 X 2.5
38 + 4 ft--lb
52 + 5 N--m
54 + 6 ft--lb
73 + 8 N--m
66 + 7 ft--lb
90 + 10 N--m
225 + 23 N--m
440 + 45 N--m
93 + 10 ft--lb
229 + 23 ft--lb
450 + 46 ft--lb
126 + 14 N--m
310 + 31 N--m
610 + 62 N--m
166 + 17 ft--lb
325 + 33 ft--lb
NOTE: Reduce torque values listed in the table above
by 25% for lubricated fasteners. Lubricated fasteners
are defined as threads coated with a lubricant such as
engine oil or thread sealant such as Loctite.
NOTE: The nominal torque values listed above are
based on 75% of the minimum proof load specified in
SAEJ1199. Thetoleranceisapproximately+10%ofthe
nominal torque value.
NOTE: Torque values may have to be reduced when
installing fasteners into threaded aluminum or brass.
The specific torque value should be determined based
on the fastener size, the aluminum or base material
strength, length of thread engagement, etc.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 2 -- 5
Product Records and Maintenance
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Torque Specifications
SAE Grade 8 Steel Set Screws
Wheel Bolts and Lug Nuts
Thread Size Recommended Torque**
65 + 10 ft--lb 88 + 14 N--m
Recommended Torque
Thread Size
Square Head
140 + 20 in--lb
215 + 35 in--lb
35 + 10 ft--lb
75 + 15 ft--lb
Hex Socket
73 + 12 in--lb
145 + 20 in--lb
18 + 3 ft--lb
7/16 -- 20 UNF
Grade 5
1/4 -- 20 UNC
5/16 -- 18 UNC
3/8 -- 16 UNC
1/2 -- 13 UNC
1/2 -- 20 UNF
Grade 5
80 + 10 ft--lb 108 + 14 N--m
80 + 10 ft--lb 108 + 14 N--m
80 + 10 ft--lb 108 + 14 N--m
M12 X 1.25
Class 8.8
50 + 10 ft--lb
M12 X 1.5
Class 8.8
** For steel wheels and non--lubricated fasteners.
Thread Cutting Screws
(Zinc Plated Steel)
Thread Cutting Screws
(Zinc Plated Steel)
Type 1, Type 23 or Type F
Thread Threads per Inch
Size
Baseline Torque*
Thread Size
Baseline Torque*
20 + 5 in--lb
Type A Type B
No. 6 -- 32 UNC
No. 8 -- 32 UNC
No. 10 -- 24 UNC
1/4 -- 20 UNC
No. 6
No. 8
18
15
12
11
20
18
16
14
20 + 5 in--lb
30 + 5 in--lb
38 + 7 in--lb
85 + 15 in--lb
30 + 5 in--lb
38 + 7 in--lb
No. 10
No. 12
85 + 15 in--lb
110 + 20 in--lb
200 + 100 in--lb
5/16 -- 18 UNC
3/8 -- 16 UNC
*Holesize,materialstrength,materialthicknessandfin-
ish must be considered when determining specific
torque values. Alltorque values are based on non--lubri-
cated fasteners.
Conversion Factors
in--lb X 11.2985 = N--cm
N--cm X 0.08851 = in--lb
ft--lb X 1.3558 = N--m
N--m X 0.7376 = ft--lb
Product Records and Maintenance
Page 2 -- 6
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
Kubota Diesel Engine
Table of Contents
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Operator’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Stopping the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Adjust Throttle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
SERVICE AND REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
KUBOTA WORKSHOP MANUAL, DIESEL ENGINE,
05--E3B SERIES
General Information
This Chapter gives information about specifications,
troubleshooting, testing and repair of the Kubota diesel
engine used in the Groundsmaster 4300--D.
Service and repair parts for Kubota diesel engines are
suppliedthrough your local ToroDistributor. If a parts list
is not available, be sure to provide your distributor with
the Toro model and serial number.
Most repairs and adjustments require tools which are
commonly available in many service shops. The use of
some specialized test equipment is explained in the en-
gine workshop manual included at the end of this chap-
ter. However, the cost of the test equipment and the
specialized nature of some repairs may dictate that the
work be done at an engine repair facility.
Operator’s Manual
The Operator’s Manual provides information regarding
the operation, general maintenance and maintenance
intervals for the Kubota diesel engine that powers your
Groundsmaster machine. Refer to that publication for
additional information when servicing the machine.
Stopping the Engine
IMPORTANT: The engine used on the Ground-
smaster 4300--D is turbo--charged. Before stopping
the engine after mowing or full load operation, cool
the turbo-charger by allowing the engine to idle at
low speed for five (5) minutes. Failure to do so may
lead to turbo-charger trouble.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 3 -- 1
Kubota Diesel Engine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Item
Description
Make / Designation
Kubota V1505--T--E3B, 4--stroke,
Liquid Cooled, OHV, Turbocharged Diesel
Number of Cylinders
Bore x Stroke
4
3.07 in x 3.09 in (78 mm x 78.4 mm)
3
Total Displacement
Compression Ratio
Firing Order
91.4 in (1498 cc)
23:1
1 (fan end) -- 3 -- 4 (flywheel end) -- 2
No. 2--D Diesel Fuel (ASTM D975)
Bosch MD Type Mini
Fuel
Fuel Injection Pump
Fuel Injector Nozzle
Fuel Tank Capacity
Governor
Mini Nozzle (DNOPD)
14 U.S. gallons (53 liters)
Centrifugal Mechanical
Low Idle Speed (no load)
High Idle Speed (no load)
Engine Oil
1250 to 1350 RPM
3050 to 3250 RPM
API Classification CI--4 or Higher
(see Operator’s Manual for viscosity recommendations)
Oil Pump
Gear Driven Trochoid Type
5.5 U.S. quarts (5.2 liters) with Filter
10 U.S. quarts (9.5 liters)
12 VDC 1.2 KW
Crankcase Oil Capacity
Cooling System Capacity (including reserve tank)
Starter
Alternator/Regulator
12 VDC 40 Amp
Engine Dry Weight (approximate)
251 lbs (114 kg)
Kubota Diesel Engine
Page 3 -- 2
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustments
Adjust Throttle Control
Proper throttle operation is dependent upon proper ad-
justment of throttle control.
2
NOTE: The throttle cable swivel should be positioned
in the lowest hole in the speed control lever.
5
1. Move throttle control lever on control console to
FAST position.
1
3
2. Check position of the engine speed control lever on
fuel injection pump. The speed control lever should be
contacting the high speed screw when the throttle con-
trol lever is in the FAST position.
4
3. If necessary, throttle control can be adjusted by loos-
eningcable clampscrew andrepositioning control cable
until speed control lever contacts high speed screw
when the throttle control lever is in the FAST position.
Tighten cable clamp screw after adjustment has been
completed.
Figure 1
1. Throttle cable
2. High speed screw
3. Speed control lever
4. Swivel
5. Cable clamp
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 3 -- 3
Kubota Diesel Engine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Repairs
Fuel System
8
7
12
11
15
1
6
9
10
16
2
17
13
18
19
14
4
3
5
RIGHT
4
FRONT
Figure 2
1. Fuel cap
2. Bushing
3. Washer head screw (2 used)
4. Flange nut (3 used)
5. Clamp (2 used)
6. Return fitting
8. Hose clamp
9. Hose clamp
10. Fuel tank
11. Grommet
12. Fuel gauge
13. Hose clamp
14. Draincock
15. Fuel supply hose
16. Fuel return hose
17. Bumper
18. Flat washer
19. Cap screw
7. Suction fitting
Kubota Diesel Engine
Page 3 -- 4
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Opendraincock onbottom of fuel tank andallow tank
to fully drain. Close draincock.
DANGER
NOTE: Before removing fuel hoses from tank fittings,
label hoses for assembly purposes.
Because diesel fuel is highly flammable, use
caution when storing or handling it. Do not
smoke while filling the fuel tank. Do not fill fuel
tank while engine is running, when engine is hot
or when machine is in an enclosed area. Always
fill fuel tank outside and wipe up any spilled die-
sel fuel before starting the engine. Store fuel in a
clean, safety--approved container and keep con-
tainer cap in place. Use diesel fuel for the engine
only; not for any other purpose.
4. Loosen hose clamps and disconnect fuel hoses from
suction (item 7) and return (item 6) fittings on the top of
the fuel tank.
5. Remove fuel tank using Figure 2 as a guide.
Fuel Tank Installation (Fig. 2)
1. Install fuel tank to frame using Figure 2 as a guide.
Check Fuel Hoses and Connections
2. Using labels placed during fuel tank removal, cor-
rectly connect fuel hoses to suction (item 7) and return
(item 6) fittings on the top of the fuel tank. Secure fuel
hoses with hose clamps.
Check fuel hoses and connections periodically as rec-
ommended in the Operator’s Manual. Check fuel hoses
for deterioration, damage, leakage or loose connec-
tions. Replace fuel hoses, clamps and connections as
necessary.
3. Make sure that fuel tank draincock is closed. Fill fuel
tank.
Drain and Clean Fuel Tank
1
Drain and clean the fuel tank periodically as recom-
mended in the Operator’s Manual. Also, drain andclean
the fuel tank if the fuel system becomes contaminated
or if the machine is to be stored for an extended period.
3
To clean fuel tank, flush tank out with clean diesel fuel.
Make sure tank is free of all contaminates and debris.
Fuel Tank Removal (Fig. 2)
2
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting
decks, stop engine, apply parking brake and remove
key from the ignition switch.
2. Placedrainpanunder fuel tank. Makesure that drain
pan is large enough to hold fuel tank contents (see
Specifications in this chapter).
Figure 3
1. Fuel supply hose
2. Fuel return hose
3. Fuel gauge
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 3 -- 5
Kubota Diesel Engine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Air Cleaner
8
11
11
7
14
17
14
18
19
Thread
Sealant
1
3
11
6
12 to 15 in--lb
(1.4 to 1.6 N--m)
4
16
5
2
12
VACUATOR
DIRECTION
12
9
13
20
10
15
RIGHT
FRONT
12
12
Figure 4
1. Air cleaner assembly
2. Indicator
3. Adapter
4. Spring
5. Hex nut
6. Bolt
8. Hose
9. Mount bracket
10. Air cleaner stand
11. Hose clamp (3 used)
12. Flange nut (8 used)
13. Cap screw (2 used)
14. Hose clamp (2 used)
15. Flange head screw (4 used)
16. Air cleaner mounting band
17. Spacer
18. Hose
19. Hose clamp
20. Flange head screw (2 used)
7. Hose
Kubota Diesel Engine
Page 3 -- 6
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal (Fig. 4)
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting
decks, stop engine, engage parking brake and remove
key from the ignition switch. Raise and support hood.
1
2. Remove air cleaner components as needed using
Figures 4 as a guide.
3. See Operator’s Manual for air cleaner service and
maintenance procedures.
2
3
4
Installation (Fig. 4)
IMPORTANT: Any leaks in the air filter system will
allow dirt into engine and will cause serious engine
damage. Make sure that all air cleaner components
arein good condition and areproperly secured dur-
ing assembly.
Figure 5
1. Air cleaner assembly
2. Service indicator
3. Adapter
4. Vacuator valve
1. Assemble air cleaner system using Figure 4 as a
guide.
A. If service indicator (item 2) and adapter (item 3)
wereremovedfrom air cleaner housing, applythread
sealant to adapter threads before installing adapter
and indicator to housing. Install adapter so that
grooves inadapter hex andadapter filter elementare
installed toward service indicator (Fig. 5). Torque in-
dicator from 12 to 15 in--lb (1.4 to 1.6 N--m).
B. Makesurethat vacuator valveis pointeddownaf-
ter assembly.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 3 -- 7
Kubota Diesel Engine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exhaust System
13
3
RIGHT
1
FRONT
5
6
11
10
7
2
12
4
16
8
9
5
14
6
15
17
Figure 6
1. Gasket
7. Muffler support bracket
13. Exhaust header
14. Flange head screw (2 used)
15. Muffler
16. Tail pipe bracket
17. Lower clamp
2. Lock washer (2 used)
3. Flange nut (4 used)
4. Cap screw (2 used)
5. Carriage screw (4 used)
6. Flange nut (4 used)
8. Flange head screw (2 used)
9. Tail pipe bracket
10. Hex nut (2 used)
11. Upper clamp
12. Flange nut (4 used)
Kubota Diesel Engine
Page 3 -- 8
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal (Fig. 6)
3
1 (FIRST)
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting
decks, stop engine, engage parking brake and remove
key from the ignition switch. Raise and support hood.
4 (LAST)
2
CAUTION
The muffler and exhaust pipe may be hot. To
avoid possible burns, allow the engine and ex-
haust system to cool before working on the ex-
haust system.
2. Remove exhaust system using Figure 6 as a guide.
Installation (Fig. 6)
NOTE: Make sure muffler flange and exhaust manifold
sealing surfaces are free of debris or damage that may
prevent a tight seal.
Figure 7
1. Place new muffler gasket on the exhaust manifold.
2. If muffler support bracket (item 7) was removed, se-
cure it to engine with removed fasteners.
IMPORTANT: Finger tighten all exhaust system fas-
teners before tightening so that there is no preload
on the exhaust system due to exhaust system as-
sembly.
3. Installexhaust system components tothe engineus-
ing Figure 6 as a guide. Finger tighten all fasteners until
all exhaust system components have been installed.
4. Tightenexhaust system fasteners inthe followingor-
der:
A. Lift muffler as much as holes in muffler support
bracket (item 7) will allow. Tighten flange nuts (item
6) to secure muffler to support bracket.
B. Tighten flange nuts (item 3) to secure exhaust
header (item 13) to engine flange using order shown
in Figure 7.
C. Tighten hex nuts (item 10) to secure upper clamp
(item 11).
D. If tail pipe bracket (item 9) was removed, tighten
flange head screws (item 14) to secure bracket to
engine.
E. Tighten flange nuts (item 12) to secure lower
clamp (item 17).
F. Tighten fasteners (items 8 and 12) to secure tail
pipe brackets (items 9 and 16).
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 3 -- 9
Kubota Diesel Engine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radiator
9
40
16
45
35
28
36
RIGHT
FRONT
41
19
16
20
20
12
46
44
18
37 43
15
22
42
8
5
13
17
39
5
31
12
7
27
4
29
47
5
11
17
13
14
10
30
15
26
25
10
30
32
13
2
6
3
2
1
34
2
10
21
5
23
38
13
24
33
Figure 8
1. Overflow bottle
2. Hose clamp (3 used)
3. Hose
4. Foam seal (2 used)
5. Foam seal (4 used)
6. Mounting bracket (2 used)
17. Flange head screw (8 used)
18. Clamp (2 used)
19. Cap screw (2 used)
20. Washer (4 used)
21. Radiator
33. Flange head screw
34. Lock nut
35. O -ring
36. Screen
37. Intake screen
38. Hose
39. Oil cooler bracket
40. O -ring
41. Hydraulic tube
42. Foam seal
43. Spacer (5 used)
44. Flange head screw (5 used)
45. Hydraulic fitting (2 used)
46. Pin
22. Radiator frame
7. Oil cooler
8. Pipe plug
23. Reservoir bracket
24. Reservoir bracket
25. Upper radiator hose
26. Lower radiator hose
27. Fan shroud
28. Hydraulic hose (2 used)
29. Rivet (2 used)
30. Flange head screw (10 used)
9. Hydraulic fitting (2 used)
10. Hose clamp (4 used)
11. Foam seal (2 used)
12. Flange nut (4 used)
13. Flange nut (17 used)
14. Oil cooler mount plate (2 used)
15. Flange head screw (6 used)
16. Hose clamp (4 used)
31. Draw latch
32. Washer head screw (6 used)
47. Radiator cap
Kubota Diesel Engine
Page 3 -- 10
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal (Fig. 8)
10.Carefully pull radiator assembly from the machine.
Plug radiator and hose openings to prevent contamina-
tion.
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting
decks, stop engine, apply parking brake and remove
key from the ignition switch.
11.Inspect all foam seals placed between radiator, fan
shroud and radiator frame. Replace damaged foam
seals.
2. Raise and support the hood.
Installation (Fig. 8)
CAUTION
1. Remove plugs placed in radiator and hose openings
during the removal procedure.
Do not open radiator cap or drain coolant if the
radiator or engine is hot. Pressurized, hot cool-
ant can escape and cause burns.
2. Carefully position radiator assembly to the radiator
support. Position fan shroud to the radiator.
Ethylene--glycol antifreeze is poisonous. Dis-
pose of coolant properly, or store it in a properly
labeled container away from children and pets.
3. Securefanshroudandradiator toradiator framewith
removed flange head screws and flange nuts. Make
sure that at least 0.250” (6.4 mm) clearance exists at all
points between shroud opening and fan.
3. Drain coolant from radiator.
4. Position coolant reservoir and brackets to the fan
shroud. Secure reservoir to fan shroud and radiator
frame with two (2) flange head screws and flange nuts.
A. Slowly remove radiator cap from the radiator.
B. Place drain pan below the radiator draincock lo-
cated on the bottom of the radiator. Make sure that
drainpanis largeenoughto holdcooling systemcon-
tents (10 U.S. quarts (9.5 liters)).
5. Place spacers (item 43) into holes in foam seal (item
42). Position foam seal and air intake screen (item 37)
to radiator frame. Secure intake screen to machine with
five (5) flange head screws and flange nuts.
C. Loosen radiator draincock (threaded in) and al-
low coolant to drain from radiator.
6. Connect upper and lower radiator hoses to radiator
and secure with clamps.
4. Remove screen from machine.
7. Connect overflow hose to radiator fill opening and
secure with hose clamp.
5. Disconnect radiator hoses (upper and lower) from
the radiator.
8. Makesure radiator draincock is closed (threadedout
fully).
6. Loosen hose clamp and remove overflow hose from
radiator fill opening.
9. To allow air to escape during radiator filling, remove
pipe plug (item 8) from top of radiator. Fill radiator with
coolant. Make sureto install plug onceall air is bledfrom
radiator.
7. Remove two (2) flange head screws and flange nuts
that secure coolant reservoir and brackets to fan
shroud. Carefully position reservoir and brackets away
from the fan shroud.
10.After radiator has been properly filled with coolant,
install radiator cap.
8. Remove five (5) flange head screws and flange nuts
that secure air intake screen (item 37) to machine. Re-
move screen and foam seal (item 42). Locate and re-
trieve five (5) spacers (item 43).
11.Lower and secure hood.
9. Remove flange head screws and flange nuts that se-
cure fan shroud and radiator to radiator frame. Position
fan shroud away from the radiator.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 3 -- 11
Kubota Diesel Engine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine
30
16
1
15
11
3
26
18
19
10
20
17
31
5
21
14
7
4
27
5
4
24
22
12
23
5
13
23
9
25
2
29
9
32
9
22
6
34 to 42 ft--lb
9
(47 to 56 N--m)
8
RIGHT
9
FRONT
6
28
8
Figure 9
1. Engine assembly
12. Lock washer
13. Lock washer
14. Pulley
23. Negative battery cable
24. Air cleaner stand
25. Lock washer (12 used)
26. Fusible link harness
2. Cap screw (12 used)
3. Temperature sender
4. Engine mount (4 used)
15. V-belt
5. Flange head screw (13 used)
6. Snubbing washer (4 used)
7. Cap screw (4 used)
8. Flange nut (4 used)
9. Flange nut (14 used)
10. Fan clutch
16. Lock washer (4 used)
17. Cooling fan
18. Flat washer
19. Spring washer
20. Hex nut
21. Cap screw
22. Spacer (4 used)
27. Engine mount (4 used)
28. Bracket
29. Bracket
30. Hex nut
31. Flange head screw (4 used)
32. Wire harness ground
11. Stud (4 used)
Kubota Diesel Engine
Page 3 -- 12
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal (Fig. 9)
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting
decks, stop engine and remove key from the ignition
switch. Chock wheels tokeepthemachinefrommoving.
1
2
2. Open and support hood.
3
3. Disconnect negative (--) cable and then positive (+)
cable from the battery.
CAUTION
Do not open radiator cap or drain coolant if the
radiator or engine is hot. Pressurized, hot cool-
ant can escape and cause burns.
Figure 10
1. Throttle cable end
2. Swivel
3. Cable clamp
Ethylene--glycol antifreeze is poisonous. Dis-
pose of coolant properly, or store it in a properly
labeled container away from children and pets.
1
4. Drain coolant from radiator (see Radiator Removal
in this section).
2
3
5. Remove air cleaner from machine (see Air Cleaner
Removal in this section).
6. Remove exhaust system from machine (see Ex-
haust System Removal in this section).
7. Remove throttle cable from injector pump (Fig. 10):
A. Remove cap screw that secures throttle cable
end to swivel in speed control lever.
Figure 11
B. Loosen throttle cable clamp and remove cable
from clamp. Slide throttle cable end from swivel.
1. Fuel return hose
2. Fuel supply hose
3. Fuel/water filter
C. Position throttle cable away from the engine.
8. Disconnect hoses from engine:
A. Loosen clamps and remove upper and lower ra-
diator hoses from the engine.
2
B. At injector pump, loosen hose clamp and discon-
nect supply fuel hose from the injector pump fitting
(Fig. 11).
C. Loosen hose clamp and disconnect fuel return
hose from front injector body (Fig. 11).
1
D. Plug disconnectedhoses andengine openings to
prevent leakageandcontamination. Positiondiscon-
nected hoses away from engine.
Figure 12
1. Negative battery cable
2. Wire harness ground
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 3 -- 13
Kubota Diesel Engine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Disconnect hydraulic transmission drive shaft from
engine (see Hydraulic Transmission Drive Shaft Re-
moval in the Service and Repairs section of Chapter 4
-- Hydraulic System). Support drive shaft away from en-
gine.
Installation (Fig. 9)
1. Locate machine on alevel surfacewith cuttingdecks
lowered and key removed from the ignition switch.
Chock wheels to keep the machine from moving.
2. Make sure that all parts removed from the engine
during maintenance or rebuilding are installed to the en-
gine.
10.Disconnect wireharness connectors from thefollow-
ing engine components:
NOTE: Before disconnecting wire harness connectors,
label all electrical leads for assembly purposes.
3. If engine brackets were removed from the engine,
secure brackets to engine with lock washers and cap
screws. Torque cap screws from 34 to 42 ft--lb (47 to
56 N--m).
A. Alternator connector and stud.
B. Oil pressure switch located near the engine oil fil-
ter.
4. Install engine to machine.
C. Connector, fusible link connector and positive
battery cable from the starter motor.
A. Attach short section of chain between lift tabs lo-
cated on each end of the cylinder head
D. High temperature shut down switch and temper-
ature sender located on the water pump housing.
B. Connect a hoist or lift at the center of the short
section of chain. Apply enough tension on the short
chain so that the engine can be supported.
E. Fuel stop solenoid on injector pump.
F. Negative battery cable and wire harness ground
from injector pump (Fig. 12).
CAUTION
G. Glow plug strip.
One person should operate hoist or lift while a
second person guides the engine into the ma-
chine.
11.Remove engine from machine:
A. Attach short section of chain between lift tabs lo-
cated on each end of the cylinder head.
IMPORTANT: Make sure to not damage the en-
gine, fuel hoses, hydraulic lines, electrical har-
ness, radiator, battery or other parts while
installing the engine.
B. Connect a hoist or lift at the center of the short
section of chain. Apply enough tension on the short
chain so that the engine will be supported.
C. Lower engine to the machine frame. Make sure
fastener holes of the engine brackets are aligned
with the holes in the engine mounts.
C. Remove fasteners that secure the engine (with
brackets) to the engine mounts.
D. Insert cap screw down through each engine
bracket and mount. Place spacer, snubbing washer
and then flange nut on four (4) cap screws. Tighten
fasteners to secure engine to engine mounts.
CAUTION
One person should operate hoist or lift while a
second person guides the engine out of the ma-
chine.
5. Connect hydraulic transmission driveshaft toengine
(see Hydraulic Transmission Drive Shaft Installation in
the Service and Repairs section of Chapter 4 -- Hydrau-
lic System).
IMPORTANT: Make sure to not damage the en-
gine, fuel hoses, hydraulic lines, electrical har-
ness, radiator, battery or other parts while
removing the engine.
6. Connect all wire harness connectors to correct en-
gine components.
D. Raise engine and remove toward front of ma-
chine.
12.If necessary, remove engine brackets (item 27) from
engine.
Kubota Diesel Engine
Page 3 -- 14
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Remove plugs installed in hoses during disassem-
bly. Connect hoses to the engine:
9. Install air cleaner (see Air Cleaner Installation in this
section).
A. Connect fuel supply and fuel return hoses to en-
gine fittings (Fig. 11). Secure with hose clamps.
10.Install exhaust system to machine (see Exhaust
System Installation in this section).
B. Connect upper and lower radiator hoses to the
engine. Secure with hose clamps.
11.Makesure radiator draincock is closed (threadedout
fully). Fill radiator with coolant and install radiator cap
(see Radiator Installation in this section).
8. Connect throttle cable to injector pump (Fig. 10):
A. Route throttle cable to injector pump on engine.
12.Check engine oil level and adjust if needed.
13.Connect positive (+) battery cable to the battery and
then connect negative (--) cable.
B. Install the throttle cable end into the swivel in
speed control lever. Secure cable end with cap
screw.
14.Bleed fuel system.
C. Position cable under cable clamp.
15.Close and secure hood.
D. Adjust throttle control (see Adjust Throttle Con-
trol in the Adjustments section of this chapter).
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 3 -- 15
Kubota Diesel Engine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is intentionally blank.
Kubota Diesel Engine
Page 3 -- 16
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Hydraulic System
Table of Contents
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Operator’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Check Hydraulic Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Towing Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Hydraulic Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Hydraulic Hose and Tube Installation . . . . . . . . . . 5
Hydraulic Fitting Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 8
Traction Circuit Component Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
HYDRAULIC FLOW DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Traction Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Mow Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Mow Circuit Cutting Deck Blade Braking . . . . . . . 14
Lift Circuit: Raise Cutting Decks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Lift Circuit: Lower Cutting Decks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Steering Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
General Hydraulic System Problems . . . . . . . . . . 26
Traction Circuit Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Mow Circuit Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Lift Circuit Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Steering Circuit Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Traction Circuit Relief Valve (R3) and (R4)
SERVICE AND REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
General Precautions for Removing and Installing
Hydraulic System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Check Hydraulic Lines and Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Flush Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Filtering Closed--Loop Traction Circuit . . . . . . . . . 62
Hydraulic System Start--up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Hydraulic Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Hydraulic Pump Drive Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Hydraulic Pump Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Piston (Traction) Pump Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Gear Pump Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Wheel Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Front
Rear Wheel Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Wheel Motor Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
CrossTraxTM AWD Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
CrossTraxTM AWD Manifold Service . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Deck Control Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Deck Control Manifold Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Cutting Deck Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Cutting Deck Motor Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Lift Control Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Lift Control Manifold Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Lift Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Lift Cylinder Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Steering Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Steering Control Valve Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Steering Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Steering Cylinder Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Oil Cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
SAUER--DANFOSS LPV CLOSED CIRCUIT AXIAL
PISTON PUMPS REPAIR MANUAL
Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Traction Circuit Charge Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . 36
Gear Pump (P3) Flow Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Front Wheel Motor Efficiency Test . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Piston (Traction) Pump Flow Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Relief Valve (PRV1) and (PRV2) Pressure Test . 44
Gear Pump (P1) and (P2) Flow Test . . . . . . . . . . 46
Deck Motor Efficiency Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Lift Relief Valve (PRV) Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . 50
Gear Pump (P4) Flow Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Lift Cylinder Internal Leakage Test . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Steering Relief Valve (R10) Pressure Test . . . . . 56
Steering Cylinder Internal Leakage Test . . . . . . . 58
SAUER--DANFOSS LPV CLOSED CIRCUIT AXIAL
PISTON PUMPS SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS
PARKER TORQMOTORTM SERVICE PROCEDURE
(TC, TB, TE, TJ, TF, TG, TH AND TL SERIES)
SAUER--DANFOSS STEERING UNIT TYPE OSPM
SERVICE MANUAL
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 1
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Item
Description
Piston (Traction) Pump
Maximum Pump Displacement (per revolution)
Sauer--Danfoss, LPV Closed Circuit Axial Piston Design
3
2.14 in (35 cc)
Gear Pump
Casappa 4 section, positive displacement gear type pump
3
Section P1/P2 Displacement (per revolution)
Section P3 Displacement (per revolution)
Section P4 Displacement (per revolution)
1.03 in (16.84 cc)
3
0.37 in (6.1 cc)
3
0.24 in (3.9 cc)
Charge Circuit Relief (R5) Pressure
200 PSI (14 bar)
Traction Circuit Relief Pressure
Forward (R3)
Reverse (R4)
3625 PSI (250 bar)
3625 PSI (250 bar)
Front Wheel Motors
Displacement (per revolution)
Parker orbital rotor motor, TG Series
3
24.7 in (405 cc)
Rear Wheel Motors
Displacement (per revolution)
Parker orbital rotor motor, TL Series
3
18.9 in (310 cc)
Mow Circuit Relief Pressure
Rear Mow Circuit (PRV1)
Front Mow Circuit (PRV2)
2500 PSI (175 bar)
3500 PSI (241 bar)
Cutting Deck Motor
Displacement (per revolution)
Cross Over Relief Valve Pressure
Casappa gear motor
1.05 in (17.16 cc)
1813 PSI (125 bar)
3
Steering Valve
Displacement (per revolution)
Sauer--Danfoss Steering Unit, Type OSPMS
3
6.1 in (100 cc)
Steering Circuit Relief (R10) Pressure
Lift Circuit Relief (PRV) Pressure
1000 PSI (70 bar)
2000 PSI (138 bar)
Hydraulic Filter (Charge and Steering Circuits)
Hydraulic Filter (Mow and Lift Circuits)
Spin--on Cartridge Type with 50 PSI (3.4 bar) Relief in Adapter
Spin--on Cartridge Type with 50 PSI (3.4 bar) Relief in Adapter
(filter adapter includes filter change indicator)
Hydraulic Oil
See Operator’s Manual
Hydraulic Reservoir Capacity
14 U.S. Gallons (53 Liters)
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 2
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General Information
Operator’s Manual
The Operator’s Manual provides information regarding
the operation, general maintenance and maintenance
intervals for your Groundsmaster 4300--D. Refer to that
publication for additional information when servicing the
machine.
Check Hydraulic Fluid
The hydraulic system on your Groundsmaster is de-
signed to operate on high quality hydraulic fluid. The hy-
draulic system reservoir holds approximately 14 U.S.
gallons (53 liters) of hydraulic fluid. Check level of hy-
draulicfluiddaily. SeeOperator’sManualforfluidlevel
checking procedure and hydraulic oil recommenda-
tions.
1
Figure 1
1. Hydraulic reservoir cap
Towing Machine
IMPORTANT: If towing limits are exceeded, severe
damage to the piston (traction) pump may occur.
If it becomes necessary to tow or push the machine, tow
or push at a speed below 3 mph (4.8 kph), and for a very
short distance. If the machine needs to be moved a con-
siderable distance, machine should be transported on a
trailer. The piston (traction) pump is equipped with a by-
passvalvethatneedstobeloosened fortowing orpush-
ing (Fig. 2). Refer to Operator’s Manual for Towing
Procedures.
2
1
Figure 2
1. Piston (traction) pump
2. Bypass valve
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 3
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydraulic Hoses
Hydraulic hoses are subject to extreme conditions such
as pressure differentials during operation and exposure
to weather, sun, chemicals, very warm storage condi-
tionsormishandlingduringoperation andmaintenance.
These conditions can cause hose damage and deterio-
ration. Some hoses are more susceptible to these
conditions than others. Inspect all machine hydraulic
hoses frequently for signs of deterioration or damage:
WARNING
Before disconnecting or performing any work on
hydraulic system, relieve all pressure in system
(see Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in this
section).
Hard, cracked, cut, abraded, charred, leaking or
otherwise damaged hose.
Keepbodyandhandsawayfrompinholeleaksor
nozzles that eject hydraulic fluid under high
pressure. Use paper or cardboard, not hands, to
search for leaks. Hydraulic fluid escaping under
pressure can have sufficient force to penetrate
the skin and cause serious injury. If fluid is in-
jected into the skin, it must be surgically re-
moved within a few hours by a doctor familiar
with thistype ofinjury. Gangrenemay resultfrom
such an injury.
Kinked, crushed, flattened or twisted hose.
Blistered, soft, degraded or loose hose cover.
Cracked, damaged or badly corroded hose fittings.
When replacing a hydraulic hose, be sure that the hose
is straight (not twisted) before tightening the fittings.
This can be done by observing the imprint (layline) on
the hose. Use two wrenches when tightening a hose;
hold the hose straight with one wrench and tighten the
hose swivel nut onto the fitting with the second wrench
(see Hydraulic Hose and Tube Installation in this sec-
tion). If the hose has an elbow at one end, tighten the
swivel nut on that end before tightening the nut on the
straight end of the hose.
For additional hydraulic hose information, refer to Toro
Service Training Book, Hydraulic Hose Servicing (Part
Number 94813SL).
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 4
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydraulic Hose and Tube Installation (O--Ring Face Seal Fitting)
1. Make sure threads and sealing surfaces of the hose/
tube and the fitting are free of burrs, nicks, scratches or
any foreign material.
C. Use a second wrench to tighten the nutto the cor-
rect Flats From Wrench Resistance (F.F.W.R.). The
markingsonthenutandfittingbodywillverifythatthe
connection has been properly tightened.
2. As a preventative measure against leakage, it is rec-
ommended that the face seal O--ring be replaced any
time the connection is opened. Make sure the O--ring is
installedandproperlyseatedinthefittinggroove.Lightly
lubricate the O--ring with clean hydraulic oil.
Size
F.F.W.R.
4 (1/4 in. nominal hose or tubing)
6 (3/8 in.)
8 (1/2 in.)
10 (5/8 in.)
12 (3/4 in.)
1/2 to 3/4
1/2 to 3/4
1/2 to 3/4
1/2 to 3/4
1/3 to 1/2
1/3 to 1/2
3. Place the hose/tube against the fitting body so that
theflatfaceofthehose/tubesleevefullycontactstheO--
ring in the fitting.
16 (1 in.)
Swivel Nut
Fitting Body
O--ring
4. Thread the swivel nut onto the fitting by hand. While
holding the hose/tube with a wrench, use a torque
wrench to tighten the swivel nut to the recommended
installation torque shown in Figure 5. This tightening
process will require the use of an offset wrench (e.g.
crowfoot wrench). Use of an offset wrench will affect
torque wrench calibration due to the effective length
change of the torque wrench. Tightening torque when
usingatorquewrenchwithanoffsetwrenchwillbelower
than the listed installation torque (see Using a Torque
Wrench with an Offset Wrench in the Torque Specifica-
tions section of Chapter 2 -- Product Records and Main-
tenance).
Tube or Hose
Figure 3
5. If a torque wrench is not available or if space at the
swivel nut prevents use of a torque wrench, an alternate
method of assembly is the Flats From Wrench Resist-
ance (F.F.W.R.) method (Fig. 4).
Mark Nut
Final
Position
and Fitting
Body
A. Using a wrench, tighten the swivel nutonto thefit-
tinguntillightwrenchresistanceis reached(approxi-
mately 30 in--lb).
Initial
Position
Extend Line
AT WRENCH RESISTANCE
AFTER TIGHTENING
B. Mark the swivel nut and fitting body. Hold the
hose/tube with a wrench to prevent it from turning.
Figure 4
Fitting Dash Size
Hose/Tube Side Thread Size
9/16 -- 18
Installation Torque
4
6
18 to 22 ft--lb (25 to 29 N--m)
27 to 33 ft--lb (37 to 44 N--m)
37 to 47 ft--lb (51 to 63 N--m)
60 to 74 ft--lb (82 to 100 N--m)
85 to 105 ft--lb (116 to 142 N--m)
110 to 136 ft--lb (150 to 184 N--m)
140 to 172 ft--lb (190 to 233 N--m)
11/16 -- 16
8
13/16 -- 16
10
12
16
20
1 -- 14
1 3/16 -- 12
1 7/16 -- 12
1 11/16 -- 12
Figure 5
Page 4 -- 5
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydraulic Fitting Installation (SAE Straight Thread O--Ring Fitting into Component Port)
Non--Adjustable Fitting (Fig. 6)
5. If a torque wrench is not available, or if space at the
portpreventsuseofatorque wrench, an alternatemeth-
od of assembly is the Flats From Finger Tight (F.F.F.T.)
method.
1. Make sure all threads and sealing surfaces of fitting
and component port are free of burrs, nicks, scratches
or any foreign material.
A. Install the fitting into the port and tighten it down
full length until finger tight.
2. As a preventative measure against leakage, it is rec-
ommended that the O--ring be replaced any time the
connection is opened.
B. If port material is steel, tighten the fitting to the
listed F.F.F.T. If port material is aluminum, tighten fit-
ting to 60% of listed F.F.F.T.
3. Lightly lubricate the O--ring with clean hydraulic oil.
Fittingthreadsshouldbecleanwithnolubricantapplied.
Size
F.F.F.T.
IMPORTANT: Before installing fitting into port, de-
termine port material. If fitting is to be installed into
an aluminum port, installation torque is reduced.
4 (1/4 in. nominal hose or tubing)
6 (3/8 in.)
8 (1/2 in.)
10 (5/8 in.)
12 (3/4 in.)
1.00 + 0.25
1.50 + 0.25
1.50 + 0.25
1.50 + 0.25
1.50 + 0.25
1.50 + 0.25
4. Install the fitting into the port. Then, use a torque
wrench and socket to tighten the fitting to the recom-
mended installation torque shown in Figure 7.
16 (1 in.)
NOTE: Use of an offset wrench (e.g. crowfoot wrench)
will affect torque wrench calibration due to the effective
length change of the torque wrench. Tightening torque
when using a torque wrench with an offset wrench will
be less than the recommended installation torque. See
Using a Torque Wrench with an Offset Wrench in the
Torque Specifications section of Chapter 2 -- Product
Records and Maintenance to determine necessary con-
version information.
Fitting
O--ring
Figure 6
Fitting
Dash Size
Fitting Port Side
Thread Size
Installation Torque Into
Steel Port
Installation Torque Into
Aluminum Port
4
5
7/16 -- 20
1/2 -- 20
15 to 19 ft--lb (21 to 25 N--m)
18 to 22 ft--lb (25 to 29 N--m)
34 to 42 ft--lb (47 to 56 N--m)
58 to 72 ft--lb (79 to 97 N--m)
99 to 121 ft--lb (135 to 164 N--m)
134 to 164 ft--lb (182 to 222 N--m)
160 to 196 ft--lb (217 to 265 N--m)
202 to 248 ft--lb (274 to 336 N--m)
9 to 11 ft--lb (13 to 15 N--m)
11 to 15 ft--lb (15 to 20 N--m)
20 to 26 ft--lb (28 to 35 N--m)
35 to 43 ft--lb (48 to 58 N--m)
60 to 74 ft--lb (82 to 100 N--m)
81 to 99 ft--lb (110 to 134 N--m)
96 to 118 ft--lb (131 to 160 N--m)
121 to 149 ft--lb (165 to 202 N--m)
149 to 183 ft--lb (202 to 248 N--m)
6
9/16 -- 18
3/4 -- 16
8
10
12
14
16
20
7/8 -- 14
1 1/16 -- 12
1 3/16 -- 12
1 5/16 -- 12
1 5/8 -- 12
247 to 303 ft--lb (335 to 410 N--m)
Figure 7
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 6
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustable Fitting (Fig. 8)
1. Make sure all threads and sealing surfaces of fitting
and component port are free of burrs, nicks, scratches
or any foreign material.
2. As a preventative measure against leakage, it is rec-
ommended that the O--ring be replaced any time the
connection is opened.
Lock Nut
3. Lightly lubricate the O--ring with clean hydraulic oil.
Fittingthreadsshouldbecleanwithnolubricantapplied.
Back--up Washer
4. Turn back the lock nut as far as possible. Make sure
the back up washer is not loose and is pushed up as far
as possible (Step 1 in Figure 9).
O--ring
Figure 8
IMPORTANT: Before installing fitting into port, de-
termine port material. If fitting is to be installed into
an aluminum port, installation torque is reduced.
5. Install the fitting into the port and tighten finger tight
until the washer contacts the face of the port (Step 2 in
Figure 9). Make sure that the fitting does not bottom in
the port during installation.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
6. To put the fitting in the desired position, unscrew it by
the required amount to align fitting with incoming hose
or tube, but no more than one full turn (Step 3 in Figure
9).
7. Hold the fitting in the desired position with a wrench
and use a torque wrench to tighten the lock nut to the
recommended installation torque shown in Figure 7.
This tightening process will require the use of an offset
wrench (e.g. crowfoot wrench). Use of an offset wrench
will affect torque wrench calibration due to the effective
length change of the torque wrench. Tightening torque
when using a torque wrench with an offset wrench will
be lower than the listed installation torque (see Using a
Torque Wrench with an Offset Wrench in the Torque
Specifications section of Chapter 2 -- Product Records
and Maintenance).
Figure 9
8. If a torque wrench is not available, or if space at the
portpreventsuseofatorque wrench, an alternatemeth-
od of assembly is the Flats From Finger Tight (F.F.F.T.)
method. Hold the fitting in the desired position with a
wrench and, if port material is steel, tighten the lock nut
with a second wrench to the listed F.F.F.T (Step 4 in Fig-
ure 9). If port material is aluminum, tighten fitting to 60%
of listed F.F.F.T.
Size
F.F.F.T.
4 (1/4 in. nominal hose or tubing)
6 (3/8 in.)
8 (1/2 in.)
10 (5/8 in.)
12 (3/4 in.)
1.00 + 0.25
1.50 + 0.25
1.50 + 0.25
1.50 + 0.25
1.50 + 0.25
1.50 + 0.25
16 (1 in.)
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 7
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure
Before disconnecting or performing any work on the hy-
draulic system, all pressure in the hydraulic system
mustberelieved.Parkmachineonalevelsurface,lower
cutting decks fully, stop engine and engage parking
brake.
To relieve hydraulic pressure in lift circuit, turn ignition
switchto ON(do notstartengine)and fullylower thecut-
ting decks. After decks are fully lowered, turn ignition
switch to OFF and remove key from the switch.
IMPORTANT: If machine will be serviced on a lift or
at an elevated position, fully lower the cutting decks
after the machine has been raised to ensure that the
lift cylinders are fully extended. Pressure will be
maintained in the lift cylinders unless they are fully
extended.
To relieve hydraulic pressure in traction circuit, move
traction pedal to both forward and reverse directions. To
relieve hydraulic pressure in steering circuit, rotate
steering wheel in both directions.
System pressure in cutting circuit is relieved when the
cutting decks are disengaged.
Traction Circuit Component Failure
The traction circuit on Groundsmaster 4300--D ma-
chines is a closed loop system that includes the piston
(traction) pump and four (4) wheel motors. If a compo-
nentinthetractioncircuitshouldfail, debrisandcontam-
ination from the failed component will circulate
throughout the traction circuit. This contamination can
damage other components in the circuit so it must be re-
moved to prevent additional component failure.
cuit to allow oil flow throughout the circuit. The filter will
remove contamination from the traction circuit during
operation. Because the Toro high flow filter is bi--direc-
tional, the traction circuitcan be operated in both the for-
ward and reverse direction. The filter should be
removed from the machine after contamination has
been removed from the traction circuit. See Filtering
Closed--LoopTractionCircuitintheServiceandRepairs
section of this chapter for additional information on us-
ing the Toro high flow hydraulic filter.
The recommended method of removing traction circuit
contamination would be to temporarily install the high
flow hydraulic filter (see Special Tools in this chapter)
into the circuit. This filter should be used when connect-
ing hydraulic test gauges in order to test traction circuit
components or after replacing a failed traction circuit
component (e.g. traction (piston) pump or wheelmotor).
The filter will ensure that contaminates are removed
from the closed loop and thus, do not cause additional
component damage.
The alternative tousing theToro highflow hydraulicfilter
kit after a traction circuit component failure would be to
disassemble, drain and thoroughly clean all compo-
nents, tubes and hoses in the traction circuit. If any de-
bris remains in the traction circuit and the machine is
operated, thedebriscancauseadditionalcircuitcompo-
nent failure.
NOTE: The traction pump case drain could allow any
debrisinthetractioncircuittocontaminateotherhydrau-
lic circuits on the machine.
Once the Toro high flow hydraulic filter kit has been
placed in the circuit, raise and support the machine with
all wheels off the ground. Then, operate the traction cir-
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 8
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydraulic Schematic
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 9
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydraulic Flow Diagrams
Figure 10
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 10
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Traction Circuit
The hydraulic traction circuit consists of a variable dis-
placementpistonpump(P5)connectedinaclosedloop,
parallel circuit to four (4) orbital roller vane wheel mo-
tors. The traction pump input shaft is rotated by a drive
shaft that is driven from the engine flywheel.
Gear pump section (P3) supplies oil flow for the steering
circuit and also provides a constant supply of charge oil
to the closed loop traction circuit. This charge oil pro-
videslubricationfortractioncircuitcomponentsandalso
replenishes traction circuit oil that is lost due to internal
leakage in the traction circuit.
Forward traction circuit pressure can be measured at a
test port located in the hydraulic tube that connects the
front wheel motors. Reverse traction circuit pressure
can be measured at test ports in the AWD control man-
ifold.
Gear pump section (P3) takes its suction from the hy-
draulicreservoir.Chargepumpflowisdirectedtothelow
pressure side of the closed loop traction circuit. Charge
relief valve (R5) located in the traction pump limits the
charge relief pressure to 200 PSI (14 bar).
Forward Direction (Fig. 10)
The piston pump is equipped with a case drain to allow
internal leakage to be removed from the pump. The
case drain is connected to the gear pump inlet.
Pushing the top of the traction pedal angles the traction
pump swash plate to create a flow of oil. This oil flow is
directed to the wheel motors via hydraulic hoses and
tubes to drive the wheels in the forward direction. Trac-
tion pump flow is directed to the front wheel motors and
thento theopposite rearwheel motorsto maximizetrac-
tion. To reduce tire scuffing when turning, traction sys-
tem pressure is equalized in the AWD control manifold
with an orifice and a bi--directional relief valve. Check
valves in the AWD manifold allow the rear wheel motors
toover--runduringtightturns. Forwardtractionpressure
is limited to 3625 PSI (250 bar) by the forward traction
relief valve (R3) located in the traction pump.
The piston pump (P5) includes a flushing valve that
bleeds off a small amount of hydraulic fluid for cooling
of the closed loop traction circuit. The charge system re-
plenishes oil that is bled from the traction circuit by the
flushing valve.
Reverse Direction
The traction circuit operates essentially the same in re-
verse as it does in the forward direction. However, the
flow through the circuit is reversed. Pushing the bottom
of the traction pedal rotates the traction pump swash
plate to create a flow of oil. This oil is directed to the
wheel motors to drive the wheels in the reverse direc-
tion. Reverse traction pressure is limited to 3625 PSI
(250bar)bythereversetractionreliefvalve(R4)located
in the traction pump.
Oil flowing from the wheel motors returns to the variable
displacement pump and is continuously pumped
through the traction circuit as long as the traction pedal
is pushed.
The angle of the swash plate determines pump flow and
ultimately traction speed. When the traction pedal is de-
pressedasmallamount, asmallswashplaterotationre-
sultsinlowpumpoutputandlowertractionspeed.When
the traction pedal is depressed fully, the pump swash
plate rotates fully to provide maximum pump output and
traction speed.
Oil flowing from the wheel motors returns to the traction
pump and is continuously pumped through the closed
loop traction circuit as long as the traction pedal is
pushed.
The charge circuit and flushing valve function the same
in reverse as they do in the forward direction.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 11
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figure 11
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 12
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mow Circuit
A four section gear pump is coupled to the piston (trac-
tion) pump. Gear pump sections (P1) and (P2) supply
hydraulic flow for the mow circuit. These gear pumps
take their suction from the hydraulic reservoir.
a manifold sensing line. This flow passes through an ori-
fice which causes a pressure differential that shifts logic
cartridge LC1. The shifted LC1 allows circuit flow to ro-
tate the rear cutting deck motors. Return oil from the
deck motors is directed through the shifted logic car-
tridge (LC1), manifold port T, oil cooler, oil filter and then
to the reservoir. Deck motor case drain leakage returns
directly to the hydraulic reservoir.
The deck control manifold contains two (2) independent
control circuits for the front and rear cutting decks. Each
circuit is supplied by its own pump section. Pump sec-
tion (P1) supplies hydraulic power to the rear cutting
decks with circuit control by proportional relief valve
(PRV1), relief valve (RV1) and logic cartridge (LC1) in
the deck control manifold. Pump section (P2) supplies
thefrontcuttingdeckswithcircuitcontrolbyproportional
reliefvalve(PRV2),reliefvalve(RV2)andlogiccartridge
(LC2) in the deck control manifold. Both circuits share
manifoldportT,whichdrainstotheoilcooler,oilfilterand
hydraulic reservoir.
Mow circuit pressure for the rear cutting decks (pump
section P1) can be measured at deck control manifold
port G1.
The front cutting deck circuit operates the same as the
rear cutting deck circuit. Deck control manifold propor-
tional relief (PRV2), relief valve (RV2) and logic car-
tridge (LC2) are used to control the front cutting deck
circuit. Mow circuit pressure for the front cutting decks
(pump section P2) can be measured at deck control
manifold port G2.
Cutting deck motors are equipped with a cross over re-
lief valve to prevent hydraulic component damage in
case a single cutting deck should stall.
Cutting Deck Circuit Relief
The machine controller uses inputs from various ma-
chine switches to determine when the solenoids for pro-
portional relief valves (PRV1) and (PRV2) are to be
energized. The controller also provides a slight delay in
activation of rear cutting decks.
Maximum cutting deck circuit pressure is limited by the
proportional relief valves in the hydraulic control man-
ifold. The front deck circuit valve (PRV2) is set at 3500
PSI (241 bar) and the rear deck circuit valve (PRV1) is
set at 2500 PSI (175 bar).
PTO Not Engaged
When increased circuit resistance is met (e.g. a cutting
blade should strike an object), the pressure increase is
felt at the proportional relief valve. If circuit pressure
should exceed the reliefsetting, the valve will open to al-
low circuit flow to return to tank through manifold port T.
When circuit pressure lowers, the valve closes to allow
flow to return to the deck motors.
When proportional relief valves (PRV1) and (PRV2) are
not energized (PTO switch in the OFF position or cutting
decks raised), flow from pump sections (P1) and (P2) is
directedthroughtheunshiftedproportionalreliefvalves,
out the mow control manifold port T and then returns to
thehydraulicreservoirthroughtheoilfilterandoilcooler,
bypassing the deck motors. The manifold logic car-
tridges (LC1 and LC2) remain in the unshifted position
to prevent any return flow from the deck motors so the
motors will not rotate.
#4
#1
#5
PTO Engaged (Fig. 11)
GROUNDSMASTER
4300--D CUTTING
DECK LOCATIONS
When proportional relief valve (PRV1) is energized by
the controller (PTO switch in the ON position and cutting
decks lowered), the proportional relief valve shifts and
prevents pump section (P1) flow through the valve.
Pump flow that entered deck control manifold port P1 is
then directed toward the rear cutting deck motors. Be-
cause logic cartridge LC1 is unshifted, circuit pressure
increases until manifold relief valve (RV1) is opened by
a manifold pilot piston. The shifted relief valve allows a
small amount of hydraulic flow to return to tank through
#2
#3
Figure 12
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 13
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mow Circuit Cutting Deck Blade Braking
When the operator turns the PTO switch OFF or if the
decks are raised with the PTO switch ON, the deck con-
trol manifold proportional relief valves (PRV1 and
PRV2) are de--energized causing circuit flow to bypass
the deck motors and return to the reservoir out manifold
portT(refertoinformationinMowCircuitinthissection).
Without circuit flow, the manifold relief valve (RV1 or
RV2)returnstoitsneutralpositionwhichcausesthelog-
ic cartridge (LC1 or LC2) to shift to its neutral position,
blocking return flow from the deck motors and slowing
the cutting blades (Fig. 13).
FROM
GEAR
PUMP
ORIFICE
Theinertiaoftherotatingcuttingblades, however, effec-
tively turns the deck motors into pumps causing an in-
crease in pressure as the flow from the motor comes up
against the closed logic cartridge (LC1 or LC2). When
this pressure builds to approximately 1500 PSI (105
bar), the relief valve (RV1 or RV2) re--opens which al-
lows a small amount of hydraulic flow to return to tank
through a manifold sensing line (Fig. 14). This flow
causes a pressure differential that shifts the logic car-
tridge (LC1 or LC2) to once again allow oil flow from the
motors (Fig. 15). When return pressure drops below
1500 PSI (105 bar), the relief valve (RV1 or RV2) re-
seats and causes the logic cartridge (LC1 or LC2) to
close again, blocking return flow from the deck motors
to further slow the cutting blades. This action of the relief
valve opening and the logic cartridge shifting occurs
several times in a very short time frame as the blades fi-
nally come to a stop. Once the blades have stopped, the
logic cartridge (LC1 or LC2) remains in the neutral posi-
tion to keep the deck motors from rotating.
FROM
FRONT
MOW
DECK
CONTROL
MANIFOLD
TO
OIL
COOLER
CIRCUIT
Figure 13
FROM
GEAR
PUMP
ORIFICE
FROM
FRONT
MOW
CIRCUIT
DECK
CONTROL
MANIFOLD
TO
OIL
COOLER
Figure 14
FROM
GEAR
PUMP
ORIFICE
FROM
FRONT
MOW
CIRCUIT
DECK
CONTROL
MANIFOLD
TO
OIL
COOLER
Figure 15
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 15
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figure 16
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 16
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lift Circuit: Raise Cutting Decks
A four section gear pump is coupled to the piston (trac-
tion) pump. Gear pump section (P4) supplies hydraulic
flowtotheliftcontrolmanifoldandliftcylinders. Thegear
pump takes its suction from the hydraulic reservoir.
LIFT CIRCUIT: NOT RAISING OR LOWERING
The lift control manifold includes three (3) electrically
operated valves. Solenoid valve (S1) is used to direct oil
flowtoextendthe liftcylinders whenenergized orretract
them when de--energized. Solenoid valve (S2) allows
hydraulic flow from the rod end of the lift cylinders when
energized and prevents oil passage from the lift cylin-
ders when de--energized. Proportional relief valve
(PRV) is used to control the operation of the manifold
logic cartridge (LC) and also acts as a circuit reliefvalve.
While operating the machine during conditions of not
raising or lowering the cutting decks (joystick in the neu-
tral (center) position) (Fig. 17), all of the lift manifold
valves (S1, S2 and PRV) are de--energized. The de--en-
ergized relief valve (PRV) allows hydraulic flow to return
to tank through the manifold. This flow causes a pres-
sure differential that shifts the logic cartridge (LC) which
allows pump flow to bypass the lift cylinders. Flow re-
turns to the oil filter and then to the hydraulic reservoir.
S1, S2 AND PRV
DE--ENERGIZED
LC SHIFTED
Raise Cutting Decks (Fig. 16)
LIFT
CONTROL
MANIFOLD
Whenthejoystickismovedtotheraiseposition,thecon-
troller energizes the proportional relief valve (PRV). The
energized relief valve (PRV) prevents flow through the
valve which returns logic cartridge LC to the unshifted
position. With lift manifold cartridges in this position,
pump flow is directed to the rod end of all lift cylinders to
retract the cylinders and raise all cutting decks. Flow to
the lift cylinders bypasses the control manifold fixed ori-
fices to prevent flow restriction during deck raising.
FROM
PUMP P4
TO OIL
FILTER
Figure 17
While the cutting decks are being raised, the proportion-
al relief valve (PRV) has a secondary function as a cir-
cuit relief to limit lift circuit pressure to 2000 PSI (138
bar). Lift circuit pressure can be monitored at lift control
manifold port G4.
When the joystick is returned to the neutral (center)
position, the proportional relief valve (PRV) is de--ener-
gized. The de--energized relief valve (PRV) allows hy-
draulic flow to return to tank through the manifold. This
flow causes a pressure differential that shifts the logic
cartridge (LC) which allows pump flow to bypass the lift
cylinders. All lift cylinders and cutting decks are held in
the raised position by de--energized valve S2.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 17
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figure 18
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 18
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lift Circuit: Lower Cutting Decks
A four section gear pump is coupled to the piston (trac-
tion) pump. Gear pump section (P4) supplies hydraulic
flowtotheliftcontrolmanifoldandliftcylinders. Thegear
pump takes its suction from the hydraulic reservoir.
Counterbalance
Once the cutting decks are fully lowered, the lift control
manifold proportional relief valve (PRV) maintains back
pressure (counterbalance) on the deck lift cylinders.
This counterbalance pressure transfers cutting deck
weight to the machine to improve traction. A set of wires
locatedbehindthecontrolarmaccesscoverallowcoun-
terbalance pressure to be adjusted to one of three set-
tings.
The lift control manifold includes three (3) electrically
operated valves. Solenoid valve (S1) is used to direct oil
flowtoextendthe liftcylinders whenenergized orretract
them when de--energized. Solenoid valve (S2) allows
hydraulic flow from the rod end of the lift cylinders when
energized and prevents oil passage from the lift cylin-
ders when de--energized. Proportional relief valve
(PRV) is used to control the operation of the manifold
logic cartridge (LC) and also acts as a circuit reliefvalve.
Apressuretransducerlocatedintheforwardtractionhy-
draulictubeisused bythe controlleras aninputtodeter-
mine traction circuit pressure. Based on transducer
input and machine counterbalance setting, an electrical
output from the controller is provided to the lift control
manifold proportional relief valve (PRV) to vary counter-
balance pressure. As traction pressure increases (e.g.
climbing a hill) the counterbalance pressure also in-
creases to increase the weight on the tires and improve
traction.
While operating the machine during conditions of not
raising or lowering the cutting decks (joystick in the neu-
tral (center) position) (Fig. 19), all of the lift manifold
valves (S1, S2 and PRV) are de--energized. The de--en-
ergized relief valve (PRV) allows hydraulic flow to return
to tank through the manifold. This flow causes a pres-
sure differential that shifts the logic cartridge (LC) which
allows pump flow to bypass the lift cylinders. Flow re-
turns to the oil filter and then to the hydraulic reservoir.
LIFT CIRCUIT: NOT RAISING OR LOWERING
NOTE: When the mow speed limiter is in the transport
position, the cutting decks will not lower.
Lower Cutting Decks (Fig. 18)
When the joystick is moved to the lower position, the
controller energizes all of the lift manifold valves (S1, S2
and PRV). The energized relief valve (PRV) prevents
flow through the valve which returns logic cartridge LC
to the unshifted position. With lift manifold cartridges in
this position, pump flow is directed to the barrel end of
all liftcylinders to extend the cylinders and lower the cut-
ting decks. Fixed orifices in the lift control manifold (C2,
C4, C6 and C8) control the lowering speed of the cutting
decks by providing a restriction for the return flow from
the lift cylinders.
While the cutting decks are being lowered, the propor-
tional relief valve (PRV) has a secondary function as a
circuit relief to limit lift circuit pressure to 2000 PSI (138
bar). Lift circuit pressure can be monitored at lift control
manifold port G4.
S1, S2 AND PRV
DE--ENERGIZED
LC SHIFTED
LIFT
CONTROL
MANIFOLD
When the joystick is returned to the neutral (center)
position, all of the lift manifold valves (S1, S2 and PRV)
are de--energized. The de--energized relief valve (PRV)
allows hydraulic flow to return to tank through the man-
ifold. This flow causes a pressure differential that shifts
the logic cartridge (LC) which allows pump flow to by-
pass the lift cylinders. All lift cylinders and cutting decks
are held in position by de--energized valve S2.
FROM
PUMP P4
TO OIL
FILTER
Figure 19
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 19
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figure 20
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 20
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering Circuit
A four section gear pump is coupled to the piston (trac-
tion) pump. Gear pump section P3 supplies hydraulic
flow to the steering control valve and for the traction
charge circuit. The gear pump takes its suction from the
hydraulicreservoir. Steeringcircuitpressureislimitedto
1000 PSI (70 bar) by a relief valve (R10) located in the
steering control valve.
Right Turn (Fig. 20)
When a right turn is made with the engine running, the
turning of the steering wheel positions the steering con-
trol spool valve so that flow is directed through the top
of the spool. Flow entering the steering control valve at
the P port goes through the spool and is routed to two
places. As in a left turn, most of the flow through the
valveisbypassedouttheTportbacktothetransmission
oil filter and traction charge circuit. Also like a left turn,
the remainder of the flow is directed through rotary me-
ter (V1) but goes out port R. Pressure extends the steer-
ing cylinder piston for a right turn. The rotary meter
ensures that the oil flow to the steering cylinder is pro-
portional to the amount of the turning on the steering
wheel. Fluid leaving the steering cylinder flows back
through the steering control spool valve then through
the T port and to the hydraulic reservoir.
With the steering wheel in the neutral position and the
engine running, hydraulic flow enters the steering con-
trol valve at the P port and goes through the steering
controlspoolvalve, bypassing the rotary meter (V1) and
steering cylinder. Flow leaves the control valve through
theTporttothetransmissionoilfilterandtractioncharge
circuit.
Left Turn (Fig. 20)
When a left turn is made with the engine running, the
turning of the steering wheel positions the steering con-
trol spool valve so that flow is directed through the bot-
tomofthespool. Flowenteringthesteeringcontrolvalve
at the P port goes through the spool and is routed to two
places. First, most of the flow through the valve is by-
passed out the T port back to the transmission oil filter
andtractionchargecircuit. Second, theremainderofthe
flow isdirected throughthe rotarymeter (V1)and outthe
L port. Pressure contracts the steering cylinder piston
for a left turn. The rotary meter ensures that the oil flow
to the steering cylinder is proportional to the amount of
turning on the steering wheel. Fluid leaving the steering
cylinder flows back through the steering control spool
valve and then out of the steering control valve through
the T port.
The steering control valve returns to the neutral position
when turning is completed.
The steering control valve returns to the neutral position
when turning is completed.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 21
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Tools
Order Special Tools from your Toro Distributor.
Hydraulic Pressure Test Kit
Use to take various pressure readings for diagnostic
tests. Quick disconnect fittings provided attach directly
to mating fittings on machine test ports without tools. A
high pressure hose is provided for remote readings. Kit
contains one each: 1000 PSI (70 Bar), 5000 PSI (350
Bar) and 10000 PSI (700 Bar) gauges. Use gauges as
recommended in the Testing section of this chapter.
Toro Part Number: TOR47009
Figure 21
15 GPM Hydraulic Tester Kit (Pressure and Flow)
Use to test hydraulic circuits and components for flow
andpressurecapacitiesasrecommendedintheTesting
sectionofthischapter.Thistesterincludesthefollowing:
1. INLET HOSE: Hose connected from the system cir-
cuit to the inlet side of the hydraulic tester.
2. LOAD VALVE: A simulated working load is created
in the circuit by turning the valve to restrict flow.
3. PRESSURE GAUGE: Glycerine filled 0 to 5000 PSI
gauge to provide operating circuit pressure.
4. FLOW METER: This meter measures actual oil flow
in the operating circuit with a gauge rated from 1 to 15
GPM (5 to 55 LPM).
Figure 22
5. OUTLET HOSE: A hose from the outlet side of the
hydraulictesterconnectstothehydraulicsystemcircuit.
6. FITTINGS: An assortment of hydraulic fittings are in-
cluded with this kit.
Toro Part Number: TOR214678
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 22
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40 GPM Hydraulic Tester (Pressure and Flow)
Use to test hydraulic circuits and components for flow
andpressurecapacitiesasrecommendedintheTesting
sectionofthischapter.Thistesterincludesthefollowing:
1. LOAD VALVE: A simulated working load is created
in the circuit by turning the valve to restrict flow.
2. PRESSURE GAUGE: Glycerine filled 0 to 5000 PSI
gauge to provide operating circuit pressure.
3. FLOW METER: This meter measures actual oil flow
in the operating circuit with a gauge rated from 4 to 40
GPM (20 to 150 LPM).
Toro Part Number: AT40002
Figure 23
NOTE: Thistesterdoesnotincludehoses(seeHydrau-
lic Hose Kit TOR6007 below).
Hydraulic Hose Kit
Thiskitincludesfittingsandhosesneededtoconnect40
GPM hydraulic tester (AT40002) or high flow hydraulic
filterkit(TOR6011)tomachinehydraulictractionsystem
components.
Toro Part Number: TOR6007
Figure 24
O--Ring Kit
The O--ring kit includes O--rings in a variety of sizes for
face seal and port seal hydraulic connections. It is rec-
ommended that O--rings be replaced whenever a hy-
draulic connection is loosened.
Toro Part Number: 117--2727
Figure 25
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 23
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
High Flow Hydraulic Filter Kit
The high flow hydraulic filter kit is designed with large
flow (40 GPM/150 LPM) and high pressure (5000
PSI/345 bar) capabilities. This kit provides for bi--direc-
tional filtration which prevents filtered debris from being
allowed back into the circuit regardless of flow direction.
If a component failure occurs in the closed loop traction
circuit, contamination from the failed part will remain in
the circuit until removed. When connecting hydraulic
test gauges in order to test traction circuit components
orafterreplacingafailedtractioncircuitcomponent(e.g.
hydrostat or wheel motor), the high flow hydraulic filter
can be installed in the traction circuit. The filter will en-
sure that contaminates are removed from the closed
loop and thus, do not cause additional component dam-
age.
Figure 26
Toro Part Number: TOR6011
NOTE: Use of Hydraulic Hose Kit TOR6007 is recom-
mended when using the high flow hydraulic filter kit.
NOTE: Replacement filter element is Toro part number
TOR6012. Filter element cannister tightening torque is
25 ft--lb (34 N--m).
Hydraulic Test Fitting Kit
This kit includes a variety of O--ring face seal fittings to
enable connection of test gauges to the system.
TORO TEST FITTING KIT (TOR4079)
The kit includes: tee’s, unions, reducers, plugs, caps
and male test fittings.
Toro Part Number: TOR4079
Figure 27
Spindle Plug
The spindle plug can be used to prevent contaminant
entry into the cutting deck spindle assembly when the
hydraulic motor is removed from the spindle.
Toro Part Number: 94--2703
Figure 28
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 24
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel Hub Puller
The wheel hub puller allows safe removal of the wheel
hub from the wheel motor shaft.
Toro Part Number: TOR6004
Figure 29
Measuring Container
Use this graduated container for doing hydraulic motor
efficiency testing (motors with case drain lines only).
Measureefficiencyofahydraulicmotorbyrestrictingthe
outlet flow from the motor and measuring leakage from
the case drain line while the motor is pressurized by the
hydraulic system.
The table in Figure 31 provides gallons per minute
(GPM) conversion for measured milliliter or ounce leak-
age.
Toro Part Number: TOR4077
Figure 30
Figure 31
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 25
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
The cause of an improperly functioning hydraulic sys-
tem is best diagnosed with the use of proper testing
equipment and a thorough understanding of the com-
plete hydraulic system.
The charts that follow contain information to assist in
troubleshooting. There may possibly be more than one
cause for a machine malfunction.
Review the hydraulic schematic and information on hy-
draulic system operation in the Hydraulic Flow Dia-
grams section of this chapter. This information will be
useful during the hydraulic troubleshooting process.
A hydraulic system with an excessive increase in heat
or noise has apotential forfailure. Shouldeither ofthese
conditions be noticed, immediately stop the machine,
turn off the engine, locate the cause of the trouble and
correct it before allowing the machine to be used again.
Continued use of an improperly functioning hydraulic
system could lead to extensive hydraulic component
damage.
Refer to the Testing section of this chapter for precau-
tions and specific hydraulic test procedures.
General Hydraulic System Problems
Problem
Possible Causes
Hydraulic oil leaks from machine
Fitting(s), hose(s) or tube(s) is (are) loose or damaged.
O--ring(s) or seal(s) is (are) missing or damaged.
Oil level in hydraulic reservoir is low.
Foaming hydraulic fluid
Hydraulic system has wrong kind of oil.
Pump suction line has an air leak.
Hydraulic system operates hot
Traction system pressure is high due to excessive load or brake
dragging or binding.
Oil level in hydraulic reservoir is low.
Hydraulic oil is contaminated or too light.
Engine speed is too low.
Fan speed is low dues to a loose or damaged belt.
Oil cooler is damaged or plugged. Air flow through oil cooler is
obstructed.
Oil filter is plugged.
Piston (traction) pump bypass valve is loosened or is damaged.
Charge pressure is low.
Piston (traction) pump check valve is not seating or is damaged.
Wheel motor(s) and/or piston (traction) pump are worn or damaged
(NOTE: If a traction circuit component has internal wear or damage, it
is possible that other traction circuit components are also damaged).
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 26
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Traction Circuit Problems
Problem
Possible Causes
Neutral is difficult to find or machine
operates in one direction only
Traction control linkage is misadjusted, disconnected, binding or
damaged.
Piston (traction) pump check relief valve is not seating or is damaged
(NOTE: Piston (traction) pump check relief valves for forward and
reverse are identical and can be reversed for testing purposes).
Piston (traction) pump is worn or damaged.
Hydraulic oil is very cold.
Traction response is sluggish
Parking brake is dragging or binding.
Piston (traction) pump bypass valve is loosened or is damaged.
Charge pressure is low.
Flushing valve in traction pump is not seating or is damaged.
Piston (traction) pump charge relief valve is not seating or is damaged.
Piston (traction) pump check relief valve is not seating or is damaged
(NOTE: Piston (traction) pump check relief valves for forward and
reverse are identical and can be reversed for testing purposes).
Piston (traction) pump is worn or damaged.
Parking brake is applied, dragging or binding.
No traction in either direction
Traction control linkage is misadjusted, disconnected, binding or
damaged.
Oil level in hydraulic reservoir is low (other hydraulic systems are
affected as well).
Piston (traction) pump bypass valve is loosened.
Flushing valve in traction pump is not seating or is damaged.
Piston (traction) pump check valve is not seating or is damaged.
Charge pressure is low.
Wheel motor(s) and/or piston (traction) pump are worn or damaged
(NOTE: If a traction circuit component has internal wear or damage, it
is possible that other traction circuit components are also damaged).
Single wheel motor turns while
unloaded, but slows down or stops
when load is applied
Wheel motor is worn or damaged (NOTE: If a traction circuit
component has internal wear or damage, it is possible that other
traction circuit components are also damaged).
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 27
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Traction Circuit Problems (Continued)
Problem
Possible Causes
Wheel motor will not turn
Brakes are binding.
Wheel motor is worn or damaged (NOTE: If a traction circuit
component has internal wear or damage, it is possible that other
traction circuit components are also damaged).
Wheel motors will not hold load when Charge pressure is low.
traction pedal is in neutral
Valve plate and/or piston shoes in piston (traction) pump are scored
(NOTE: If a traction circuit component has internal wear or damage, it
is possible that other traction circuit components are also damaged).
Mow Circuit Problems
Problem
Possible Causes
Front cutting deck motors will not
operate but rear cutting deck motors
will operate
Solenoid valve PRV2 on deck control manifold is faulty (NOTE:
Solenoid valves PRV1 and PRV2 are identical and can be reversed for
testing purposes).
An electrical problem exists that prevents PRV2 solenoid coil on deck
control manifold from being energized (see Troubleshooting in Chapter
5 -- Electrical System).
Front deck spindle(s) is binding.
Gear pump section (P2) is worn or damaged.
Rear cutting deck motors will not
operate but front cutting deck motors
will operate
Solenoid valve PRV1 on deck control manifold is faulty (NOTE:
Solenoid valves PRV1 and PRV2 are identical and can be reversed for
testing purposes).
An electrical problem exists that prevents PRV1 solenoid coil on deck
control manifold from being energized (see Troubleshooting in Chapter
5 -- Electrical System).
Rear deck spindle(s) is binding.
Gear pump section (P1) is worn or damaged.
Cutting deck motor is worn or damaged.
Single cutting deck motor will not
operate or rotates slowly
Cross-over relief valve in cutting deck motor is stuck or faulty.
NOTE: If appropriate, transfer a suspected damaged motor to another
cutting deck. If problem follows the motor, motor needs repair or
replacement.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 28
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lift Circuit Problems
Problem
Possible Causes
Single cutting deck raises slowly or not Cutting deck has excessive debris buildup.
at all
Lift arm or lift cylinder is binding.
Flow control orifice in lift control manifold for the affected cutting deck is
plugged, stuck or damaged.
Lift cylinder leaks internally.
Cutting decks raise, but will not remain Lift circuit hydraulic lines or fittings are leaking.
in the raised position
Air exists in lift circuit.
NOTE: Lift cylinders and control
manifold cartridge valves cannot
Lift cylinder leaks internally.
provide an absolutely perfect seal. The
Solenoid valve (S2) in lift control manifold leaks.
cutting decks will eventually lower if
left in the raised position.
None of the cutting decks will raise or Oil level in hydraulic reservoir is low (other hydraulic systems are
lower
affected as well).
NOTE: Mow speed limiter must be in
mow speed position in order to lower
the cutting decks.
An electrical problem exists that prevents lift control manifold solenoid
valve operation (see Troubleshooting in Chapter 5 -- Electrical System).
Solenoid valve PRV in lift control manifold is faulty.
Logic cartridge LC in lift control manifold is faulty.
Solenoid valve S2 in lift control manifold is faulty.
Gear pump section (P4) is worn or damaged.
Neither of the rear cutting decks will
raise or lower but the front cutting
decks will raise and lower
Flow control orifice in lift control manifold for the rear cutting decks
(port C8) is plugged, stuck or damaged.
Single cutting deck lowers very slowly Lift arm or lift cylinder is binding.
or not at all
Lift cylinder is damaged.
Flow control orifice in lift control manifold for the affected cutting deck is
plugged, stuck or damaged.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 29
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering Circuit Problems
Problem
Possible Causes
Steering inoperative or sluggish
Steering components (e.g. tie rods, steering cylinder ends) are worn or
binding.
Steering cylinder is binding.
Oil level in hydraulic reservoir is low (other hydraulic systems are
affected as well).
Steering relief valve (R10) in steering control valve is stuck or
damaged.
Steering cylinder leaks internally.
Steering control valve is worn or damaged.
Gear pump section (P3) is worn or damaged (NOTE: A worn or
damaged gear pump section (P3) will also affect the traction (charge)
circuit).
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 30
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 31
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Testing
The most effective method for isolating problems in the
hydraulic system is by using hydraulic test equipment
such as pressure gauges and flow meters in the circuits
during various operational checks (see the Special
Tools section in this chapter).
2. Review all test steps before starting the test proce-
dure.
3. Before testing, check all control linkages for improp-
er adjustment, binding or broken parts.
4. All hydraulic tests should be made with the hydraulic
oil at normal operating temperature.
Before Performing Hydraulic Tests
IMPORTANT: All obvious areas such as oil supply,
oil filter, binding linkages, loose fasteners or im-
proper adjustments must be checked before as-
suming that a hydraulic component is the source of
a problem.
WARNING
Before disconnecting or performing any work on
the hydraulic system, all pressure in the system
must be relieved. See Relieving Hydraulic Sys-
tem Pressure in the General Information section
of this chapter.
Precautions for Hydraulic Testing
CAUTION
5. Put metal caps or plugs on any hydraulic lines left
open or exposed during testing or component removal.
Failure to use gauges with expected pressure
(psi/bar) rating as listed in test procedures could
result in damage to the gauge and possible per-
sonal injury from leaking hot oil.
6. When using hydraulic tester (pressure and flow), the
inlet and the outlet hoses must be properly connected
and not reversed to prevent damage to the hydraulic
tester or components.
CAUTION
7. Install hydraulic fittings finger tight and far enough to
makesurethattheyarenotcross--threadedbeforetight-
ening them with a wrench.
All testing should be performed by two (2)
people. One person should be in theseat tooper-
ate the machine and the other should read and
record test results.
8. Position tester hoses to prevent rotating machine
parts from contacting and damaging the hoses or tester.
9. After connecting test equipment, check oil level in
the hydraulic tank to make sure that oil level is correct.
WARNING
10.When using hydraulic tester (pressure and flow),
opentesterloadvalvecompletelybeforestartingengine
to minimize the possibility of damaging components.
Keep body and hands away from pin hole leaks
or nozzles that eject hydraulic fluid under high
pressure. Do not use hands to search for leaks;
use paper or cardboard. Hydraulic fluid escap-
ing under pressure can have sufficient force to
penetrate the skin and cause serious injury. If
fluidisinjectedintotheskin, itmustbesurgical-
ly removed within a few hours by a doctor famil-
iar with this type of injury. Gangrene may result
from such an injury.
11.Theenginemustbeingoodoperatingcondition. Use
a phototac when performing a hydraulic test. Engine
speed can affect the accuracy of the tester readings.
Check actual speed of the pump when performing hy-
draulic flow tests.
12.After hydraulic test procedures have been com-
pleted, check oil level in the hydraulic tank to make sure
that oil level is correct.
1. Clean machine thoroughly before disconnecting or
disassembling any hydraulic components. Always keep
in mind the need for cleanliness when working on hy-
draulic equipment. Contamination can cause excessive
wear or binding of hydraulic components.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 32
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Which Hydraulic Tests Are Necessary?
2. If a cutting (mow) circuit problem exists, consider
performing one or more of the following tests: Relief
Valve (PRV1) and (PRV2) Pressure, Gear Pump (P1)
and (P2) Flow and/or Deck Motor Efficiency Tests.
Before beginning any hydraulic test, identify if the prob-
lem is related to the traction circuit, cutting (mow) circuit,
lift circuit or steering circuit. Once the faulty system has
been identified, perform tests that relate to that circuit.
3. If a lift circuit problem exists, consider performing
oneormoreofthefollowingtests:LiftReliefValve(PRV)
Pressure, Gear Pump (P4) Flow and/or Lift Cylinder In-
ternal Leakage Tests.
1. If a traction circuit problem exists, consider perform-
ing one or more of the following tests: Traction Circuit
Relief Valve (R3) and (R4) Pressure, Traction Circuit
Charge Pressure, Gear Pump (P3) Flow, Front Wheel
Motor Efficiency and/or Piston (Traction) Pump Flow
Tests.
4. If a steering circuit problemexists, consider perform-
ing one or more of the following tests: Steering Relief
Valve (R10) Pressure, Steering Cylinder Internal Leak-
age and/or Gear Pump (P3) Flow Tests.
IMPORTANT: Refer to Traction Circuit Component
Failure in the General Information section of this
chapter for information regarding the importance of
removing contamination from the traction circuit.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 33
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Traction Circuit Relief Valve (R3) and (R4) Pressure Test
TO STEERING CONTROL VALVE AND CHARGE CIRCUIT
TO MOW CONTROL
(FRONT CUTTING UNITS)
TO LIFT CONTROL MANIFOLD
TO MOW CONTROL
(REAR CUTTING UNITS)
FORWARD (R3) RELIEF
VALVE TEST SHOWN
GEAR
PUMP
BYPASS
VALVE
CROSSTRAX
MANIFOLD
PISTON
(TRACTION)
PUMP
FROM STEERING CONTROL VALVE
Figure 32
The traction circuit relief pressure test should be per-
formed to make sure that forward and reverse traction
circuit relief pressures are correct.
CAUTION
Procedure for Traction Circuit Relief Valve (R3) and
(R4) Pressure Test
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all hy-
draulic controls to relieve system pressure and
avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil. See
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the Gen-
eral Information section of this chapter.
1. Make sure hydraulic oil is at normal operating tem-
perature by operating the machine under load for
approximately ten (10) minutes.
4. Locate traction circuit test port for direction to be
tested. Forwardtestportislocated onhydraulic tubebe-
tween front wheels (Fig. 33). Reverse test ports are lo-
cated on AWD hydraulic manifold (Fig. 34). Thoroughly
clean test port.
2. Drive machine to an open area. Park machine on a
level surface with the cutting decks lowered and PTO
switch off. Make sure engine is off. Apply the parking
brake.
3. Read Precautions For Hydraulic Testing in this sec-
tion.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 34
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Connecta 5000PSI(350bar) pressuregauge totest
port.
2
6. After installing pressure gauge, start engine and run
at idle speed. Check for any hydraulic leakage from test
connections and correct before proceeding with test.
7. Move throttle to full speed (3200 RPM).
8. Sit on seat, and with brakes applied, slowly depress
the traction pedal in the direction to be tested (forward
or reverse). While pushing traction pedal down, careful-
ly watch the pressure gauge needle. As the traction re-
lief valve lifts, the gauge needle will momentarily stop.
Traction system pressure as the relief valve opens
should be:
1
Figure 33
1. Lower hydraulic tube
2. Forward test port
3625 PSI (250 bar) in both forward (R3) and re-
verse (R4)
NOTE: If traction pedal continues to be pressed after
the relief valve has opened, system pressure can in-
crease higher than relief pressure.
2
9. Release traction pedal, stop engine and record test
results.
1
NOTE: Forward (R3) and reverse (R4) relief valves are
identical. Relief valves can be switched in traction pump
to help in identifying a faulty relief valve.
Figure 34
10.If problem occurs in one direction only, interchange
the relief valves in the traction pump (Fig. 35) to see if
the problem changes to the other direction. Clean or re-
place valves as necessary. These cartridge type valves
are factory set, and are not adjustable. If pressure is in-
correct and relief valves are in good condition, traction
pumpand/orwheelmotorsshouldbesuspected ofwear
and inefficiency.
1. AWD hydraulic manifold
2. Reverse test port
3
11.After testing is completed, make sure that engine is
stopped and then relieve hydraulic system pressure
(seeRelievingHydraulicSystemPressureintheGener-
alInformationsectionofthischapter).Removepressure
gauge from machine.
1
RIGHT
FRONT
2
Figure 35
1. Piston (traction) pump
2. Reverse relief valve (R4)
3. Forward relief valve (R3)
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 35
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Traction Circuit Charge Pressure Test
TO STEERING CONTROL VALVE AND CHARGE CIRCUIT
TO MOW CONTROL
(FRONT CUTTING UNITS)
TO LIFT CONTROL MANIFOLD
TO MOW CONTROL
(REAR CUTTING UNITS)
GEAR
PUMP
BYPASS
VALVE
CROSSTRAX
MANIFOLD
PISTON
(TRACTION)
PUMP
PRESSURE
GAUGE
FROM STEERING CONTROL VALVE
OIL FILTER
REMOVED
Figure 36
The traction circuit charge pressure test should be per-
formed to make sure that the traction charge circuit is
functioning correctly.
3. Read Precautions For Hydraulic Testing in this sec-
tion.
ProcedureforTractionCircuitChargePressureTest
CAUTION
1. Make sure hydraulic oil is at normal operating tem-
perature by operating the machine under load for
approximately ten (10) minutes.
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all hy-
draulic controls to relieve system pressure and
avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil. See
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the Gen-
eral Information section of this chapter.
2. Park machine on a level surface with the cutting
decks lowered and PTO switch off. Make sure engine is
off. Apply the parking brake.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 36
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Raise and support operator seat to allow access to
hydraulic pump assembly.
NOTE: If gear pump (P3) is worn or damaged, both
charge circuit and steering circuit will be affected.
5. Thoroughly clean ends of hydraulic tubes that con-
nect to the oil filter (Fig. 37). Disconnect hydraulic tubes
from oil filter adapter. Remove two (2) flange head
screwsthatsecureoilfilteradapter toframe andremove
oil filter and adapter assembly from machine.
12.After charge pressure testing is completed, make
sure that engine is not running and then relieve hydrau-
lic system pressure (See Relieving Hydraulic System
Pressure in the General Information section of this
chapter). Remove pressure gauge and tee fitting from
hydraulic tubes. Install oil filter to machine.
6. Install tee fitting with 1000 PSI (70 bar) pressure
gauge in place of the removed hydraulic filter assembly.
13.Lower and secure operator seat.
7. Make sure that traction pedal is in neutral, the steer-
ing wheel is stationary and parking brake is engaged.
8. Start engine and run at idle speed. Check for any hy-
draulic leakage from test connections and correct be-
fore proceeding with test.
2
9. Place throttle to full speed (3200 RPM) and monitor
pressure gauge on tester.
1
GAUGE READING TO BE approximately 200 to
250 PSI (13.8 to 17.2 bar)
10.Next, determine charge pressure under traction load
byoperatingthemachineinadirectforwardandreverse
direction (not steering). Make sure that engine is run-
ning at full speed (3200 RPM). Apply the brakes and
pressthetractionpedalinthe forwarddirection andthen
to reverse while monitoring the pressure gauge. Stop
engine and record test results.
3
Figure 37
1. Hydraulic tube
3. Hydraulic tube
2. Oil filter / filter adapter
2
3
GAUGE READING TO BE approximately 150 to
250 PSI (13.8 to 17.2 bar)
4
5
11.Compare measured charge pressure from step 9
with pressure from step 10:
6
A. If charge pressure is good under no load (step 9),
but drops below specification when under traction
load (step 10), the piston pump should be suspected
of wear and inefficiency. When the pump is worn or
damaged, the charge system is not able to replenish
losttraction circuitoildueto excessiveleakage inthe
worn pump.
1
RIGHT
FRONT
B. If there is no charge pressure, or pressure is low,
check for restriction in gear pump intake line. Inspect
charge relief valve and valve seat in the traction
pump (see Traction Pump Service in the Service and
Repairs section of this chapter). Also, consider a
worn or damaged gear pump (P3) (see Gear Pump
(P3) Flow Test in this section).
Figure 38
1. Traction pump
2. Plug
3. O--ring
4. Shim kit
5. Spring
6. Charge relief poppet
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 37
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gear Pump (P3) Flow Test
(Using Tester with Pressure Gauges and Flow Meter)
TO STEERING CONTROL VALVE AND CHARGE CIRCUIT
TO MOW CONTROL
(FRONT CUTTING UNITS)
TO LIFT CONTROL MANIFOLD
TO MOW CONTROL
(REAR CUTTING UNITS)
GEAR
PUMP
BYPASS
VALVE
CROSSTRAX
MANIFOLD
PISTON
(TRACTION)
PUMP
TESTER
FROM STEERING CONTROL VALVE
OIL FILTER
AND TUBE
REMOVED
Figure 39
The gear pump (P3) flow test should be performed to
make sure that the traction charge circuit and steering
circuit have adequate hydraulic flow.
2. Park machine on a level surface with the cutting
decks lowered and PTO switch off. Make sure engine is
off. Apply the parking brake.
Procedure for Gear Pump (P3) Flow Test
3. Read Precautions For Hydraulic Testing in this sec-
tion.
1. Make sure hydraulic oil is at normal operating tem-
perature by operating the machine under load for
approximately ten (10) minutes.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 38
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FLOW TESTER READING TO BE: A pump in good
condition should have a flow of approximately 4.9
GPM (18.5 LPM) at 800 PSI (55 bar).
CAUTION
11.Open the tester flow control valve, stop engine and
record test results.
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all hy-
draulic controls to relieve system pressure and
avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil. See
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the Gen-
eral Information section of this chapter.
12.If flow is less than 4.4 GPM (16.6 LPM) or a pressure
of 800 PSI (55 bar) cannot be obtained, consider that a
pump problem exists. Check for restriction in pump in-
take line. If intake is not restricted, remove gear pump
and repair or replace pump as necessary (see Gear
Pump in the Service and Repairs section of this chap-
ter).
4. Raise and support operator seat to allow access to
hydraulic pump.
5. Thoroughly clean the ends of the hydraulic tubes
connected to the oil filter and traction pump inlets (Fig.
40). Disconnect hydraulic tubes from oil filter inlet and
traction pump inlet. Remove two (2) flange head screws
that secure oil filter adapter to frame. Remove oil filter
assembly and hydraulic tube from machine.
NOTE: Iftheflowfromgearpump(P3)islow, theopera-
tion of both the charge circuit and the steering circuit will
be affected.
13.After testing is completed, make sure that engine is
stopped, then relieve hydraulic system pressure (see
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the General In-
formation section of this chapter). Remove tester and
then install oil filter assembly and hydraulic tube to ma-
chine.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that the oil flow indicator
arrow on the flow meter is showing that the oil will
flow from the hydraulic tube, through the tester and
into the traction pump.
6. Install tester with pressure gauges and flow meter in
place of the removed oil filter assembly and hydraulic
tube. Connect tester inlet hose to the hydraulic tube.
Connect the tester outlet hose to the traction pump fit-
ting. Make sure the flow controlvalve on tester is ful-
ly open.
14.Lower and secure operator seat.
4
7. Make sure that the traction pedal is in neutral, the
steering wheel is stationary and the parking brake is en-
gaged.
2
3
1
8. Start engine and run at idle speed. Check for any hy-
draulic leakage from test connections and correct be-
fore proceeding with test.
9. Move throttle to full speed (3200 RPM). Use a
tachometer to verify that engine speed is correct.
IMPORTANT: The gear pump is a positive displace-
ment type. If pump flow is completely restricted or
stopped, damage to the pump, tester or other com-
ponents could occur.
Figure 40
1. Hydraulic tube
3. Hydraulic tube
4. Gear Pump (P3)
2. Oil filter / filter adapter
10.While watching pressure gauges, slowly close the
tester flow control valve until 800 PSI (55 bar) is ob-
tained on gauge.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 39
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Wheel Motor Efficiency Test
TO STEERING CONTROL VALVE AND CHARGE CIRCUIT
TO MOW CONTROL
(FRONT CUTTING UNITS)
TO LIFT CONTROL MANIFOLD
TO MOW CONTROL
(REAR CUTTING UNITS)
GEAR
PUMP
BYPASS
VALVE
CROSSTRAX
MANIFOLD
TESTER
CAP
CAP
PISTON
(TRACTION)
PUMP
RH FRONT WHEEL
MOTOR EFFICIENCY
TEST SHOWN
FROM STEERING CONTROL VALVE
Figure 41
Procedure for Front Wheel Motor Efficiency Test
NOTE: This test procedure includes steps to test both
front wheel efficiency together before testing individual
front wheel motors.
NOTE: Over a period of time, a wheel motor can wear
internally. A worn motor may bypass oil internally, caus-
ing the motor to be less efficient. Eventually, enough oil
loss will cause the wheel motor to stall under heavy load
conditions. Continued operation with a worn, inefficient
motor can generate excessive heat, cause damage to
sealsandothercomponentsinthehydraulicsystemand
affect overall machine performance.
1. Make sure hydraulic oil is at normal operating tem-
perature by operating the machine under load for
approximately ten (10) minutes.
2. Make sure that traction pedal is adjusted to the neu-
tral position (see Operator’s Manual).
3. Park machine on a level surface with the cutting
decks lowered and PTO switch off. Shut engine off and
apply the parking brake.
IMPORTANT: Refer to Traction Circuit Component
Failure in the General Information section of this
chapter for information regarding the importance of
removing contamination from the traction circuit.
4. Read Precautions For Hydraulic Testing in this sec-
tion.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 40
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14.To test individual front wheel motors:
CAUTION
A. Remove front wheel from wheel motor that is not
being tested. Remove wheel shield to allow access
to hydraulic tubes and fittings on wheel motor. Re-
move fasteners that secure front hydraulic tube r--
clamps to frame.
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all hy-
draulic controls to relieve system pressure and
avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil. See
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the Gen-
eral Information section of this chapter.
B. On the front wheel motor that is not being tested,
thoroughlycleanjunctionofbothhydraulictubesand
wheel motor fittings. Disconnect both hydraulic lines
from wheel motor that is not being tested. Cap dis-
connected hydraulic lines and wheel motor fittings.
5. Attachaheavychaintotherearofthemachineframe
and an immovable object to prevent the machine from
moving during testing.
C. Use the procedure described in steps 8 to 11
above to identify individual front wheel motor leak-
age. Individual motor internal leakage will be shown
on flow meter in GPM (LPM). Flow should be less
than 1.5 GPM (5.7 LPM) for the tested wheel motor.
6. Chock front wheels to prevent wheel rotation. Make
sure parking brake is applied.
7. Jack up and support the rear wheels off the ground
to allow flow through the rear wheel motors.
D. If other front wheel motor requires testing, com-
plete steps A, B and C for remaining wheel motor.
8. Thoroughly clean junction of hydraulic hose and
right side elbow fitting on bottom of traction pump (Fig.
42). Disconnect hose from right side pump fitting.
15.After testing is completed, stop engine and then re-
lieve hydraulic system pressure (see Relieving Hydrau-
lic System Pressure in the General Information section
of this chapter). Disconnect tester from hydraulic fitting
and hose. Connect hose to pump elbow fitting. Remove
caps from hydraulic tubes and reconnect tubes to wheel
motor. Securehydraulictubestomachinewithr--clamps
and removed fasteners. Install wheel shield and
wheel(s) (see Wheels in the Service and Repairs sec-
tion of Chapter 6 -- Chassis).
IMPORTANT: Make sure that the oil flow indicator
arrow on the flow meter is showing that the oil will
flow from the pump, through the tester and into the
disconnected hydraulic hose.
9. Install tester with pressure gauges and flow meter in
series with the traction pump and the disconnected
hose. Make sure the tester flow control valve is fully
open.
10.Start engine and move throttle to full speed (3200
RPM).
1
CAUTION
Use extreme caution when performing test. The
front tires on the ground will be trying to move
the machine forward.
4
2
11.Slowly push traction pedal in forward direction until
1000 PSI (70 bar) is displayed on the tester pressure
gauge. Make sure that front wheels are not rotating.
5
3
RIGHT
12.Total front wheel motor internal leakage will be
shown on flow meter in GPM (LPM). Leakage for the
front wheel motors should be less than 1.5 GPM (5.7
LPM).
FRONT
Figure 42
13.Release traction pedal, shut engine off, rotate both
front wheels one--third turn and retest. Testing of wheel
motor leakage in three (3) different wheel positions will
providethemostaccuratetestresults.Ifleakagespecifi-
cations are not met, individual front wheel motors need
to be tested.
1. Traction pump
2. RH elbow fitting
3. Hyd hose (forward)
4. LH elbow fitting
5. Hyd hose (reverse)
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 41
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Piston (Traction) Pump Flow Test (Using Tester with Flow Meter and Pressure Gauge)
TO STEERING CONTROL VALVE AND CHARGE CIRCUIT
TO MOW CONTROL
(FRONT CUTTING UNITS)
TO LIFT CONTROL MANIFOLD
TO MOW CONTROL
(REAR CUTTING UNITS)
GEAR
PUMP
BYPASS
VALVE
CROSSTRAX
MANIFOLD
TESTER
PISTON
(TRACTION)
PUMP
FROM STEERING CONTROL VALVE
Figure 43
Procedure for Piston (Traction) Pump Flow Test
2. Park machine on a level surface with the cutting
decks lowered and off. Shut off engine. Make sure mow
speed limiter is in the transport position to allow full
movement of traction pedal.
This test measures piston (traction) pump output (flow).
During this test, pump load is created at the flow meter
using the adjustable load valve on the tester.
3. Read Precautions For Hydraulic Testing in this sec-
tion.
IMPORTANT: Traction circuit flow for the
Groundsmaster 4300 is approximately 30 GPM
(113.5LPM). Use40GPMHydraulicTester#AT40002
(pressure and flow) for this test (see Special Tools
in this chapter).
CAUTION
1. Make sure hydraulic oil is at normal operating tem-
perature by operating the machine under load for
approximately ten (10) minutes. Make sure the hydrau-
lic tank is full.
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all hy-
draulic controls to relieve system pressure and
avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil. See
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the Gen-
eral Information section of this chapter.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 42
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Make sure that traction pedal is adjusted to the neu-
tral position. Also, ensure that traction pump is at full
stroke when traction pedal is pushed into fully forward
position.
12.Observe flow gauge. Flow indication should be
approximately 28 GPM (106 LPM).
13.Release traction pedal to the neutral position, open
flow control valve on tester and shut off engine. Record
test results.
5. Raise and support machine so all wheels are off the
ground (see Jacking Instructions in Chapter 1 -- Safety).
14.If flow is less than 25 GPM (95 LPM), consider the
following:
6. Thoroughly clean junction of hydraulic hose and
right side fitting on bottom of traction pump (Fig. 44).
Disconnect hose from right side pump fitting.
A. The traction pump swash plate is not being ro-
tated fully (e.g. traction pedal linkage may need ad-
justment, mow speed limiter is not in the transport
position).
IMPORTANT: Make sure that the oil flow indicator
arrow on the flow meter is showing that the oil will
flow from the pump, through the tester and into the
disconnected hydraulic hose.
B. The piston (traction) pump needs to be repaired
or replaced as necessary.
7. Install tester with pressure gauge and flow meter in
series between traction pump fitting and disconnected
hose to allow flow from traction pump to tester. Use hy-
draulichosekit(seeSpecialToolsinthischapter)tocon-
nect tester to machine. Make sure that fitting and hose
connectionsareproperlytightened. Also, make surethe
flow control valve on tester is fully open.
C. Make necessary repairs before performing addi-
tional tests.
15.When testing is complete, disconnect tester and
hose kit from pump fitting and machine hydraulic hose.
Reconnect hose to pump fitting.
CAUTION
RIGHT
FRONT
1
Allwheels willbe off the ground and rotatingdur-
ing this test. Make sure machine is supported so
itwillnotmoveandaccidentallyfalltopreventin-
juring anyone near the machine.
8. Start engine and run at idle speed. Check for any hy-
draulic leakage from tester and hose connections. Cor-
rect any leaks before proceeding.
2
3
9. Move throttle so engine is running at high idle speed
(3200 RPM).
10.Slowly push traction pedal to fully forward position.
Keep pedal fully depressed in the forward position.
Figure 44
1. Traction pump
2. RH elbow fitting
3. Hyd hose (forward)
11.Have second person watch pressure gauge on test-
er carefully while slowly closing the flow control valve
until 1000 PSI (69 bar) is obtained. Verify with a photo-
tac that the engine speed is still 3200 RPM.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 43
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relief Valve (PRV1) and (PRV2) Pressure Test
ROTATION
DIRECTION
TO STEERING CONTROL VALVE AND CHARGE CIRCUIT
TO LIFT CONTROL MANIFOLD
MOTOR
INLET
MOTOR
OUTLET
GEAR
PUMP
BYPASS
VALVE
CASE DRAIN
CROSSTRAX
MANIFOLD
PISTON
(TRACTION)
PUMP
FROM STEERING CONTROL VALVE
TESTER
RELIEF VALVE (PRV1)
TEST SHOWN
DECK
CONTROL
MANIFOLD
FROM LIFT CONTROL MANIFOLD
Figure 45
The relief valve (PRV1) and (PRV2) pressure test
should be performed to make sure that the cutting deck
circuit relief pressures are correct.
Procedure for Relief Valve (PRV1) and (PRV2) Pres-
sure Test
1. Make sure hydraulic oil is at normal operating tem-
perature by operating the machine under load for
approximately ten (10) minutes.
NOTE: Thefrontcuttingdeckcircuitisprotectedbypro-
portional relief valve (PRV2) in the deck control man-
ifold. The rear cutting deck circuit is protected by
proportional relief valve (PRV1) (see Hydraulic Flow
Diagrams in this chapter).
2. Park machine on a level surface with the cutting
decks lowered and PTO switch off. Make sure engine is
off and mow speed limiter is in the mow position. Apply
the parking brake.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 44
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Read Precautions For Hydraulic Testing in this sec-
tion.
10.Watch pressure gauge carefully while slowly closing
the tester flow control valve. As the relief valve lifts, the
pressure gauge needle will momentarily stop.
NOTE: Once the relief valve has opened, system pres-
sure may continue to increase.
CAUTION
11.As the relief valve lifts, system pressure should be:
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all hy-
draulic controls to relieve system pressure and
avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil. See
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the Gen-
eral Information section of this chapter.
Approximately 2500 PSI (175 bar) for relief valve
(PRV1)
Approximately 3500 PSI (241 bar) for relief valve
(PRV2)
4. Raise and support operator seat to allow access to
hydraulic deck control manifold.
12.Open the tester flow control valve, disengage cutting
decks and stop the engine.
5. Thoroughlycleanjunctionofhydraulicinlethoseand
deck motor fitting on left side cutting deck for the relief
valve to be tested. Disconnect hose from deck motor fit-
ting (Fig. 46):
13.If pressure is incorrect, remove PRV valve on mow
manifold and clean or replace valve (see Deck Control
Manifold Service in the Service and Repairs section of
this chapter). Also, if pressure is still low after valve ser-
vice, check for restriction in pump intake line. Gear
pump (P2) (front cutting deck circuit) and/or pump (P1)
(rear cutting deck circuit) could also be suspected of
wear, damage or inefficiency (see Gear Pump (P1) and
(P2) Flow Test in this section).
#2 cutting deck (left rear) for relief valve (PRV1)
#4 cutting deck (left front) for relief valve (PRV2)
IMPORTANT: Make sure that the oil flow indicator
arrow on the flow meter is showing that the oil will
flow fromthe disconnected hose, through thetester
and into the deck motor.
14.After testing is completed, make sure that engine is
stopped, then relieve hydraulic system pressure (see
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the General In-
formation section of this chapter). Remove tester from
machine and connect hydraulic hose to deck motor fit-
ting.
6. Install tester with pressure gauge and flow meter in
series with the disconnected hose and hydraulic fitting
on deck motor. Make sure the flow control valve on
tester is fully open.
15.Lower and secure operator seat.
7. After installing tester, start engine and run at idle
speed. Check for any hydraulic leakage from test con-
nections and correct before proceeding with test.
8. Move throttle to full speed (3200 RPM).
1
CAUTION
Keep away from cutting decks during test to pre-
vent personal injury from rotating blades.
9. Have a second person occupy seat, press PTO
switch to ON and then move joystick lever forward to en-
gage cutting decks.
2
FRONT OF MACHINE
Figure 46
IMPORTANT: When performing this test, do not
hold over relief any longer than necessary to obtain
pressure reading.
1. Cutting deck motor (#2 shown)
2. Deck motor inlet hose
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 45
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gear Pump (P1) and (P2) Flow Test
(Using Tester with Pressure and Flow Capabilities)
TO STEERING CONTROL VALVE AND CHARGE CIRCUIT
TO LIFT CONTROL MANIFOLD
TESTER
GEAR
PUMP
GEAR PUMP (P1)
FLOW TEST SHOWN
BYPASS
VALVE
CROSSTRAX
MANIFOLD
PISTON
(TRACTION)
PUMP
FROM STEERING CONTROL VALVE
DECK
CONTROL
MANIFOLD
FROM LIFT CONTROL MANIFOLD
Figure 47
Over a period of time, the gears and wear plates in the
gear pump can wear. A worn pump will by-pass oil and
make the pump less efficient. Eventually, enough oil can
by-pass to cause the decks to stall in heavy cutting con-
ditions. Continued operation with a worn, inefficient
pump can generate excessive heat and cause damage
to seals and other components in the hydraulic system.
Procedure for Gear Pump (P1) and (P2) Flow Test
1. Make sure hydraulic oil is at normal operating tem-
perature by operating the machine under load for
approximately ten (10) minutes.
2. Park machine on a level surface with the cutting
decks lowered and PTO switch off. Make sure engine is
off. Apply the parking brake.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 46
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Read Precautions For Hydraulic Testing in this sec-
tion.
11.If flow is less than 12.1 GPM (45.8 LPM) or a pres-
sureof1500PSI(103bar)cannotbeobtained, consider
that a pump problem exists. Check for restriction in
pump intake line. If intake is not restricted, remove gear
pump and repair or replace pump as necessary (see
Gear Pump and Gear Pump Service in the Service and
Repairs section of this chapter).
CAUTION
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all hy-
draulic controls to relieve system pressure and
avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil. See
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the Gen-
eral Information section of this chapter.
12.After testing is completed, make sure that engine is
stopped, then relieve hydraulic system pressure (see
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the General In-
formation section of this chapter). Remove tester from
machine and connect hydraulic hose to gear pump fit-
ting.
4. Raise and support operator seat to allow access to
hydraulic pump.
13.Lower and secure operator seat.
5. Identify suspected faulty pump section to be tested
(Fig. 48). Thoroughly clean junction of gear pump fitting
and hydraulic outlet hose. Disconnect hose from pump
fitting:
1
Pump section (P1) for rear cutting decks
Pump section (P2) for front cutting decks
2
IMPORTANT: Make sure that the oil flow indicator
arrow on the flow gauge is showing that the oil will
flow fromthe gear pump, through the tester andinto
the hose.
3
6. Install tester with pressure gauges and flow meter in
series between disconnected hose and gear pump fit-
ting. Make sure the flow controlvalve on tester is ful-
ly open.
Figure 48
1. Gear pump assembly
2. Pump P1 outlet hose
3. Pump P2 outlet hose
7. After installing tester, start engine and run at idle
speed. Check for any hydraulic leakage from test con-
nections and correct before proceeding with test.
8. Make sure the parking brake is engaged. Move
throttle to full speed (3200 RPM). DO NOT engage the
cutting decks. Use a tachometer to verify that engine
speed is correct.
IMPORTANT: The gear pump is a positive displace-
ment type. If pump flow is completely restricted or
stopped, damage to the pump, tester or other com-
ponents could occur.
9. While watching pressure gauges, slowly close the
tester flow control valve until 1500 PSI (103 bar) is ob-
tained on gauge.
FLOW TESTER READING TO BE: A pump in good
condition should have a flow of approximately 13.6
GPM (51.2 LPM) at 1500 PSI (103 bar).
10.Open the tester flow control valve and stop the en-
gine. Record test results.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 47
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deck Motor Efficiency Test
(Using Tester with Pressure Gauges and Flow Meter)
ROTATION
DIRECTION
MOTOR
INLET
MOTOR
OUTLET
CASE DRAIN
Install tester in series
between fitting and return
hose at motor outlet.
TESTER
CAP
Disconnect case drain
hose at traction deck
bulkhead
MEASURING
CONTAINER
#5 (RH FRONT) DECK MOTOR
EFFICIENCY TEST SHOWN
MOW CONTROL
MANIFOLD
Figure 49
NOTE: Over a period of time, a deck motor can wear in-
ternally. A worn motor may bypass oil to its case drain
causing the motor to be less efficient. Eventually,
enough oil loss will cause the deck motor to stall under
heavy cutting conditions. Continued operation with a
worn, inefficient motor can generate excessive heat,
cause damage to seals and other components in the hy-
draulic system and affect quality of cut.
Procedure for Deck Motor Efficiency Test
1. Make sure hydraulic oil is at normal operating tem-
perature by operating the machine under load for
approximately ten (10) minutes.
2. Determine which deck motor is malfunctioning.
3. Park machine on a level surface with the cutting
decks lowered and PTO switch off. Make sure engine is
off and mow speed limiter is in the mow position. Apply
the parking brake.
NOTE: One way to find a faulty deck motor is to have
another person observe the machine while mowing in
dense turf. A faulty motor will run slower than other mo-
tors, produce fewer clippings and may cause clip marks
(a choppy appearance) on the turf.
4. Read Precautions For Hydraulic Testing in this sec-
tion.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 48
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. While watching pressure gauges, slowly close flow
control valve on tester until a pressure of 1200 PSI (83
bar) is obtained.
CAUTION
10.After achieving 1200 PSI (83 bar), place discon-
nected motor case drain hose into a container gra-
duated in ounces or milliliters (e.g. Toro #TOR4077)and
collect hydraulic fluid for 15 seconds. After 15 sec-
onds, remove hose end from container. Then move the
PTO switch to OFF, open the tester flow control valve
and stop the engine.
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all hy-
draulic controls to relieve system pressure and
avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil. See
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the Gen-
eral Information section of this chapter.
NOTE: The deck motors are connected in series. To
isolate a faulty motor, all motors in the circuit may have
to be tested by starting with the upstream motor first.
11.Identify amount of oil collected in the container. Re-
cord test results.
5. For deck motor to be tested, thoroughly clean junc-
tion of the motor case drain hose (small diameter hose)
where it connects to traction unit bulkhead (not at the
motor)(Fig. 50). Disconnectthecasedrainhoseandput
a steel cap on the fitting at the traction unit. Leave the
case drain hose from the motor open and place open
end of disconnected hose into a drain pan.
If flow was greater than 22.4 ounces (662 millili-
ters) (0.7 GPM/2.6 LPM), repair or replace the
tested deck motor (see Cutting Deck Motor Service
in the Service and Repairs section of this chapter).
If flow is less than 22.4 ounces (662 milliliters) (0.7
GPM/2.6 LPM), the tested motor does not have ex-
cessive leakage.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that the oil flow indicator
arrow on the flow gauge is showing that the oil will
flow from the deck motor, through the tester and
into the return hose.
12.After testing is completed, make sure that engine is
stopped, then relieve hydraulic system pressure (see
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the General In-
formation section of this chapter). Disconnect tester
from motor and return hose. Connect return hose to the
deck motor. Remove plug from machine bulkhead fitting
and connect case drain hose to the fitting.
6. On deck motor to be tested, thoroughly clean junc-
tion of hydraulic return hose and deck motor fitting (Fig.
50).Disconnectreturnhosefromthemotor. Installtester
with pressure gauges and flow meter in series with the
motor and disconnected return hose. Make sure the
flow control valve on tester is fully open.
13.If necessary, perform motor efficiency test on other
deck motors.
NOTE: Use a graduated container, special tool
TOR4077, to measure case drain leakage (Fig. 49).
2
3
7. Start engine and run at idle speed. Check for any hy-
draulic leakage from test connections and correct be-
fore proceeding with test.
CAUTION
Cutting deck blades will rotate when performing
themotorefficiencytest. Keepawayfromcutting
decks during test to preventpersonalinjuryfrom
rotating blades. Do not stand in front of the ma-
chine.
1
Figure 50
8. Sit on seat and move throttle to full speed (3200
RPM). Press PTO switch to ON. Move joystick lever for-
ward to engage cutting decks.
1. Case drain hose
2. Bulkhead fitting
3. Return hose
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 49
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lift Relief Valve (PRV) Pressure Test
TO STEERING
CONTROL VALVE
TO DECK CONTROL MANIFOLD
(FRONT CUTTING UNITS)
TO DECK CONTROL MANIFOLD
(REAR CUTTING UNITS)
GEAR
PUMP
PUMP (P5)
INTERNAL
CASE
DRAIN
PRESSURE
GAUGE
FROM MOW CONTROL
MANIFOLD
LIFT
CONTROL
MANIFOLD
Figure 51
The lift relief valve (PRV) pressure test should be per-
formed to make sure that the lift circuit relief pressure is
correct.
CAUTION
Procedure for Lift Relief Valve (PRV) Pressure Test
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all hy-
draulic controls to relieve system pressure and
avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil. See
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the Gen-
eral Information section of this chapter.
1. Make sure hydraulic oil is at normal operating tem-
perature by operating the machine under load for
approximately ten (10) minutes.
2. Park machine on a level surface with the cutting
decks lowered and PTO switch off. Make sure engine is
off. Apply the parking brake.
4. Gain access to hydraulic lift control manifold by re-
moving the operator floor plate. The lift control manifold
is attached to a frame bracket under the floor plate (Fig.
52).
3. Read Precautions For Hydraulic Testing in this sec-
tion.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 50
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Thoroughly clean test port (G4) on bottom of lift con-
trol manifold. Connect a 5000 PSI (350 bar) pressure
gauge to test port.
2
4
6. After installing pressure gauge to manifold test port,
startengineandrunatidlespeed.Checkforanyhydrau-
licleakagefromtestconnectionsandcorrectbeforepro-
ceeding with test.
3
7. Move throttle to full speed (3200 RPM).
IMPORTANT: Do not allow pressure to exceed 2500
PSI (172 bar).
FRONT
1
IMPORTANT: While performing this test, hold joys-
tick lever in the raise position only long enough to
get a system pressure reading. Holding the lever in
raise for an extended period may damage system
components.
Figure 52
1. Lift control manifold
2. SV1 solenoid
3. SV2 solenoid
4. PRV solenoid
8. MakesurethatPTOswitchisOFFandthenpulljoys-
tickleverrearwardtopressurizeliftcircuit. Whileholding
lever in the raise (rearward) position, watch pressure
gauge carefully. As the cutting decks fully raise and the
lift relief valve lifts, system pressure should be:
Approximately 2000 PSI (138 bar)
9. Return the joystick lever to the neutral position and
stop the engine.
10.If measured pressure is incorrect, remove pressure
reducingvalve(PRV)fromliftcontrolmanifoldandclean
or replace valve (see Lift Control Manifold Service in the
Service and Repairs section of this chapter). Also, if lift
circuit pressure is low, check for restriction in gear pump
intake line. Internal lift cylinder leakage would also
cause low lift circuit pressure (see Lift Cylinder Internal
LeakageTestinthissection).Gearpump(P4)couldalso
be suspected of wear, damage or inefficiency (see Gear
Pump (P4) Flow Test in this section).
11.After testing is completed, make sure that engine is
stopped, then relieve hydraulic system pressure (see
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the General In-
formation section of this chapter). Disconnect pressure
gauge from lift control manifold test port.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 51
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gear Pump (P4) Flow Test
(Using Tester with Pressure Gauges and Flow Meter)
TO STEERING
CONTROL VALVE
TO DECK CONTROL MANIFOLD
(FRONT CUTTING UNITS)
TO DECK CONTROL MANIFOLD
(REAR CUTTING UNITS)
GEAR
PUMP
PUMP (P5)
INTERNAL
CASE
DRAIN
FROM MOW CONTROL
MANIFOLD
LIFT
CONTROL
MANIFOLD
Figure 53
The gear pump (P4) flow test should be performed to
make sure that the cutting deck lift circuit has adequate
hydraulic flow.
3. Read Precautions For Hydraulic Testing in this sec-
tion.
Procedure for Gear Pump (P4) Flow Test
CAUTION
1. Make sure hydraulic oil is at normal operating tem-
perature by operating the machine under load for
approximately ten (10) minutes.
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all hy-
draulic controls to relieve system pressure and
avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil. See
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the Gen-
eral Information section of this chapter.
2. Park machine on a level surface with the cutting
decks lowered and PTO switch off. Make sure engine is
off. Apply the parking brake.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 52
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Raise and support operator seat to allow access to
hydraulic pump.
13.After testing is completed, make sure that engine is
stopped, then relieve hydraulic system pressure (see
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the General In-
formation section of this chapter). Remove tester and
connect removed hydraulic hose to gear pump (P4) out-
let and lift control manifold P port.
5. Thoroughly clean both ends of the hydraulic hose
that connects gear pump (P4) outlet (Fig. 54) and lift
control manifold P4 port. Remove hydraulic hose. Ac-
cess to hydraulic hose at lift control manifold can be ob-
tained from below the machine.
14.Lower and secure operator seat.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that the oil flow indicator
arrow on the flow meter is showing that the oil will
flow from pump (P4), through the tester and to the
lift control manifold.
1
6. Install tester with pressure gauges and flow meter in
place of the removed hydraulic hose. Connect tester in-
let hose to the pump fitting. Connect the tester outlet
hose to the lift control manifold fitting. Make sure the
flow control valve on tester is fully open.
2
7. Make sure that the traction pedal is in neutral and the
parking brake is engaged.
8. Start engine and run at idle speed. Check for any hy-
draulic leakage from test connections and correct be-
fore proceeding with test.
Figure 54
1. Gear pump (P4)
2. Hydraulic hose
9. Move throttle to full speed (3200 RPM). Use a
tachometer to verify that engine speed is correct.
IMPORTANT: The gear pump is a positive displace-
ment type. If pump flow is completely restricted or
stopped, damage to the pump, tester or other com-
ponents could occur.
10.While carefully watching pressure gauges, slowly
closethetesterflowcontrolvalveuntil1000PSI(70bar)
is obtained on gauge.
FLOW TESTER READING TO BE: A pump in good
condition should have a flow of approximately 3.2
GPM (11.9 LPM) at 1000 PSI (70 bar).
11.Open the tester flow control valve, stop engine and
record test results.
12.If flow is less than 2.8 GPM (10.6 LPM) or a pressure
of 1000 PSI (70 bar) cannot be obtained, consider that
a pump problem exists. Check for restriction in pump in-
take line. If intake is not restricted, remove gear pump
and repair or replace pump as necessary (see Gear
Pump in the Service and Repairs section of this chap-
ter).
NOTE: Iftheflowfromgearpump(P4)islow, theopera-
tion of all lift cylinders will be affected.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 53
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lift Cylinder Internal Leakage Test
TO STEERING
CONTROL VALVE
TO DECK CONTROL MANIFOLD
(FRONT CUTTING UNITS)
TO DECK CONTROL MANIFOLD
(REAR CUTTING UNITS)
(PARTIALLY
RAISED)
GEAR
PUMP
PLUG
CAP
PUMP (P5)
INTERNAL
CASE
DRAIN
CHECK FOR
CYLINDER
EXTENDING
FROM MOW CONTROL
MANIFOLD
LIFT
CONTROL
MANIFOLD
LEFT FRONT (#4) LIFT CYLINDER TEST SHOWN
Figure 55
The lift cylinder internal leakage test should be per-
formed if a cutting deck raise and lower problem is iden-
tified. This test will determine if a lift cylinder is faulty.
1. Park machine on a level surface with the PTO switch
OFF. Position the cutting decks in the turn--around posi-
tion and turn the engine off. Apply the parking brake.
NOTE: Cuttingdeckraise/lowercircuitoperationwillbe
affected by lift cylinder binding, extra weight on the cut-
ting decks and/or binding of lift components. Make sure
that these items are checked before proceeding with lift
cylinder internal leakage test.
2. For the lift cylinder that is to be tested, use a jack to
raise the lift arm slightly. This will remove the load from
the lift cylinder and relieve lift cylinder hydraulic pres-
sure. Leave the jack under the lift arm to support the lift
arm and to prevent the lift arm from lowering.
Procedure for Lift Cylinder Internal Leakage Test:
NOTE: If either of the rear lift cylinders is being tested,
both rear lift arms need to be supported.
NOTE: When performing the lift cylinder internal leak-
age test, the cutting decks should be attached to the lift
arms.
3. Thoroughly clean the area around the end of the hy-
draulichoseattherod endoftheliftcylinder. Disconnect
the hydraulic hose from the lift cylinder rod end fitting
(Fig. 56).
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 54
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT: When capping lift cylinder fitting and
hydraulic hose end, use a steel cap and plug to en-
sure that fluid leakage will not occur. Plastic plugs
will not hold hydraulic pressure that will be devel-
oped during this test procedure.
3
2
4. Place a steel cap on the open lift cylinder fitting to
seal the lift cylinder. Also, install a steel plug in the open
endofthedisconnectedhosetopreventleakage orcon-
tamination.
1
5. Slowly lower the jack and remove it from under the
lift arm. The cutting deck should settle slightly and then
be supported by the capped lift cylinder.
6. Markthepositionoftheliftcylinderrodattheliftcylin-
der head with a piece of tape (Fig. 57).
Figure 56
1. Lift cylinder (#5 shown)
2. Cylinder rod end fitting
3. Hydraulic hose
7. Leave the machine parked for two (2) hours and
monitor the lift cylinder. The weight of the cutting deck
may cause the lift cylinder to gradually extend. Use the
tape location to determine lift cylinder rod movement
(Fig. 58).
1
A. If lift cylinder rod movement is less than 1.250”
(31.7mm)aftertwo(2)hours, makesurethatthecut-
ting deck has not settled to the ground. If the cutting
deck is still suspended after two (2) hours and lift cyl-
inder rod movement is less than 1.250” (31.7 mm),
consider that the lift cylinder is in good condition. A
cylinder in good, usable condition will show minimal
movement.
3
2
B. Rod movement in excess of 1.250” (31.7 mm) af-
ter two (2) hours indicates that the lift cylinder may
have internal seal damage or excessive wear. Re-
move and inspect the lift cylinder (see Lift Cylinder
and Lift Cylinder Service in the Service and Repairs
section of this chapter).
Figure 57
1. Lift cylinder rod
2. Lift cylinder head
3. Tape (initial position)
8. Once lift cylinder condition has been determined,
use a jack to raise the lift arm slightly which will remove
the load from the lift cylinder. Leave the jack to support
the lift arm and to prevent it from lowering. Remove the
cap from the cylinder fitting and the plug from the hy-
draulic hose. Connect the hydraulic hose to the lift cylin-
der fitting.
2
9. Carefully remove jack from under the lift arm. Start
engine and operate lift cylinders through several up and
down cycles. Stop the engine and check for any leak-
age.
1
10.If needed, repeat steps 2 through 10 for other lift cyl-
inders.
Figure 58
1. Tape (after 2 hours)
2. Cylinder rod movement
11.After testing is complete, check oil level in hydraulic
reservoir and adjust if necessary.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 55
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering Relief Valve (R10) Pressure Test
TO DECK CONTROL MANIFOLD
(FRONT CUTTING UNITS)
TO LIFT CONTROL
MANIFOLD
TO DECK CONTROL MANIFOLD
(REAR CUTTING UNITS)
GEAR
PUMP
PUMP (P5)
INTERNAL
CASE
DRAIN
TO TRACTION
CHARGE CIRCUIT
OUT
T
P
IN
R10
STEERING WHEEL TURNED
FOR RIGHT TURN
STEERING
CONTROL
VALVE
PRESSURE
GAUGE
STEERING
CYLINDER
Figure 59
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 56
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The steering relief valve (R10) pressure test should be
performed to make sure that the steering circuit relief
pressure is correct.
12.If specification is not met, inspect steering control
valve (see Steering Control Valve Service in the Service
and Repairs section of this chapter).
Procedure for Steering Relief Valve Pressure Test:
13.After testing is completed, make sure that engine is
stopped, then relieve hydraulic system pressure (see
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the General In-
formation section of this chapter). Remove tee fitting
and pressure gauge from hydraulic hose and steering
cylinder. Connect hydraulic hose to steering cylinder fit-
ting.
1. Make sure hydraulic oil is at normal operating tem-
perature by operating the machine under load for
approximately ten (10) minutes.
2. Park machine on a level surface with the cutting
decks lowered and PTO switch off. Make sure engine is
off. Apply the parking brake.
3. Read Precautions For Hydraulic Testing in this sec-
tion.
1
CAUTION
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all hy-
draulic controls to relieve system pressure and
avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil. See
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the Gen-
eral Information section of this chapter.
2
4. Thoroughlycleantheareaaroundthehydraulichose
at the rod end of the steering cylinder (Fig. 60).
Figure 60
1. Steering cylinder
2. Rod end fitting
5. Remove hydraulic hose from the fitting on the rod
end of the steering cylinder.
6. Installateefittingbetweenthedisconnectedhydrau-
lic hose and the steering cylinder fitting. Install a 5000
PSI (350 bar) pressure gauge to the tee fitting.
7. After installing pressure gauge, start engine and run
at idle speed. Check for any hydraulic leakage from test
connections and correct before proceeding with test.
8. Move throttle to full speed (3200 RPM).
IMPORTANT: Hold steering wheel at full lock only
long enough to get a system pressure reading.
Holding the steering wheel against the stop for an
extended period may damage the steering control
valve.
9. Watch pressure gauge carefully while turning the
steering wheel for a left hand turn (counter--clockwise)
and holding.
10.System pressure should be approximately 1000 PSI
(70 bar) as the relief valve lifts. Return steering wheel to
the neutral position.
11.Shut off engine. Record test results.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 57
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering Cylinder Internal Leakage Test
R10
STEERING WHEEL
TURNED FOR
RIGHT TURN
STEERING
CONTROL
VALVE
CAP
LOOK FOR LEAKAGE
STEERING
CYLINDER
(FULLY EXTENDED)
Figure 61
The steering cylinder internal leakage test should be
performed if a steering problem is identified. This test
will determine if the steering cylinder is faulty.
NOTE: Steering circuit operation will be affected by
rear tire pressure, steering cylinder binding, extra
weightonthevehicleand/orbindingofrearaxlesteering
components. Make sure that these items are checked
before proceeding with steering cylinder internal leak-
age test.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 58
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Procedure for Steering Cylinder Internal Leakage
Test:
1
1. Make sure hydraulic oil is at normal operating tem-
perature.
2. Park machine on a level surface with the cutting
decks lowered and PTO switch off. Make sure engine is
off. Apply the parking brake.
3. Read Precautions For Hydraulic Testing.
2
CAUTION
Figure 62
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all hy-
draulic controls to relieve system pressure and
avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil. See
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the Gen-
eral Information section of this chapter.
1. Steering cylinder
2. Rod end fitting
4. Turn the steering wheel for a rightturn (clockwise) so
the steering cylinder rod is fully extended.
5. Thoroughlycleantheareaaroundthehydraulichose
at the rod end of the steering cylinder (Fig. 62).
6. Place a drain pan under the steering cylinder. Re-
movehydraulichosefromthefittingontherodendofthe
steering cylinder. Cap the end of the hose.
7. Remove all hydraulic oil from drain pan. Make sure
that empty drain pan remains under the open fitting of
the steering cylinder.
8. With the engine off, continue turning the steering
wheel for a right turn (clockwise) with the steering cylin-
derfully extended. Observe theopen fittingon thesteer-
ing cylinder as the wheel is turned. If oil comes out of the
fitting while turning the steering wheel to the right, the
steering cylinder has internal leakage and should be in-
spected and repaired (see Steering Cylinder and Steer-
ing Cylinder Service in the Service and Repairs section
of this chapter). Check drain pan for any evidence of oil
that would indicate internal cylinder leakage.
9. Removeplugfromthe hydraulichose. Connecthose
to the steering cylinder fitting.
10.If a steering problem exists and the steering cylinder
tested acceptably, the steering control valve requires
service (see Steering Control Valve and Steering Con-
trol Valve Service in the Service and Repairs section of
this chapter).
11.Check oil level in hydraulic reservoir and adjust if
needed.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 59
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Repairs
General Precautions for Removing and Installing Hydraulic System Components
Before Repair or Replacement of Components
After Repair or Replacement of Components
1. Before removing any parts from the hydraulic sys-
tem, park machine on a level surface, engage parking
brake, lower cutting decks and stop engine. Remove
key from the ignition switch.
1. If a component failure occurred in the closed loop
traction circuit (e.g. piston pump or wheel motor), filter-
ing the traction circuit is recommended (see Filtering
Closed--Loop Traction Circuit in this section).
2. Thoroughly clean machine before disconnecting, re-
moving or disassembling any hydraulic components.
Make sure hydraulic components, hose connections
andfittingsarethoroughlycleaned.Alwayskeepinmind
the need for cleanliness when working on hydraulic
components.
2. If component failure is severe or hydraulic system is
contaminated, flush hydraulic system (see Flush Hy-
draulic System in this section).
3. Lubricate O--rings and seals with clean hydraulic oil
before installing hydraulic components.
4. Make sure all caps or plugs are removed from hy-
draulic tubes, hydraulic fittings and components before
reconnecting.
CAUTION
5. Use proper tightening methods when installing hy-
draulic hoses and fittings (see Hydraulic Fitting Installa-
tion in the General Information section of this chapter).
Before loosening any hydraulic component, op-
erate all hydraulic controls to relieve system
pressure and avoid injury from pressurized hy-
draulic oil. See Relieving Hydraulic SystemPres-
sure in the General Information section of this
chapter.
6. After repairs, check control linkages and cables for
proper adjustment, binding or broken parts.
7. After repairs are completed, clean hydraulic compo-
nents, hose connections and fittings to prevent future
accumulation of dirt and debris on hydraulic compo-
nents.
3. Operateallhydrauliccontrolstorelieve systempres-
sure before loosening any hydraulic connection (see
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the General In-
formation section).
8. After disconnecting or replacing any hydraulic com-
ponents, operate machine functions slowly until air is
outofsystem(seeHydraulicSystemStartUpinthissec-
tion).
4. Putcapsorplugsonanyhydrauliclines, hydraulicfit-
tings or components left open or exposed to prevent
contamination.
5. Before disconnecting hydraulic lines and hoses,
place labels to ensure proper installation after repairs
are completed.
9. Check for hydraulic oil leaks. If any leaks are discov-
ered, shut off engine and correct leaks.
10.Check oil level in hydraulic reservoir and add correct
oil if necessary.
6. Note the position of hydraulic fittings (especially el-
bow fittings) on hydraulic components before removal.
Mark parts if necessary to make sure that fittings will be
aligned properly when reinstalling hydraulic hoses and
tubes.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 60
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Check Hydraulic Lines and Hoses
Check hydraulic lines and hoses daily for leaks, kinked
lines, loose mounting supports, wear, loose fittings or
deterioration. Make all necessary repairs before operat-
ing the machine.
CAUTION
Keep body and hands away from pin hole leaks
or nozzles that eject hydraulic fluid under high
pressure. Use paper or cardboard, not hands, to
search for leaks. Hydraulic fluid escaping under
pressure can have sufficient force to penetrate
the skin and cause serious injury. If fluid is in-
jected into the skin, it must be surgically re-
moved within a few hours by a doctor familiar
withthistypeofinjury. Gangrenemayresultfrom
such an injury.
Flush Hydraulic System
IMPORTANT: Flush the hydraulic system any time
there is a severe component failure or the system is
contaminated. Contaminated oil may appear milky
or black or may contain metal particles.
7. Disconnect wire harness electrical connector from
the engine fuel stop solenoid to prevent the engine from
starting.
8. Make sure traction pedal is in neutral and the PTO
switch is OFF. Turn ignition key switch to start; engage
starter for ten (10) seconds to prime hydraulic pumps.
Wait fifteen (15) seconds to allow the starter motor to
cool and then repeat cranking procedure again.
IMPORTANT: If a component failure occurred in the
closed loop traction circuit (e.g. piston pump or
wheel motor), filtering the traction circuit is recom-
mended.SeeFilteringClosed--LoopTractionCircuit
in this section.
9. Connect wire harness electrical connector to fuel
stop solenoid to allow engine to start.
1. Park machine on a level surface. Lower cutting
decks, stop engine, engage parking brake and remove
key from ignition switch.
10.Startengineandletitidleatlowspeedfor aminimum
of two (2) minutes.
2. Drain hydraulic reservoir. Remove suction screen
fromreservoirandcleanthoroughly. Considerremoving
and cleaning reservoir if necessary.
11.Increase engine speed to high idle for minimum of
one (1) minute under no load.
12.Rotate steering wheel in both directions several
times. Raise and lower cutting decks several times.
3. Clean area around the mounting areas of the hy-
draulic filters. Remove and discard hydraulic filters.
13.Move PTO switch to ON to engage cutting decksand
let them run for several minutes. Move PTO switch to
OFF.
4. Drain entire hydraulic system. Drain all hoses, tubes
and components while the system is warm. Flush hoses
and tubes to remove any contamination.
14.Shut off engine and check for hydraulic oil leaks.
Check oil level in hydraulic reservoir and add correct oil
if necessary.
5. Make sure the mounting surfaces of the hydraulic fil-
tersareclean. Applycleanhydraulicoiltogasketonnew
filters. Screw filters on until gasket contacts mounting
plate, then tighten filter three quarters of a turn.
15.Operate the machine for two (2) hours under normal
operating conditions.
IMPORTANT: Use only hydraulic fluids specified in
Operator’sManual.Otherfluidscouldcausesystem
damage.
16.Checkconditionofhydraulicoil.Ifthefluidshowsany
signsofcontamination, repeatsteps1through14again.
6. Fill hydraulic reservoir with new hydraulic oil.
17.Resume normal operation and follow recommended
maintenance intervals.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 61
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filtering Closed--Loop Traction Circuit
Filtering of a closed--loop hydraulic system after a major
component failure (e.g. traction (piston) pump or wheel
motor) is a requirement to prevent debris from transmit-
ting throughout the system. If a closed--loop hydraulic
systemfilteringtoolisnotusedtoensuresystemcleanli-
ness, repeat failures, as well as subsequent damage to
other hydraulic components in the affected system, will
occur. To effectively remove contamination from
closed--loop traction circuit, use of the Toro high flow hy-
draulic filter and hydraulic hose kits are recommended
(see Special Tools in this chapter).
7. With engine running at low idle speed, slowly move
the traction pedal to the forward direction to allow flow
through the tractioncircuitandhigh flowfilter. Keeptrac-
tion circuit engaged for five (5) minutes while gradually
increasing both forward pressure on traction pedal and
engine speed. Monitor filter indicator to make sure that
green color is showing during operation.
8. With engine running at high idle speed and traction
pedal moved to the forward direction, periodically apply
brakes to increase pressure in traction circuit. While
monitoring filter indicator, continue this process for an
additional five (5) minutes.
1. Parkmachineon alevelsurfacewith enginestopped
and key removed from ignition switch.
IMPORTANT: If using a filter that is not the Torohigh
flow filter that is bi--directional, do not press the
traction pedal in the reverse direction. If flow is re-
versed when using a filter that is not bi--directional,
debris from the filter will re--enter the traction cir-
cuit.
2. Raise and support machine so all wheels are off the
ground (see Jacking Instructions in Chapter 1 -- Safety).
NOTE: If wheel motor was replaced, install high flow fil-
ter to the inlet of the new motor instead of to the traction
pump fitting. This will prevent system contamination
from entering and damaging the new wheel motor.
9. With engine running at high idle speed, alternately
movetractionpedalfromforwardtoreverse.Whilemon-
itoring filter indicator, continue this process for an addi-
tional five (5) minutes.
3. Thoroughly clean junction of hydraulic hose and left
side elbow fitting on bottom of traction pump (Fig. 63).
Disconnect hose from left side pump fitting.
10.Shut engine off and remove key from ignition switch.
4. Connect Toro high flow hydraulic filter in series be-
tween traction pump fitting and disconnected hose. Use
hydraulic hose kit (see Special Tools in this chapter) to
connectfiltertomachine. Makesurethatfittingandhose
connections are properly tightened.
11.Remove high flow hydraulic filter and hydraulic hose
kit from machine. Connect hydraulic hose to left side
traction pump fitting. Make sure to properly tighten hose
(see Hydraulic Hose and Tube Installation in the Gener-
al Information section of this chapter).
IMPORTANT: Use only hydraulic fluids specified in
Operator’sManual.Otherfluidscouldcausesystem
damage.
12.Lower machine to ground.
13.Check oil level in hydraulic reservoir and add correct
oil if necessary.
5. After installing high flow filter to machine, check and
fill hydraulic reservoir with new hydraulic oil as required.
6. Start engine and run at idle speed. Check for any hy-
draulic leakage from filter and hose connections. Cor-
rect any leaks before proceeding.
1
CAUTION
4
Allwheels willbe off the ground and rotatingdur-
ing this procedure. Make sure machine is well
supported so it will not move and accidentally
fall to prevent injuring anyone around machine.
2
RIGHT
FRONT
3
5
IMPORTANT: While engaging the traction circuit,
monitor the indicator on the high flow hydraulic fil-
ter. If the indicator should show red, either reduce
pressure on the traction pedal or reduce engine
speed to decrease hydraulic flow through the filter.
Figure 63
1. Traction pump
2. RH elbow fitting
3. Hyd hose (forward)
4. LH elbow fitting
5. Hyd hose (reverse)
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 62
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydraulic System Start--up
NOTE: When initially starting the hydraulic system with
new or rebuilt components such as pumps, wheel mo-
tors or lift cylinders, it is important that this start--up pro-
cedure be used. This procedure reduces the chance of
damaging the system or its components from not purg-
ing the system of air.
7. Make sure traction pedal is in neutral and the PTO
switch is OFF. Turn ignition key switch to start; engage
starter for ten (10) seconds to prime hydraulic pumps.
Wait fifteen (15) seconds to allow the starter motor to
cool and then repeat cranking procedure again.
8. Connect wire harness electrical connector to fuel
stop solenoid to allow engine to start.
1. After the hydraulic system components have been
properly installed and if the traction pump was rebuilt or
replaced, make sure traction pump housing is at least
half full of clean hydraulic oil.
9. Make sure traction pedal is in neutral and the PTO
switch is OFF. Start engine and run it at low idle. The
charge pump should pick up oiland fillthe hydraulic sys-
tem. If there is no indication of fill in thirty (30) seconds,
stop the engine and determine the cause.
2. Makesureallhydraulicconnectionsandlinesarese-
cured tightly.
3. Drain, flush and refill hydraulic system and change
hydraulic oil filters if component failure was severe or
system is contaminated (see Flush Hydraulic System in
this section).
10.If the traction pump was replaced or rebuilt, run the
traction unit so the wheels turn slowly for ten (10) minu-
tes.
11.Operate the traction unit (including steering and cut-
ting deck lift/lower) by gradually increasing the work
load to full over a ten (10) minute period.
4. Make sure hydraulic reservoir is full. Add correct oil
if necessary.
5. Check control linkage for proper adjustment, binding
or broken parts.
12.Stop the machine. Check oil level in hydraulic reser-
voir and add correct oil if necessary. Check hydraulic
components for leaks and tighten any loose connec-
tions.
6. Disconnect wire harness electrical connector from
the engine fuel stop solenoid to prevent the engine from
starting.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 63
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydraulic Reservoir
105 to 115 ft--lb
(143 to 155 N--m)
2
5
3
16
25
1
17
17
18
9
12
10
11
13
26 to 32 ft--lb
(36 to 43 N--m)
12
13
15
6
22
23
4
24
8
14
14
22
24
7
26
26
RIGHT
20
21
FRONT
19
Figure 64
1. Suction strainer
2. Tank cap
3. Hydraulic reservoir
10. Flat washer
11. Bumper
12. Washer head screw (2 used)
19. Oil filter
20. Filter head
21. Hydraulic hose
4. Adapter
5. Manifold
13. Clamp (2 used)
14. Flange nut
22. O--ring
23. 90 hydraulic fitting
o
6. O--ring
7. Hydraulic hose
8. O--ring
9. Cap screw
15. Flange head screw (2 used)
16. O--ring
17. Hose clamp (2 used)
18. Hydraulic hose
24. O--ring
25. Screen filter
26. Hydraulic fitting
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 64
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal (Fig. 64)
Installation (Fig. 64)
1. Park the machine on a levelsurface, engage parking
brake, lower cutting decks and stop engine. Remove
key from the ignition switch.
1. If fittings were removed from reservoir, lubricate and
place new O--rings onto fittings. Install fittings into reser-
voir openings using marks made during the removal
process to properly orientate fittings. Tighten fittings
(see Hydraulic Fitting Installation in the General Infor-
mation section of this chapter).
2. Thoroughlycleanhydraulichoseendsandfittingson
hydraulic reservoir to prevent hydraulic system conta-
mination. Label hydraulic hoses to assist in installation.
2. Lubricate new suction strainer O--ring and install
onto strainer. Thread suction strainer into hydraulic res-
ervoir and torque strainer 105 to 115 ft--lb (143 to 155
N--m).
3. Disconnect hydraulic hose (item 7) from adapter fit-
ting on bottom of reservoir to allow draining of reservoir.
Drain reservoir into a suitable container.
4. Disconnect remaining hydraulic hoses from reser-
voir. Allowhydrauliclinestodrainintoasuitablecontain-
er. Plugorcapopeningsofreservoir andlines toprevent
contamination.
3. Position hydraulic reservoir to machine. Secure re-
servoir to frame with two (2) clamps (item 13), washer
head screws (item 12) and flange nuts (item 14).
4. Remove all plugs and caps placed in hoses and fit-
tings during the removal process.
5. Remove hydraulic reservoir using Figure 64 as a
guide.
5. Install hydraulic hoses to fittings on hydraulic reser-
voir in positions noted during removal (see Hydraulic
Hose and Tube Installation in the General Information
section of this chapter).
6. Remove suction strainer from reservoir. Discard O--
ring.
7. If hydraulic fittings are to be removed from reservoir,
mark fitting orientation to allow correct assembly. Re-
move fittings from reservoir and discard O--rings.
6. Fill hydraulic reservoir with new hydraulic fluid.
7. Operate machine. Check hydraulic lines and fittings
forleaks.Tightenanylooseconnections.Checkhydrau-
lic oil level and adjust if necessary.
Inspection (Fig. 64)
1. Clean hydraulic reservoir and suction strainer with
clean solvent.
2. Inspect hydraulic reservoir for leaks, cracks or other
damage.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 65
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydraulic Pump Drive Shaft
RIGHT
8
5
FRONT
3
9
2
6
9
7
Permatex
Threadlocker
4
10
34 to 42 ft--lb
(46 to 56 N--m)
1
Antiseize
Lubricant
Figure 65
1. Piston (traction) pump
2. Flange nut (2 used)
3. Flange head screw (2 used)
4. Guard hoop
5. Cap screw (2 used)
6. Engine flywheel
7. Cap screw (6 used)
8. Drive shaft assembly
9. Flange nut (4 used)
10. Flange head screw (2 used)
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 66
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal (Fig. 65)
Installation (Fig. 65)
1. Park the machine on a levelsurface, engage parking
brake, lower cutting decks and stop engine. Remove
key from the ignition switch.
1. Applyantiseizelubricanttotractionpumpinputshaft.
2. Positiondriveshaftassemblytoengineandpumpin-
put shaft.
2. Remove two (2) flange head screws and flange nuts
that secure drive shaft guard hoop (item 4) to machine
frame. Remove guard.
3. Apply Permatex Blue Gel Threadlocker (or equiva-
lent) to threads of cap screws (item 7) that secure drive
shaft flange to engine flywheel. Secure drive shaft
flange to flywheel with six (6) cap screws (item 7).
Torque cap screws from 34 to 42 ft--lb (46 to 56 N--m).
3. Remove two (2) cap screws (item 5) and flange nuts
(item9)thatsecuredriveshaftyoketopistonpumpinput
shaft.
4. Slide drive shaft yoke on pump input shaft so yoke is
flush with end of input shaft. Secure drive shaft yoke to
pump input shaft with two (2) cap screws (item 5) and
flange nuts (item 9).
4. Remove six (6) cap screws (item 7) that secure drive
shaft flange to engine flywheel.
5. Remove drive shaft assembly from machine.
Drive Shaft Cross and Bearing Service (Fig. 66)
1. Remove snap rings that secure bearings in yokes.
5. Position drive shaft guard hoop to machine frame
and secure with two (2) flange head screws and flange
nuts.
6. Lubricate grease fittings on drive shaft.
IMPORTANT: Yokes must be supported when re-
moving and installing bearings to prevent damage.
4
2. Use a press to remove cross and bearings from
yokes. Thoroughly clean drive shaft yokes.
3
2
3. To install new cross and bearings:
1
A. Apply a coating of grease to bearing bores in end
yoke and shaft yoke.
B. Press one bearing partially into yoke.
C. Insert cross into yoke and bearing.
D. Hold cross in alignment and press bearing in until
it hits the yoke.
3
E. Install snap ring into yoke groove to secure
installed bearing.
Figure 66
F. Place second bearing into yoke bore and onto
cross shaft. Press bearing into yoke and secure with
snap ring.
1. End yoke
2. Cross and bearing kit
3. Snap ring (4 used)
4. Shaft yoke
G. Repeat procedure for other yoke.
H. Greasecrossuntilgreasecomesoutofallfour(4)
cups.
4. Make sure that assembled joint moves without bind-
ing. Slight binding can usually be eliminated by lightly
rapping the yoke lugs with a soft faced hammer. If bind-
ing continues, disassemble joint to identify source of
binding.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 67
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydraulic Pump Assembly
24
1
22
2
23
9
21
10
15
3
15
14
30
18
4
17
17
19
11
16
33
21
25
37
25
26
33
Antiseize
Lubricant
34
8
20
32
39
23
32
35
38
31
36
13
7
29
5
12
15
6
5
RIGHT
6
25
27
FRONT
25
28
Figure 67
1. Drive shaft assembly
2. Cap screw (2 used)
14. Guard hoop
15. Flange nut (6 used)
16. Manifold
27. Hydraulic hose
28. Hydraulic hose
29. Frame bracket
30. Flange head screw (2 used)
31. Hydraulic tube
32. O--ring
3. Flange head screw (2 used)
4. Hydraulic pump assembly
5. O--ring
17. Hose clamp (2 used)
18. Hydraulic hose
19. Hydraulic fitting
20. Neutral switch
21. O--ring
o
6. 90 hydraulic fitting (2 used)
7. Hydraulic hose (2 used)
8. Pump support bracket
9. Flange nut (2 used)
10. Traction cable bracket
11. Flange head screw (2 used)
12. Carriage screw (2 used)
13. Hydraulic hose
33. O--ring
34. Flat washer (2 used)
35. Lock nut (2 used)
36. O--ring
37. Hydraulic fitting (2 used)
38. Hydraulic fitting
39. Hydraulic fitting
o
22. 90 hydraulic fitting
23. O--ring
24. Hydraulic tube
25. O--ring
26. Hydraulic fitting
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 68
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE: Traction pump and gear pump should be re-
moved from machine as an assembly. Once removed
from machine, pumps can be separated for service.
3
Removal (Fig. 67)
1. Park the machine on a levelsurface, engage parking
brake, lower cutting decks and stop engine. Remove
key from the ignition switch.
2
1
2. Read the General Precautions for Removing and
Installing Hydraulic System Components at the begin-
ning of the Service and Repairs section of this chapter.
Figure 68
1. Piston (traction) pump
2. Gear pump
3. Traction cable bracket
CAUTION
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all hy-
draulic controls to relieve system pressure and
avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil. See
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the Gen-
eral Information section of this chapter.
4
7
12
2
11
10
9
8
8
13
14
3. To prevent contamination of the hydraulic system,
thoroughly clean traction and gear pump assembly and
all hydraulic connections.
4. Label hydraulic hoses to assist in assembly. Discon-
nect all hydraulic hoses and tubes from fittings on the
traction and gear pump assembly. Allow hydraulic lines
to drain into a suitable container. Plug or cap openings
of pumps and lines to prevent contamination.
1
1
2
7
4
5. Remove hydraulic pump drive shaft (see Hydraulic
Pump Drive Shaft Removal in this section).
5
6
3
Figure 69
6. Separate traction cable assembly from traction
pump (Fig. 69):
1. Cap screw (2 used)
2. Flange nut (2 used)
3. Traction cable
8. Lock nut (2 used)
9. Flat washer
10. Flat washer
11. Ball joint
12. Traction lever bracket
13. Cap screw
A. Removeflangenut(item4inFig.69)thatsecures
lever damper (item 14 in Fig. 69) to traction cable
bracket.
4. Flange nut (2 used)
5. Flange screw (2 used)
6. Traction cable bracket
7. Cap screw (2 used)
14. Lever damper
B. Remove cap screws (items 7 and 13 in Fig. 69)
and lock nut (item 8 in Fig. 69) that secure traction le-
ver bracket (item 12 in Fig. 69) to pump lever.
CAUTION
C. Loosen jam nuts that secure traction cable to
traction cable bracket (item 6 in Fig. 69).
Make sure lift or hoist can support the total
weight of the pump assembly before removing
the cap screws from the pump assembly and
frame. Pump assembly weighs approximately 67
pounds (30.5 kg).
D. Position traction cable assembly away from
pump assembly.
7. Disconnect wire harness electrical connector from
traction neutral switch and position harness away from
transmission.
8. Connect a lift or hoist to hole in traction cable bracket
on traction pump to support pump assembly and for
pump removal.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 69
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Loosen and remove two (2) carriage screws (item
12) and flange nuts (item 15) that secure pump support
bracket (item 8) to frame.
3
4
10.Remove two (2) flange screws (item 3) and flange
nuts (item 9) that secure traction pump flange to ma-
chine frame.
5
6
IMPORTANT: Make sure to not damage machine
components while removing the pump assembly.
7
1
2
9
11.Carefully lift pump assembly from the machine.
12.Separate traction and gear pumps (Fig. 70):
8
A. Remove two (2) socket head screws, lock wash-
ers and flat washers that secure gear pump to trac-
tion pump.
Figure 70
1. Traction pump
2. O--ring
6. Gear pump
7. Flat washer (2 used)
3. Flat washer (2 used)
4. Lock washer (2 used)
5. Socket screw (2 used)
8. Pump support bracket
9. Lock nut (2 used)
B. Remove gear pump from traction pump. Locate
and discard O--ring from between pumps.
C. Ifnecessary, removetwo(2)locknutsthatsecure
pump support bracket to gear pump. Remove brack-
et and two (2) flat washers from gear pump.
5. Secure pump support bracket to inside of frame
bracket with two (2) carriage screws (item 12) and
flange nuts (item 15).
13.If necessary, remove hydraulic fittings from pumps.
Note orientation of fittings for assembly purposes.
6. Install hydraulic hoses to fittings on pump assembly
in positions noted during removal (see Hydraulic Hose
and Tube Installation in the General Information section
of this chapter).
14.Remove and discard all O--rings from removed hy-
draulic lines and fittings.
7. Connect machine wire harness electrical connector
to traction neutral switch.
Installation (Fig. 67)
1. If fittings were removed from pumps, lightly lubricate
newfittingO--ringswithcleanhydraulicoil. Installfittings
with O--rings to the pumps (see Hydraulic Fitting Instal-
lation in the GeneralInformation sectionofthischapter).
Orientate fittings as noted during removal.
8. Secure traction cable assembly to traction pump
(Fig. 69):
A. Position traction cable assemblyto pumpassem-
bly.
2. Assemble traction and gear pumps (Fig. 70):
B. Secure traction lever bracket (item 12 in Fig. 69)
to pump lever with cap screws (items 7 and 13 in Fig.
69) and lock nut (item 8 in Fig. 69).
A. Lubricate and position new O--ring between
pumps.
C. Secure lever damper (item 14 in Fig. 69) to trac-
tion cable bracket with flange nut (item 4 in Fig. 69).
B. Position gear pump to traction pump and secure
with two (2) socket head screws, lock washers and
flat washers.
D. Secure traction cable to traction cable bracket
(item 6 in Fig. 69) with jam nuts.
C. If pump support bracket was removed from gear
pump, fit flat washers and bracket to gear pump and
secure with two (2) lock nuts.
9. Install hydraulic pump drive shaft (see Hydraulic
Pump Drive Shaft Installation in this section).
IMPORTANT: Make sure to not damage machine
components while installing the pump assembly.
10.Check oil level in hydraulic reservoir and add correct
oil if necessary.
3. Carefully lower pump assembly to machine frame.
11.Follow Hydraulic System Start--up procedures (see
Hydraulic System Start--up in this section).
4. Secure pump assembly to machine frame with two
(2) flange screws and flange nuts.
12.Check traction drive for neutral and traction neutral
switch operation. Adjust if necessary.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 70
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 71
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Piston (Traction) Pump Service
18
19
20
5
23
4
15
14
12
13
9
2
5
1
8
7
6
24
17
3
25
26
8
9
10
28
24
16
11
13
12
33
32
26
34
27
31
36
30
22
29
21
54
53
35
40
43
44
52
51
41
42
37
45
38
46
39
50
47
49
48
Figure 71
1. Traction pump housing
2. Auxiliary shaft
3. Retaining ring
4. Ball bearing
5. Retaining ring
6. Seal
7. Backup washer
8. Bearing
9. O--ring
10. Trunnion cover
11. Screw (4 used)
12. Plug
13. O--ring
14. Seal
15. Trunnion cover
16. Neutral switch
17. Lock washer
18. Screw (4 used)
19. Control arm
20. Screw
21. Charge relief poppet
22. Spring
23. Bracket
24. Nut
25. Seal nut
26. Pin
37. Cylinder block kit
38. Valve plate
39. Slotted pin
40. End cap gasket
41. Seal kit
42. Relief valve (reverse)
43. Needle bearing
44. Loop flushing spool
45. Spring
46. Plug
47. O--ring
48. Bypass valve
49. Seal kit
50. End cap
27. Swashplate
28. Thrust plate
29. Shim kit
30. O--ring
31. Charge relief plug
32. Retaining ring
33. Bearing
34. Neutral return arm
35. Neutral return pivot
36. Spring
51. Coupling
52. Screw (4 used)
53. Relief valve (forward)
54. Seal kit
NOTE: For piston (traction) pump repair information,
see the Sauer--Danfoss LPV Closed Circuit Axial Piston
Pumps Repair Manual and Service Instructions at the
end of this chapter.
IMPORTANT: If a piston (traction) pump failure oc-
curred, refer to Traction Circuit Component Failure
in the General Information section for information
regarding the importance of removing contamina-
tion from the traction circuit.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 72
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 73
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gear Pump Service
33 ft--lb
(45 N--m)
12
11
10
9
23
22
7
13
6
21
2
1
8
19
17
6
8
16
21
24
5
4
14
20
3
18
33 ft--lb
(45 N--m)
15
Figure 72
1. Front cover
2. Dowel pin (16 used)
3. Square section seal (8 used)
4. Back--up ring (8 used)
5. Pressure seal (8 used)
6. Thrust plate (8 used)
7. Drive shaft
9. Body (P1 section)
10. Flange (3 used)
11. Splined connecting shaft (3 used)
12. Drive gear
13. Body (P2 section)
14. Drive gear
17. Drive gear
18. Driven gear
19. Body (P4 section)
20. Rear cover
21. Washer (4 used)
22. Stud bolt (2 used)
23. Nut (2 used)
15. Driven gear
8. Driven gear (2 used)
16. Body (P3 section)
24. Cap screw (2 used)
Disassembly (Fig. 72)
IMPORTANT: Use caution when clamping gear
pump in a vise to avoid distorting any pump compo-
nents.
NOTE: The gear pump mustbe replacedas acomplete
assembly. Individual gears, housings and thrust plates
are not available separately. Disassemble gear pump
for cleaning, inspection and seal replacement only.
3. Secure the front cover of the pump in a vise with the
drive shaft pointing down.
IMPORTANT: Keep bodies, gears, flanges and
thrustplatesforeachpumpsectiontogether;donot
mix parts between pump sections.
4. Loosen the two (2) cap screws and two (2) nuts that
secures pump assembly.
5. Remove pump from vise and remove fasteners.
1. Plug pump ports and thoroughly clean exterior of
pump with cleaning solvent. Make sure work area is
clean.
6. Supportthepumpassemblyandgentlytapthepump
case with a soft face hammer to loosen the pump sec-
tions. Be careful to not drop parts or disengage gear
mesh.
2. Use a marker to make a diagonal line across the
gear pump for assembly purposes (Fig. 73).
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 74
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT: Mark the relative positions of the gear
teeth and the thrust plates so they can be reassem-
bled in the same position. Do not touch the gearsur-
faces as residue on hands may be corrosive to gear
finish.
DIAGONAL LINE
7. Remove the thrust plates and seals from each pump
section. Before removing each gear set, apply marking
dye to mating teeth to retain ”timing”. Pump efficiency
may be affected if the teeth are not installed in the same
position during assembly. Keep the parts for each pump
section together; do not mix parts between sections.
8. Clean all parts. Check all components for burrs,
scoring, nicks and other damage.
9. Replace the entire pump assembly if parts are ex-
cessively worn or scored.
Disassembly (Fig. 72)
Figure 73
1. Apply clean hydraulic oil to all parts before assem-
bling.
NOTE: Pressure seals and back--up rings fit in grooves
machined into thrust plates. Body seals fit in grooves
machined in body faces.
2. Assemble pump sections starting at front cover end.
Apply grease or petroleum jelly to new section seals to
hold them in position during gear pump assembly.
3. After pump has been assembled, tighten cap screws
and nuts by hand. Rotate the drive shaft to check for
binding. Protect the shaft if using a pliers.
4. Tighten the cap screws and nuts evenly in a crossing
pattern to a torque of 33 ft--lb (45 N--m).
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 75
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Wheel Motors
25
14
5
11
9
10
6
28
23
29
30
7
31
32
33
16
80 to 100 ft--lb
(109 to 135 N--m)
12
5
9
13
21
24
11
26
27
22
8
19
18
15
20
14
1
28
3
17
2
RIGHT
70 to 90 ft--lb
(95 to 122 N--m)
FRONT
315 to 385 ft--lb
(427 to 521 N--m)
4
Figure 74
1. LH wheel motor
2. Lug nut (5 used per wheel)
3. Hub
12. Lock nut (4 used per wheel motor)
13. Cap screw (4 used per wheel motor)
14. Brake bracket (2 used)
23. Clevis pin (2 used)
24. LH brake assembly
25. RH brake assembly
4. Wheel assembly
5. Hydraulic fitting (2 used per motor)
6. Hydraulic tube
7. Hydraulic tube
8. Cap screw (2 used per wheel shield)
9. O--ring
15. Lock nut (2 used per wheel shield)
16. RH wheel motor
17. Lock nut (2 used)
18. Flat washer (2 used per wheel shield)
19. Brake drum (2 used)
20. Front wheel shield (LH shown)
21. Rear wheel shield (LH shown)
22. Wheel stud (5 used per wheel)
26. Cap screw (4 used per brake assy)
27. Lock nut (4 used per brake assy)
28. Square key (1 used per motor)
29. Return spring (1 used per bracket)
30. Brake spring bracket (2 used)
31. Flange nut (1 used per bracket)
32. Jam nut (1 used per bracket)
33. Cap screw (1 used per bracket)
10. Hydraulic tube
11. O--ring
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 76
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.Thoroughly clean hydraulic line ends and fittings on
wheelmotortopreventhydraulicsystemcontamination.
CAUTION
13.Label hydraulic connections at wheel motor for as-
sembly purposes.
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all hy-
draulic controls to relieve system pressure and
avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil. See
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the Gen-
eral Information section of this chapter.
14.Disconnecthydraulic linesfromfittingson wheelmo-
tor. Allow lines to drain into a suitable container.
15.Put caps or plugs on disconnected lines and fittings
to prevent contamination.
Removal (Fig. 74)
16.Support wheel motor to prevent it from falling. Re-
move four (4) lock nuts from cap screws that secure mo-
tor and brake bracket to frame.
1. Park the machine on a levelsurface, engage parking
brake, lower cutting decks and stop engine. Remove
key from the ignition switch.
17.Remove four (4) cap screws, brake assembly with
brake bracket (item 14) and brake spring bracket (item
30) from wheel motor and frame.
2. Chock rear wheels to prevent machine from shifting.
3. Loosen, but do not remove, five (5) wheel lug nuts
and lock nut (item 17) that secures wheel hub to wheel
motor.
18.Remove wheel motor from machine.
19.Ifhydraulicfittingsaretoberemovedfromwheelmo-
tor, mark fitting orientation to allow correct assembly.
Remove fittings from motor and discard O--rings.
4. Read the General Precautions for Removing and
Installing Hydraulic System Components at the begin-
ning of the Service and Repairs section of this chapter.
Installation (Fig. 74)
IMPORTANT: Because of internal differences in
front wheel motors, DO NOT interchange front
wheel motors on machine (i.e. do not put right side
motor on left side of machine). The left side wheel
motor has a yellow identification mark on the motor
housing. If necessary, use parts catalog and part
number on wheel motor to identify RH and LH mo-
tors.
WARNING
Beforejackingupthemachine, reviewandfollow
Jacking Instructions in Chapter 1 -- Safety.
5. Jack up machine enough to allow the removal of the
front wheel. Support machine with jack stands.
6. Remove front wheel from machine (see Front Wheel
Removal in the Service and Repairs section of Chapter
6 -- Chassis).
1. If fittings were removed from wheel motor, lubricate
and place new O--rings to fittings. Install fittings into mo-
tor ports using marks made during the removal process
toproperly orientatefittings (seeHydraulic FittingInstal-
lation in the GeneralInformation sectionofthischapter).
7. Remove return spring and clevis pin that secure
brake cable clevis to brake actuator lever. Position
brake cable clevis away from actuator lever.
2. Position wheelmotor to frame. Slide brakeassembly
with brake bracket (item 14), brake spring bracket (item
30)andfour(4)capscrewsontowheelmotorandframe.
8. Remove brake drum.
9. Make sure wheel hub lock nut (item 17) is loosened
at least two (2) turns.
3. Install and tighten four (4) lock nuts onto cap screws
tosecuremotorandbrakecomponentstoframe.Torque
cap screws from 80 to 100 ft--lb (109 to 135 N--m).
IMPORTANT: DO NOT hit wheel hub, puller or wheel
motor with a hammer during wheel hub removal or
installation. Hammering may cause damage to the
wheel motor.
4. Thoroughly clean motor shaft and wheel hub taper.
5. Install square key into the wheel motor shaft keyslot.
Alignwheelhubwithkeyandslidewheelhubontomotor
shaft.
10.Use hub puller (see Special Tools in this chapter) to
loosen wheel hub from wheel motor.
IMPORTANT: Do not reuse lock nut that secures
wheelhub to wheelmotor after it has beenremoved.
11.Remove lock nut and wheel hub from motor shaft.
Discard lock nut. Locate and retrieve square key.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 77
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Install new lock nut (item 17) onto the wheel motor
shaft to secure wheel hub to motor shaft.
10.Install front wheel to machine (see Front Wheel
Installation in the Service and Repairs section of Chap-
ter 6 -- Chassis).
7. Remove caps or plugs from disconnected hydraulic
lines and fittings.
11.Lower machine to ground.
8. Lubricate and position new O--rings to fittings on
wheel motor. Use labels placed during the removal pro-
cess to properly install hydraulic lines to wheel motor fit-
tings (see Hydraulic Hose and Tube Installation in the
General Information section of this chapter).
12.Torque lug nuts evenly in a crossing pattern from 70
to 90 ft--lb (95 to 122 N--m). Torque wheel hub lock nut
(item 17) from 315 to 385 ft--lb (427 to 521 N--m).
13.Check and adjust oil level in hydraulic tank.
14.Operate machine functions slowly until air is out of
system (see Hydraulic System Start--up in this section).
9. Secure brake cable clevis to brake actuator lever
with clevis pin and brake return spring. Make sure that
return spring is attached to cap screw on spring bracket.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 78
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 79
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Wheel Motors
11
70 to 90 ft--lb
(95 to 122 N--m)
15
16
12
2
3
4
7
6
5
13
1
10
9
RIGHT
8
FRONT
270 to 330 ft--lb
(366 to 447 N--m)
14
Figure 75
1. Lug nut (5 used per wheel)
2. Rear axle assembly
3. Hydraulic fitting (2 used per motor)
4. Wheel assembly
6. Wheel stud (5 used per hub)
7. O--ring
8. Woodruff key
9. Cap screw (4 used per motor)
10. Lock washer (4 used per motor)
11. Steering cylinder
12. Wheel motor (LH shown)
13. Wheel hub assembly
14. Lock nut
5. Tie rod
15. Hydraulic hose (2 used per motor)
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 80
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal (Fig. 75)
10.Label all hydraulic hoses for assembly purposes.
Remove hydraulic hoses from fittings on wheel motor.
Allow hoses to drain into a suitable container.
CAUTION
11.Putclean plugs in disconnected hydraulic hoses and
fittings to prevent system contamination.
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all hy-
draulic controls to relieve system pressure and
avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil. See
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the Gen-
eral Information section of this chapter.
12.Supportthewheelmotortopreventitfromfallingdur-
ing removal.
13.Remove four (4) cap screws and lock washers that
secure wheel motor to the steering spindle.
1. Park the machine on a levelsurface, engage parking
brake, lower cutting decks and stop engine. Remove
key from the ignition switch.
14.Remove wheel motor from frame.
15.If necessary, remove hydraulic fittings from wheel
motor. Remove and discard O--rings from fittings.
2. Read the General Precautions for Removing and
Installing Hydraulic System Components at the begin-
ning of the Service and Repairs section of this chapter.
Installation (Fig. 75)
IMPORTANT: Because of internal differences in
rear wheel motors, DO NOT interchange rear wheel
motors on machine (i.e. do not put right side motor
on left side of machine). The left side wheel motor
has a yellow identification mark on the motor hous-
ing. If necessary, use parts catalog and part number
on wheel motor to identify RH and LH motors.
3. Chock frontwheelsto preventmachine fromshifting.
4. Loosen, but do not remove, five (5) wheel lug nuts
and lock nut (item 14) that secures wheel hub to wheel
motor.
WARNING
1. If fittings were removed from wheel motor, lubricate
and install new O--rings to hydraulic fittings. Install fit-
tingsintowheelmotorports(seeHydraulicFittingInstal-
lation in the GeneralInformation sectionofthischapter).
Beforejackingupthemachine, reviewandfollow
Jacking Instructions in Chapter 1 -- Safety.
2. Position rear wheel motor to steering spindle. Make
sure that ports in wheel motor are facing toward the rear
of the machine.
5. Jack up machine enough to allow the removal of the
rear wheel. Support machine with jack stands.
6. Removerearwheelassemblyfromthemachine(see
RearWheelRemovalintheServiceandRepairssection
of Chapter 6 -- Chassis).
3. Secure wheel motor to spindle with four (4) cap
screws and lock washers.
4. Remove caps or plugs from disconnected hydraulic
hoses and wheel motor fittings that were placed during
wheel motor removal to prevent contamination.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT hit wheel hub, wheel hub
puller or wheel motor with a hammer during wheel
motor removal or installation. Hammering may
cause damage to the wheel motor.
5. Using labels placed during the removal process,
properly connect hydraulic hoses to wheel motor fittings
(see Hydraulic Hose and Tube Installation in the Gener-
al Information section of this chapter).
7. Make sure that lock nut (item 14) that secures wheel
hub to wheel motor is loosened at least two (2) turns.
Usehubpuller(seeSpecialToolsinthischapter)toloos-
en wheel hub from wheel motor.
6. Make sure that tapers of wheel motor shaft and
wheel hub are thoroughly clean.
8. Remove loosened lock nut and wheel hub from mo-
tor shaft. Discard lock nut. Locate and retrieve woodruff
key from wheel motor shaft.
7. Positionwoodruffkeytokeyslotinwheelmotorshaft.
IMPORTANT: Do not reuse lock nut that secures
wheelhub to wheelmotor after it has beenremoved.
9. Thoroughlycleanhydraulichoseendsandfittingson
rear wheel motor to prevent hydraulic system contami-
nation.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 81
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Place wheel hub on motor shaft and secure with new
lock nut (item 14).
11.Torque wheel hub lock nut (item 14) from 270 to 330
ft--lb (366 to 447 N--m).
9. Install wheel assembly to the machine and secure
with five (5) lug nuts.
12.Torque wheel lug nuts evenly in a crossing pattern
from 70 to 90 ft--lb (95 to 122 N--m).
10.Lower the machine to the ground.
13.Make surehydraulic tankis full. Add correctoilifnec-
essary.
14.After assembly is completed, verify that hydraulic
hoses and fittings do not contact anything through full
range of axle motion. Also, check for any hydraulic
leaks.
WARNING
Failure to properly tighten wheel hub lock nut or
wheel lug nuts could result in failure or loss of
wheel and may result in personal injury.
15.Follow Hydraulic System Start--up procedures (see
Hydraulic System Start--up in this section).
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 82
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 83
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel Motor Service
14
15
16
17
12
18
21
19
13
20
22
23
4
1
10
2
3
5
6
45 to 55 ft--lb
(61 to 75 N--m)
3
7
3
8
9
3
3
11
Figure 76
1. Cap screw (7 used)
2. End cover
3. Body seal (5 used)
4. Commutator ring
5. Commutator
6. Commutator ring
7. Manifold
9. Vane (7 used)
10. Rotor
11. Wear plate
17. Inner bearing
18. Shaft seal
19. Back--up washer
20. Back--up ring
21. Housing
22. Outer bearing
23. Dirt and water seal
12. Drive link
13. Thrust bearing
14. Coupling shaft
15. Thrust bearing
16. Thrust washer
8. Stator
NOTE: The front wheel motors on Groundsmaster
4300--D machines are Parker Torqmotor TM TG Series.
The rear wheel motors are Parker TorqmotorTM TL Se-
ries. Rightand leftmotors are the same basic design but
the right side motors have a reverse timed manifold to
allow correct rotation direction for forward and reverse.
IMPORTANT: Ifawheelmotorfailureoccurred,refer
to Traction Circuit Component Failure in the Gener-
al Information section for information regarding the
importance of removing contamination from the
traction circuit.
NOTE: For wheel motor repair procedures, see the
Parker TorqmotorTM Service Procedure (TC, TB, TE, TJ,
TF, TG, TH and TL Series) at the end of this chapter.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 84
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 85
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CrossTraxTM AWD Manifold
11
12
15
8
14
13
9
10
6
7
14
6
1
6
5
RIGHT
2
4
FRONT
3
Figure 77
1. AWD manifold
2. Hydraulic tube
3. Hydraulic tube
4. Hydraulic tube
5. O--ring
6. Hydraulic fitting (7 used)
7. O--ring
8. Dust cap (2 used)
9. Diagnostic fitting (2 used)
10. O--ring
11. Cap screw (3 used)
12. Lock washer (3 used)
13. Spacer (3 used)
14. Hydraulic hose (4 used)
15. Frame bracket
Removal (Fig. 77)
CAUTION
1. Park the machine on a levelsurface, engage parking
brake, lower cutting decks and stop engine. Remove
key from the ignition switch.
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all hy-
draulic controls to relieve system pressure and
avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil. See
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the Gen-
eral Information section of this chapter.
2. Read the General Precautions for Removing and
Installing Hydraulic System Components at the begin-
ning of the Service and Repairs section of this chapter.
3. Locate CrossTraxTM AWD manifold that is attached
to bracket at rear of frame.
5. Disconnecthydraulichosesandtubesfromfittingsin
manifold. Allow lines to drain into a suitable container.
Remove and discard O--rings.
4. Label all hydraulic connections for assembly pur-
poses. Thoroughly clean hydraulic connections prior to
loosening hydraulic lines.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 86
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Put caps or plugs on disconnected lines and fittings
to prevent contamination.
3. Remove caps and plugs from disconnected lines
and fittings.
7. Support manifold to prevent it from falling. Remove
three (3) cap screws and lock washers that secure man-
ifold to machine frame. Locate and retrieve three (3)
spacers from between bracket and manifold.
4. Lubricate and install new O--ring(s) on manifold fit-
tings. Connect hydraulic lines to hydraulic manifold fit-
tingsandproperlytightenallconnections(seeHydraulic
Hose and Tube Installation in the General Information
section of this chapter).
8. Remove AWD manifold from machine.
5. Secure AWD manifold to frame by tightening three
(3) cap screws.
9. Ifnecessary,removehydraulicfittingsfrommanifold.
Discard any removed O--rings.
6. Check oil level in hydraulic reservoir and add correct
oil if necessary.
Installation (Fig. 77)
1. If fittings were removed from AWD manifold, lubri-
cate and place new O--rings to fittings. Install fittings into
manifold (see Hydraulic Fitting Installation in the Gener-
al Information section of this chapter).
7. Follow Hydraulic System Start--up procedures (see
Hydraulic System Start--up in this section).
2. Position manifold and three (3) spacers to frame
bracket. Install three (3) lock washers and cap screws
but do not fully tighten screws.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 87
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CrossTraxTM AWD Manifold Service
220 in--lb
(24.8 N--m)
25 ft--lb
(33 N--m)
12
3
2
5
11
4
220 in--lb
1
(24.8 N--m)
25 ft--lb
(33 N--m)
2
2
220 in--lb
3
(24.8 N--m)
3
4
10
5
9
8
7
7
6
6
46 ft--lb
(62 N--m)
120 in--lb
(13.5 N--m)
Figure 78
1. AWD manifold
2. O--ring
3. Plug (zero leak #6)
5. Check valve
6. Plug (zero leak #4)
7. O--ring
9. Plug (zero leak #8)
10. O--ring
11. Seal kit
4. Seal kit
8. Orifice (.040)
12. Bi--Directional relief valve
Forcontrolmanifoldserviceprocedures, seeDeckCon-
trol Manifold Service in this section. Refer to Figure 78
for CrossTraxTM AWD control manifold cartridge valve
installation torque.
NOTE: The CrossTraxTM AWD control manifold uses
several zero leak plugs. These plugs have a tapered
sealing surface on the plug head that is designed to re-
sist vibration induced plug loosening. The zero leak
plugs also have an O--ring to provide a secondary seal.
If zero leak plug removal is necessary, lightly rap the
plug head using a punch and hammer before using an
allen wrench to remove the plug: the impact will allow
plug removal with less chance of damage to the socket
head of the plug. When installing plugs into the control
manifold, torque plugs to the values identified in Figures
78.
NOTE: Adjustment of Bi--Directional Relief Valve (item
12) is NOT recommended.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 88
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 89
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deck Control Manifold
4
3
2
1
12
2
13
3
6
8
4
7
5
6
6
11
7
10
9
RIGHT
FRONT
Figure 79
1. Deck control manifold
2. O--ring
3. Diagnostic fitting
6. O--ring
7. Hydraulic hose
8. O--ring
10. Flange head screw (3 used)
11. Hydraulic tube
12. Hydraulic tube
4. Dust cap
9. Hydraulic tube
13. Hydraulic tube
5. Hydraulic tube
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 90
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal (Fig. 79)
2. Position deck control manifold to frame. Install three
(3) flange head screws but do not fully tighten.
1. Park the machine on a levelsurface, engage parking
brake, lower cutting decks and stop engine. Remove
key from the ignition switch.
3. Remove caps and plugs from disconnected lines
and fittings.
2. Read the General Precautions for Removing and
Installing Hydraulic System Components at the begin-
ning of the Service and Repairs section of this chapter.
4. Lubricate and install new O--rings on manifold fit-
tings. Connect hydraulic lines to hydraulic fittings on
manifold and properly tighten all connections (see Hy-
draulic Hose and Tube Installation in the General Infor-
mation section of this chapter).
3. Tiltoperatorseatandengageseatpropto retainseat
in the raised position.
5. Secure hydraulic manifold to frame by tightening
three (3) flange head screws.
4. Locate hydraulic deck control manifold.
5. Label all hydraulic and electrical connections for as-
sembly purposes. Thoroughly clean hydraulic connec-
tions prior to loosening hydraulic lines.
6. Plug wire harness leads to solenoid coils on man-
ifold.
7. Lower and secure operator seat.
8. Check oil level in hydraulic reservoir and add correct
oil if necessary.
CAUTION
9. Follow Hydraulic System Start--up procedures (see
Hydraulic System Start--up in this section).
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all hy-
draulic controls to relieve system pressure and
avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil. See
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the Gen-
eral Information section of this chapter.
75 ft--lb
(101 N--m)
2
4
UP
2
2
6. Disconnect hydraulic hoses and lines from fittings in
manifold. Allow lines to drain into a suitable container.
Remove and discard O--rings from fittings.
1
3
2
7. Put caps or plugs on disconnected hoses and fittings
to prevent contamination.
6
5
8. Unplug wire harness leads from solenoid coils on
manifold.
9. Remove three (3) flange head screws that secure
manifold to machine frame.
2
2
10.Remove manifold block from machine.
81 to 99 ft--lb
7
(110 to 134 N--m)
11.If necessary, remove hydraulic fittings from manifold
(Fig. 80). Discard any removed O--rings.
Figure 80
1. Deck control manifold
2. Hydraulic fitting (6 used)
3. O--ring
5. Hydraulic fitting
6. O--ring
7. O--ring
Installation (Fig. 79)
4. O--ring
1. If fittings were removed from deck control manifold,
lubricate and place new O--rings on fittings (Fig. 80).
Install fittings into manifold (see Hydraulic Fitting Instal-
lation in the GeneralInformation sectionofthischapter).
Torque fittings to values identified in Figure 80.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 91
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deck Control Manifold Service
8
50 ft--lb
(68 N--m)
UP
25 ft--lb
(33 N--m)
1
35 ft--lb
(47 N--m)
9
20 ft--lb
(27 N--m)
2
3
7
6
50 ft--lb
(68 N--m)
4
8
6
10
20 ft--lb
(27 N--m)
20 ft--lb
(27 N--m)
3
4
35 ft--lb
(47 N--m)
2
5
11
8
25 ft--lb
(33 N--m)
50 ft--lb
(68 N--m)
60 in--lb
(6.7 N--m)
11
8
UP
Figure 81
1. Deck control manifold
2. Logic element (LC1/LC2)
3. Proportional relief valve (PRV1/PRV2)
5. Nut
6. Plug (zero leak #4)
7. O--ring
9. O--ring
10. Relief valve (RV1/RV2)
11. Pilot piston
4. Solenoid coil
8. Plug (zero leak #8)
NOTE: The ports on the deck control manifold are
marked for easy identification of components. Example:
P1isthepumpP1connectionportandPRV2istheloca-
tionfortheproportionalreliefvalvePRV2(seeHydraulic
Schematic in Chapter 8 -- Foldout Drawings to identify
the function of the hydraulic lines and cartridge valves
at each manifold port).
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 92
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE: The deck control manifold uses several zero
leak plugs. These plugs have a tapered sealing surface
on the plug head that is designed to resist vibration in-
duced plug loosening. The zero leak plugs also have an
O--ring to provide a secondary seal. If zero leak plug re-
moval is necessary, lightly rap the plug head using a
punch and hammer before using an allen wrench to re-
move the plug: the impact will allow plug removal with
less chance of damage to the socket head of the plug.
When installing plugs into the control manifold, torque
plugs to the values identified in Figures 81.
CAUTION
Use eye protection such as goggles when using
compressed air for cartridge valve cleaning.
CAUTION
Abrupt movement of internal spools can cause
stored fluid to be released suddenly.
Deck Control Manifold Service
1. Make sure the manifold is thoroughly cleaned before
removing any cartridge valve.
6. Clean cartridge valve by submerging valve in clean
mineral spirits to flush out contamination. Particles as
fine as talcum powder can affect the operation of high
pressure hydraulic valves. If cartridge design allows,
use a wood or plastic probe to push the internal spool in
and out 20 to 30 times to flush out contamination. Be ex-
tremely careful not to damage cartridge. Use com-
pressed air for cleaning.
2. If solenoid cartridge valve is being serviced, remove
nutsecuringsolenoidcoiltothecartridgevalve. Careful-
ly slide solenoid coil off the valve.
CAUTION
7. Reinstall cartridge valve into manifold:
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all hy-
draulic controls to relieve system pressure and
avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil. See
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the Gen-
eral Information section of this chapter.
A. Lubricate new seal kit components with clean hy-
draulic oil and install on valve. The O--rings, sealing
ringsandbackupringsmustbearrangedproperlyon
the cartridge valve for proper operation and sealing.
IMPORTANT: Use care when installing cartridge
valves. Slight bending or distortion of the stem
tube can cause binding and malfunction. Make
sure that deep well socket fully engages the
valve base.
IMPORTANT: Use care when removing cartridge
valves. Slight bending or distortion of the stem tube
can cause binding and malfunction. Make sure that
deep well socket fully engages the valve base.
3. Using a deep well socket, remove cartridge valve
from manifold. Note correct location of O--rings, sealing
rings and backup rings. Remove and discard seal kit
from valve.
B. Threadcartridgevalve carefullyinto correctman-
ifold port. The valve should go in easily without bind-
ing.
C. Torque cartridge valve using a deep well socket
to values identified in Figure 81.
4. Visually inspect the manifold port for damage to the
sealing surfaces, damaged threads and contamination.
8. If solenoid coil was removed from cartridge valve:
A. Carefully install coil onto the valve.
5. Visually inspect cartridge valve for damaged sealing
surfaces and contamination.
A. Contamination may cause valves to stick or hang
up.Contaminationcanbecomelodgedinsmallvalve
orifices or seal areas causing valve malfunction.
B. Install nut and torque nut to 60 in--lb (6.7 N--m).
B. If valve sealing surfaces appear pitted or dam-
aged, the hydraulic system may be overheating or
there may be water in the system.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 93
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cutting Deck Motor
22
19
4
21
8
6
19
17
4
3
19
4
4
2
3
2
20
3
22
8
3
2
2
18
8
23
21
4
10
6
17
6
15
2
3
4
2
16
3
4
19
2
3
5
11
6
3
10
1
14
4
2
8
4
12
2
13
2
RIGHT
3
FRONT
6
9
7
8
4
5
Figure 82
1. Hydraulic deck motor (#4)
2. O--ring
3. 90 hydraulic fitting
9. Hydraulic hose
10. 90 hydraulic fitting
11. Hydraulic hose
17. Hydraulic hose
18. Hydraulic hose
19. Hydraulic hose
o
o
4. O--ring
5. Hydraulic hose
12. Hydraulic hose
13. 45 hydraulic fitting
20. Hydraulic deck motor (#3)
21. Hydraulic fitting
o
6. O--ring
7. 45 hydraulic fitting
14. Hydraulic hose
15. Hydraulic deck motor (#1)
22. Hydraulic hose
23. Hydraulic deck motor (#2)
o
8. O--ring
16. Hydraulic deck motor (#5)
Removal (Fig. 82)
CAUTION
1. Park the machine on a levelsurface, engage parking
brake, lower cutting decks and stop engine. Remove
key from the ignition switch.
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all hy-
draulic controls to relieve system pressure and
avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil. See
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the Gen-
eral Information section of this chapter.
2. Read the General Precautions for Removing and
Installing Hydraulic System Components at the begin-
ning of the Service and Repairs section of this chapter.
3. Label all hydraulic connections for assembly pur-
poses. Thoroughly clean hydraulic connections prior to
loosening hydraulic lines from deck motor.
4. Disconnect hydraulic hoses from fittings in deck mo-
tor.Allowlinestodrainintoasuitablecontainer.Remove
and discard O--rings.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 94
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Put caps or plugs on disconnected hoses and fittings
to prevent contamination.
#4
#1
#5
6. Remove two (2) socket head screws and flat wash-
ers that secure hydraulic motor to the cutting deck (Fig.
84). Remove hydraulic motor and O--ring from deck.
7. Cover top of spindle to prevent debris from entering
spindle. A spindle plug (see Special Tools in this chap-
ter) can be used to cover spindle.
GROUNDSMASTER
4300--D CUTTING
DECK LOCATIONS
#2
#3
8. If hydraulic fittings are to be removed from motor,
mark fitting orientation to allow correct assembly. Re-
move fittings from motor and discard O--rings.
Installation (Fig. 82)
FRONT
1. If hydraulic fittings were removed from motor, lubri-
cate new O--rings, position O--rings to fittings and install
fittingsintomotorports(seeHydraulicFittingInstallation
intheGeneralInformationsectionofthischapter). Make
sure that fittings are orientated correctly.
Figure 83
2
1
3
2. Remove cover from top of spindle that was placed to
prevent debris from entering spindle.
3. Make sure that O--ring is positioned to top of spindle
housing. Secure hydraulic motor to the cutting deck with
two (2) socket head screws and flat washers (Fig. 84).
4
4. Remove caps or plugs from fittings and hoses.
IMPORTANT: When installing the hydraulic hoses,
makesurethathydraulichosesarestraight(nottwisted)
before tightening the hoses to the motor fittings.
5. Lubricate and install new O--rings on motor fittings.
Correctly connect hydraulic hoses to the motor using la-
bels placed during removal procedure (see Hydraulic
Hose and Tube Installation in the General Information
section of this chapter).
Figure 84
1. Socket head screw
2. Flat washer
3. Hydraulic motor
4. Cutting deck
6. Check oil level in hydraulic reservoir and add correct
oil if necessary.
ROTATION
DIRECTION
7. Follow Hydraulic System Start--up procedures (see
Hydraulic System Start--up in this section).
1
2
3
Figure 85
1. Flow IN
3. Case drain
2. Flow OUT
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 95
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cutting Deck Motor Service
33 ft--lb
18
(45 N--m)
26 ft--lb
(35 N--m)
19
16
14
10
13
10
9
6
5
15
17
3
6
7
1
12
26 ft--lb
(35 N--m)
12
11
10
8
7
4
2
Figure 86
1. Dust seal
8. Front wear plate
9. Drive gear
10. Dowel pin
11. Idler gear
12. O--ring
14. Rear wear plate
15. Rear cover
16. Anti--cavitation valve
17. Relief valve
18. Cap screw (4 used)
19. Washer (4 used)
2. Retaining ring
3. Flange washer
4. Shaft seal
5. Front flange
6. Pressure seal
7. Backup gasket
13. Body
Disassembly (Fig. 86)
1. Plug motor ports and clean the outside of the motor
thoroughly. After cleaning, remove plugs and drain any
oil out of the motor.
MARKER
LINE
2. Use a marker to make a diagonal line across the
frontflange, body and rear cover for assembly purposes
(Fig. 87).
IMPORTANT: Prevent damage when clamping the
motor into a vise; clamp on the front flange only.
Also, use a vise with soft jaws.
Figure 87
3. Clamp front flange of motor in a vise with soft jaws
with the shaft end down.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 96
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Loosen cap screws from the rear cover.
A. Gear shafts should be free of rough surfaces and
excessive wear at bushing points and sealing areas.
Scoring, rough surfaces or wear on gear shafts indi-
cates need for replacement.
5. Remove motor from the vise. Turn motor so that the
shaft end is facing down. Remove cap screws.
6. Separate rear cover from body. Lift rear cover from
motor.
B. Gear teeth should be free of excessive scoring
and wear. Any broken or nicked gear teeth must be
replaced.
7. Carefully remove body. Lift body straight up to re-
move. Make sure the rear wear plate remains on the
drive and idler gear shafts. Remove and discard O--
rings from the body. Locate and retrieve dowel pins.
C. Inspect gear face edge for sharpness. Sharp
edges of gears will mill into wear plates and, thus,
must be replaced.
IMPORTANT: Note position of the open and closed
side of the wear plates before removing. Also, iden-
tify wear plates (front and rear) with a marker for
proper assembly.
4. Inspect wear plates for the following:
A. Bearingareasshouldnothaveexcessive wearor
scoring.
IMPORTANT: Mark the relative positions of the gear
teeth and the wear plates so they can be reassem-
bled in the same position. Do not touch the gearsur-
faces as residue on hands may be corrosive to gear
finish.
B. Face of wear plates that are in contact with gears
should be free of wear, roughness or scoring.
C. Thickness of wear plates should be equal.
5. Inspect front flange and rear cover for damage or
wear.
8. Carefully remove rear wear plate, idler gear, drive
gear and front wear plate from the front flange.
2
3
4
1
9. Remove and discard back--up gaskets and pressure
seals from wear plates.
10.Turn front flange over, with seal side up.
IMPORTANT: Make sure to not damage the front
flange counter bore when removing the seals from
the front flange.
11.Carefully remove dust seals, retaining ring, flange
washer and shaft seal from the front flange (Fig. 88).
Discard seals.
Figure 88
1. Dust seal
2. Retaining ring
3. Flange washer
4. Shaft seal
Inspection
1. Remove any nicks and burrs from all parts with
emery cloth.
3
2
CAUTION
Use eye protection such as goggles when using
compressed air.
2. Clean all parts with solvent. Dry all parts with com-
pressed air.
1
4
3. Inspect drive gears and idler gears for the following
(Fig. 89):
Figure 89
1. Gear shaft spline
2. Gear shaft
3. Gear teeth
4. Gear face edge
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 97
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Assembly (Fig. 86)
8. Install rear wear plate with pressure seal side up and
open side of the pressure seal pointing to the inlet side
of the motor.
NOTE: When assembling the motor, check the marker
line on each part to make sure the parts are properly
aligned during assembly.
9. Apply a light coating of petroleum jelly to new O--
rings and O--ring grooves in the body. Install new O--
rings to the body.
1. Lubricate O--rings, pressure seals, back--up gaskets
and wear plate grooves with a thin coat of petroleum jel-
ly. Lubricate all other internal parts freely with clean hy-
draulic oil.
10.Install locating dowels in body. Align marker line on
the body and front flange.
2. Install new seals into front flange (Fig. 88):
IMPORTANT: Do not dislodge seals during installa-
tion.
A. Press shaft seal into front flange until it reaches
the bottom of the bore.
11.Gently slide the body onto the assembly. Firm hand
pressure should be sufficient to engage the dowels.
B. Install flange washer into front flange and then
install retaining ring into the groove of the front
flange.
12.Check to make sure that the surface of the rear wear
plate is slightly below the face of the body. If the wear
plate is not below the body, check assembly for a shifted
pressure seal, backup gasket or O--ring. Correct before
proceeding.
C. Install new dust seals into front flange. Inner dust
seal should have the seal lip and spring toward the
installed retaining ring. The outer dust seal should
have the seal lip and spring toward the outside of the
motor.
13.Applyalightcoatingofpetroleumjellytotheexposed
side of the rear cover.
3. Place front flange, seal side down, on a flat surface.
14.Place rear cover on assembly using marker line for
proper location. Firm hand pressure should be sufficient
to engage the dowel pins.
4. Install the pressure seals, flat side outward, into the
grooves in the wear plates. Follow by carefully placing
the backup gaskets, flat side outward, between the
pressure seals and the grooves in the wear plate.
15.Installthefour(4)capscrewswithwashersandhand
tighten screws.
5. Applyalightcoatingofpetroleumjellytotheexposed
side of the front flange.
IMPORTANT: Prevent damage when clamping the
motor into a vise; clamp on the front flange only.
Also, use a vise with soft jaws.
6. Lubricatethedrivegearshaftwithcleanhydraulicoil.
Insert the drive end of the drive shaft through the wear
platewiththepressuresealsidedownandtheopenside
of the pressure seal pointing to the inlet side of the mo-
tor. Carefully install shaft into front flange.
16.Place front flange of the motor into a vise with soft
jaws and alternately torque the cap screws 33 ft--lb (45
N--m).
17.Remove motor from vise.
7. Lubricate the idler gear shaft with clean hydraulic oil.
Install idler gear shaft into the remaining position in the
front wear plate. Apply a light coating of clean hydraulic
oil to gear faces.
18.Placeasmallamountofcleanhydraulicoilintheinlet
ofthemotorandrotatethedriveshaftawayfromtheinlet
one revolution. If any binding is noted, disassemble the
motor and check for assembly problems.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 98
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 99
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lift Control Manifold
5
10
11
12
12
6
3
4
12
13
1
3
8
15
14
7
3
17
9
16
RIGHT
FRONT
2
Figure 90
1. Lift control manifold
2. Flange head screw (2 used)
3. O--ring
4. Hydraulic hose
5. Hydraulic hose
6. Hydraulic hose
7. Hydraulic hose
8. Hydraulic hose
9. Hydraulic hose
10. Hydraulic tube
11. Hydraulic tube
12. O--ring
13. O--ring
14. Diagnostic fitting
15. O--ring
16. Hydraulic hose
17. Dust cap
Removal (Fig. 90)
4. Label all hydraulic connections for assembly pur-
poses. Thoroughly clean hydraulic connections prior to
loosening hydraulic lines.
1. Park the machine on a levelsurface, engage parking
brake, lower cutting decks and stop engine. Remove
key from the ignition switch.
CAUTION
2. Read the General Precautions for Removing and
Installing Hydraulic System Components at the begin-
ning of the Service and Repairs section of this chapter.
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all hy-
draulic controls to relieve system pressure and
avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil. See
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the Gen-
eral Information section of this chapter.
3. Locate hydraulic lift control manifold that is attached
to frame bracket under the front platform.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 100
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Position lift control manifold to frame. Install two (2)
flange head screws but do not fully tighten.
WARNING
3. Remove caps and plugs from disconnected lines
and fittings.
Make sure that cutting decks are fully lowered
before loosening hydraulic lines, cartridge
valves or plugs from lift control manifold. If
decks are not fully lowered as manifold compo-
nents are loosened, decks may drop unexpect-
edly.
4. Lubricate and install new O--ring(s) on manifold fit-
tings. Connect hydraulic lines to hydraulic manifold fit-
tingsandproperlytightenallconnections(seeHydraulic
Hose and Tube Installation in the General Information
section of this chapter).
5. Disconnect hydraulic hoses and lines from fittings in
manifold. Allow lines to drain into a suitable container.
Remove and discard O--rings.
5. Secure hydraulic manifold to frame by tightening two
(2) flange head screws.
6. Connect wire harness leads to solenoid coils on
manifold using labels placed during removal.
6. Put caps or plugs on disconnected lines and fittings
to prevent contamination.
7. Check oil level in hydraulic reservoir and add correct
oil if necessary.
7. Label all solenoid coil wire harness leads for as-
sembly purposes. Unplug wire harness leads from sole-
noid coils on manifold.
8. Follow Hydraulic System Start--up procedures (see
Hydraulic System Start--up in this section).
8. Remove two (2) flange head screws that secure
manifold to machine frame.
20 ft--lb
(27 N--m)
50 ft--lb
(68 N--m)
9. Remove lift control manifold from machine.
4
10
IMPORTANT: A flow control orifice is placed be-
neath several hydraulic fittings on the lift control
manifold (Fig. 91). The lift manifold uses two (2) dif-
ferentorificesizes. Iffittingsareremovedfromman-
ifoldandanorificeisinthe manifoldport, makesure
to remove orifice and label its position for assembly
purposes.
9
4
2
2
3
5
12
6
10.If necessary, remove hydraulic fittings from manifold
(Fig. 91). Discard any removed O--rings. Locate, re-
trieve and label orifice from manifold port (if equipped).
11
9
1
Installation (Fig. 90)
6
3
20 ft--lb
(27 N--m)
8
7
1. If fittings were removed from manifold (Fig. 91):
Figure 91
A. Lubricate new O--rings with clean hydraulic oil.
Install lubricated O--rings on fittings.
1. Lift control manifold
2. Straight fitting (2 used)
3. O--ring
7. Straight fitting (6 used)
8. O--ring
9. O--ring
IMPORTANT: Wheninstallingorificeinmanifold,
make sure that orifice is flat in the base of the fit-
ting cavity. Manifold damage is possible if the
orifice is cocked in the cavity.
4. O--ring
5. Orifice (0.030)
6. Orifice (0.046) (3 used)
10. Straight fitting
11. 45 fitting
12. O--ring
o
B. For manifold ports with orifice, place correct ori-
fice in port with the orifice slot facing out.
C. Install fittings into manifold. Torque fittings to
torque values identified in Figure 91.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 101
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lift Control Manifold Service
5
60 in--lb
7
(6.7 N--m)
6
7
60 in--lb
(6.7 N--m)
4
20 ft--lb
(27 N--m)
20 ft--lb
(27 N--m)
3
2
8
20 ft--lb
(27 N--m)
25 ft--lb
(33 N--m)
9
RIGHT
FRONT
1
Figure 92
1. Lift control manifold
2. Solenoid valve (S1)
3. Solenoid valve (S2)
4. Solenoid coil
5. Nut
6. Nut
7. Solenoid coil
8. Proportional relief valve (PRV)
9. Logic cartridge (LC)
NOTE: The ports on the liftcontrol manifold are marked
for easy identification of components. Example: P is the
gear pump (P4) connection port and S2 is the location
forsolenoidvalveS2(seeHydraulicSchematicinChap-
ter8 -- FoldoutDrawingstoidentifythefunctionofthehy-
draulic lines and cartridge valves at each manifold port
location).
WARNING
Make sure that cutting decks are fully lowered
before loosening hydraulic lines, cartridge
valves or plugs from lift control manifold. If
decks are not fully lowered as manifold compo-
nents are loosened, decks may drop unexpect-
edly.
Forcontrolmanifoldserviceprocedures, seeDeckCon-
trol Manifold Service in this section. Refer to Figure 92
for lift control manifold cartridge valve installation
torque.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 102
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 103
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lift Cylinder
RIGHT
FRONT
10
7
6
11
8
12
9
13
1
2
5
3
4
12
11
67 to 83 ft--lb
(91 to 112 N--m)
Figure 93
1. Lift cylinder
2. Pivot shaft
3. Flange head screw
4. Lift arm (#1 shown)
5. Flat washer
6. Hydraulic hose
7. O--ring
8. 90 hydraulic fitting
10. Hydraulic hose
11. Retaining ring
12. Thrust washer
13. Cylinder slide pin
o
9. O--ring
NOTE: The procedure for lift cylinder removal and
installation is the same for all Groundsmaster 4300--D
lift cylinders. Figure 93 shows the center, front (deck #1)
lift cylinder.
#4
#1
#5
Removal (Fig. 93)
GROUNDSMASTER
4300--D CUTTING
DECK LOCATIONS
1. Park the machine on a level surface, engage the
parking brake, lower the cutting decks and stop the en-
gine. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
#2
#3
2. Read the General Precautions for Removing and
Installing Hydraulic System Components at the begin-
ning of the Service and Repairs section of this chapter.
FRONT
Figure 94
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 104
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. If lift cylinder for deck #4 or #5 is being removed, re-
moveflangenutandcarriagescrewthatsecurer--clamp
to lift cylinder (Fig. 95).
4. Align lift cylinder to lift arm mounting holes. Slide cyl-
inderslidepin(item13)(withthrustwasher(item12)and
retaining ring (item 11) installed on one end) through the
lift cylinder and lift arm. Install second thrust washer on
pin and secure with retaining ring (item 11).
4. Label all hydraulic connections for assembly pur-
poses. Thoroughly clean hydraulic connections prior to
loosening hydraulic lines from lift cylinder.
5. Remove caps and plugs from disconnected hoses
and fittings.
6. Coat new fitting O--rings lightly with clean hydraulic
oil, install new O--rings and connect hydraulic hoses to
fittings on lift cylinder. Tighten hose connections (see
Hydraulic Hose and Tube Installation in the General In-
formation section of this chapter).
CAUTION
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all hy-
draulic controls to relieve system pressure and
avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil. See
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the Gen-
eral Information section of this chapter.
7. If lift cylinder for deck #4 or #5 was removed, secure
r--clamptoliftcylinderwithflangenutandcarriagescrew
(Fig. 95).
5. Disconnect hydraulic hoses from fittings in lift cylin-
derthatistoberemoved.Allowhosestodrainintoasuit-
able container. Remove and discard O--rings.
8. Check oil level in hydraulic reservoir and add correct
oil if necessary.
9. Lubricate lift cylinder grease fittings.
6. Put caps or plugs on disconnected hoses and fittings
to prevent contamination.
10.Follow Hydraulic System Start--up procedures (see
Hydraulic System Start--up in this section).
7. Removeoneretainingring(item11)andthrustwash-
er (item 12) from the cylinder slide pin (item 13). Pull pin
fromtheliftcylinderandliftarm. Locateandretrievesec-
ond thrust washer.
2
8. Remove flange head screw (item 3) and flat washer
(item 5) that retain lift cylinder to pivot shaft.
9. Remove lift cylinder from pivot shaft and frame.
3
1
10.If hydraulic fittings are to be removed from lift cylin-
der, mark fitting orientation to allow correct assembly.
Remove fittings from lift cylinder and discard O--rings.
4
Installation (Fig. 93)
1. Ifhydraulicfittingswereremovedfromliftcylinder,lu-
bricate new O--rings, position O--rings to fittings and
install fittings into lift cylinder ports (see Hydraulic Fitting
Installation in the General Information section of this
chapter). Make sure thatfittingsare orientatedcorrectly.
Figure 95
1. Lift cylinder (#4 shown)
2. Carriage screw
3. R--clamp
4. Flange nut
2. Position liftcylinder to the frame. The liftcylinderbar-
rel end should be attached to the machine frame.
3. Slide barrel end of lift cylinder onto pivot shaft. Se-
cure cylinder with flange head screw (item 3) and flat
washer (item 5). Torque screw from 67 to 83 ft--lb (91
to 112 N--m).
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 105
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lift Cylinder Service
1
14
9
8
7
4
13
6
40 ft--lb
(54 N--m)
10
2
11
12
5
3
9
3
13
1
5
8
14
2
12
4
7
11
10
6
Figure 96
1. Grease fitting
2. Shaft
3. Dust seal
6. Retaining ring
7. Back up washer
8. O--ring
11. O--ring
12. Grease fitting
13. Lock nut
14. Barrel
4. Head
9. Piston
5. Head seal
10. Piston seal
NOTE: The lift cylinders used on Groundsmaster
4300--D machines are very similar. Service procedures
for all lift cylinders are the same.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 106
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disassembly (Fig. 96)
Assembly (Fig. 96)
1. Removeoilfromliftcylinderintoadrainpanbyslowly
pumping the cylinder shaft. Plug both ports and clean
the outside of the cylinder.
1. Make sure all lift cylinder parts are clean before as-
sembly.
2. Coat new O--rings, back--up washer and other seals
with clean hydraulic oil. Carefully install new seals,
back--up rings and O--rings to head and piston.
IMPORTANT: Prevent damage when clamping the
lift cylinder into a vise; clamp on the clevis end of
the barrel ONLY.
IMPORTANT: Do not clamp vise jaws against the
shaft surface. Clamp on the clevis ONLY.
2. Mount lift cylinder securely in a vise by clamping on
the clevis end of the barrel. Use of a vise with soft jaws
is recommended.
3. Mountshaftsecurelyinavisebyclampingonthecle-
vis of the shaft.
3. Using a spanner wrench, rotate head clockwise until
the edge of the retaining ring (item 6) appears in the bar-
rel opening. Insert a screwdriver under the beveled
edge of the retaining ring to start the retaining ring
through the opening. Rotate the head counter--clock-
wise to remove retaining ring from barrel and head.
A. Coat shaft with clean hydraulic oil.
B. Slide head onto the shaft.
C. Install piston onto the shaft and secure with lock
nut. Torque lock nut 40 ft--lb (54 N--m).
4. Remove plugs from ports. Extract shaft, head and
piston by carefully twisting and pulling on the shaft.
D. Remove shaft assembly from the vise.
IMPORTANT: Prevent damage when clamping the
hydraulic cylinder into a vise; clamp on the clevis
end of the barrel ONLY.
IMPORTANT: Do not clamp vise jaws against the
shaft surface. Clamp on the clevis ONLY.
5. Mountshaftsecurelyinavisebyclampingonthecle-
vis of the shaft. Remove lock nut and piston from the
shaft. Carefully slide head off the shaft.
4. Mount barrel securely in a vise by clamping on the
clevis end of the barrel.
IMPORTANT: When installing the head into the bar-
rel, pay careful attention to the retaining ring slot in
thebarreltoinsurethatthepistonandheadsealsdo
not lodge in the slot.
6. Taking care to not scratch or damage components,
remove and discard all seals, back--up rings and O--
rings from head and piston.
Inspection
5. Coat all internal parts with a light coat of clean hy-
draulic oil. Slide piston, shaft and head assembly into
the barrel being careful not to damage the seals.
CAUTION
6. Secure head in barrel with retaining ring.
Use eye protection such as goggles when using
compressed air.
A. Align retaining ring hole in the head with the ac-
cess slot in the barrel.
B. Insert the retaining ring hook into the hole and ro-
tate head clockwise until the retaining ring is com-
pletely pulled into the barrel and the ring ends are
covered.
1. Wash all lift cylinder components in clean solvent.
Dry parts with compressed air.
2. Inspect internal surface of barrel for deep scratches,
out--of--roundness and bending.
C. Apply silicone sealer to barrel access slot.
3. Inspect head, shaft and piston for excessive pitting,
scoring and wear.
4. Replace lift cylinder if internal components are found
to be worn or damaged.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 107
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering Control Valve
4
Antiseize
Lubricant
20 to 26 ft--lb
(28 to 35 N--m)
20
1
21
84 to 120 in--lb
(9.5 to 13.5 N--m)
3
Antiseize
Lubricant
6
17
16
11
5
10
8
2
12
9
22
19
14
7
19
RIGHT
FRONT
13
7
15
18
Figure 97
1. Steering column
2. Hydraulic fitting (4 used)
3. Steering wheel
4. Steering wheel cover
5. Gear pump
6. Socket head screw (4 used)
7. Flange nut
9. Hydraulic tube
10. Hydraulic tube
11. Hydraulic tube
12. Hydraulic tube
13. Column brace
14. Steering control valve
16. Flange head screw (2 used)
17. Socket head screw (4 used)
18. Flange nut (2 used)
19. Tube clamp
20. Lock nut
21. Flat washer
15. Flange head screw (2 used)
22. O--ring
8. O--ring
Removal (Fig. 97)
4. Loosen and remove four (4) screws and flange nuts
that secure steering column brace (item 13) to machine.
Remove brace.
1. Park the machine on a level surface, engage the
parking brake, lower the cutting decks and stop the en-
gine. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
5. Read the General Precautions for Removing and
Installing Hydraulic System Components at the begin-
ning of the Service and Repairs section of this chapter.
2. Remove fasteners that secure shroud to front of ma-
chine (Fig. 98). Remove shroud from machine to allow
accesstosteeringcontrolvalve. Locateandretrievetwo
(2) rubber bushings and spacers.
6. Label all hydraulic connections for assembly pur-
poses. Note port designations on steering control valve
(Fig. 99). Thoroughly clean hydraulic connections prior
to loosening hydraulic lines.
3. Slide rubber bellows up from bottom of steering col-
umn. Support steering column to prevent it from falling.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 108
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Position steering column brace (item 13) to machine
and secure with four (4) screws and flange nuts.
CAUTION
8. Slide rubber bellows to bottom of steering column.
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all hy-
draulic controls to relieve system pressure and
avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil. See
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the Gen-
eral Information section of this chapter.
9. Place rubber bushings and spacers into holes of
shroud (Fig. 98). Position shroud in place and secure
with removed fasteners.
10.Check oil level in hydraulic reservoir and add correct
oil if necessary.
7. Disconnect hydraulic lines from steering control
valve. Allow lines to drain into a suitable container.
11.Follow Hydraulic System Start--up procedures (see
Hydraulic System Start--up in this section).
8. Put caps or plugs on disconnected lines and fittings
to prevent contamination.
3
9. Loosen and remove remaining two (2) socket head
screws and flange nuts that secure steering column to
machine.
1
2
4
10.Remove steering column and steering control valve
assembly from machine.
11.Loosen and remove four (4) sockethead screws that
secure steering control valve to steering column.
5
3
12.Remove steering control valve from steering col-
umn.
6
7
8
13.If necessary, remove fittings and O--rings from steer-
ing control valve. Discard all removed O--rings.
Installation (Fig. 97)
1. If fittings were removed, lubricate new O--rings with
clean hydraulic oil and install fittings to steering control
valve (see Hydraulic Fitting Installation in the General
Information section of this chapter).
Figure 98
1. Washer (2 used)
2. Screw (2 used)
3. Washer head screw
5. Lock nut (2 used)
6. Cover plate
7. Bushing (2 used)
2. Apply antiseize lubricant to splines of steering con-
trol valve shaft.
4. Platform shroud
8. Spacer (2 used)
3. Slide steering control valve shaft into steering col-
umn universal joint. Position control valve with ports to-
ward front of machine. Secure steering control valve to
steering column with four (4) socket head screws.
Torque screws in a criss--cross pattern from 84 to 120
in--lb (9.5 to 13.5 N--m).
L
T
4. Position steering column assembly to machine. Se-
cure steering column in place with two (2) socket head
screws and flange nuts at rear two mounting holes.
5. Remove caps and plugs from disconnected lines
and fittings.
R
6. Lubricate new O--rings and connect hydraulic lines
to fittings on steering control valve. Tighten connections
(see Hydraulic Hose and Tube Installation in the Gener-
al Information section of this chapter).
P
Figure 99
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 109
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering Control Valve Service
26
25
24
23
21
22
20
19
18
16
14
12
11
9
17
10
8
15
7
4
6
13
5
4
3
2
20 to 24 ft--lb
(27 to 33 N--m)
1
Figure 100
1. Screw (5 used)
2. O--ring (5 used)
3. End cover
10. Spool
19. Check ball
20. Housing
21. Dust seal ring
22. Relief valve
23. Spring
24. O--ring
25. Plug
11. Sleeve
12. Cross pin
13. Spring set
14. Ring
15. Thrust washer
16. Bearing
4. O--ring
5. Outer gearwheel
6. Inner gearwheel
7. Distributor plate
8. O--ring
17. Shaft seal
18. Ball stop
26. Plug
9. Cardan shaft
NOTE: For repair of the steering control valve, see the
Sauer--Danfoss Steering Unit Type OSPM Service
Manual at the end of this chapter.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 110
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 111
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering Cylinder
90 to 120 ft--lb
(123 to 162 N--m)
6
8
9
10
27
11
23
4
36
15
35
24
30
21
37
22
7
28
29
14
70 to 90 ft--lb
(95 to 122 N--m)
18
19
3
12
29
28
2
20
16
7
26
20
33
34
5
13
1
25
32
RIGHT
31
FRONT
270 to 330 ft--lb
(366 to 447 N--m)
17
Figure 101
1. Lug nut (5 used per wheel)
2. Rear axle assembly
3. Hydraulic fitting (2 used per motor)
4. Hydraulic fitting (2 used)
5. Tie rod
14. Grease fitting
15. O--ring
16. Jam nut (2 used)
17. Lock nut
18. Hydraulic hose
19. O--ring
26. Wheel assembly
27. Grease fitting
28. Bushing
29. Slotted hex nut
30. Hydraulic hose
31. Woodruff key
6. Axle pivot pin
7. Thrust washer
8. Roll pin
9. Thrust washer
10. Jam nut
20. Cotter pin
21. Steering cylinder
22. Ball joint
23. Ball joint
24. Retaining ring
32. Cap screw (4 used per motor)
33. O--ring
34. Wheel stud (5 used per hub)
35. Grease fitting
36. O--ring
11. Grease fitting
12. Wheel motor (LH shown)
13. Wheel hub assembly
25. Lock washer (4 used per motor)
37. Hydraulic hose
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 112
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal (Fig. 101)
2. Ifremoved,pressballjointintobarrelandsecurewith
retaining ring.
1. Park the machine on a level surface, engage the
parking brake, lower the cutting decks and stop the en-
gine. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
3. If ball joint was removed from cylinder shaft, fully re-
tract cylinder shaft and thread ball joint into shaft so that
distance from cylinder front head to center of ball joint is
as measured during removal process. Tighten jam nut.
2. Read the General Precautions for Removing and
Installing Hydraulic System Components at the begin-
ning of the Service and Repairs section of this chapter.
4. Thoroughly clean tapers on ball joints and axle as-
sembly.
5. Position steering cylinder to machine.
CAUTION
6. Secure steering cylinder to axle with jam nuts (item
16). Tighten first jam nut and then, while holding firstjam
nut with wrench, tighten second jam nut.
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all hy-
draulic controls to relieve system pressure and
avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil. See
Relieving Hydraulic System Pressure in the Gen-
eral Information section of this chapter.
7. Secure steering cylinder to RH drag link with slotted
hex nut (item 29). Install cotter pin (item 20).
8. Remove caps and plugs from hydraulic hoses and
fittings.
3. Label all hydraulic connections for assembly pur-
poses. Thoroughly clean hydraulic hose ends prior to
disconnecting hoses from the steering cylinder.
9. Lubricate and install new O--rings on steering cylin-
der fittings. Correctly connect hydraulic hoses to steer-
ing cylinder (see Hydraulic Hose and Tube Installation
in the General Information section of this chapter).
4. Disconnect hydraulic hoses from steering cylinder.
5. Put caps or plugs on disconnected hoses and fittings
to prevent contamination.
10.Check oil level in hydraulic reservoir and add correct
oil if necessary.
6. Remove two (2) jam nuts (item 16) that secure steer-
ing cylinder to axle. Remove cotter pin (item 20) and
slotted hex nut (item 29) that secure steering cylinder to
RH drag link.
11.Lubricate steering cylinder ball joint grease fittings.
12.Follow Hydraulic System Start--up procedures (see
Hydraulic System Start--up in this section).
7. Separate steering cylinder ball joints from axle as-
sembly and remove steering cylinder from machine.
13.Check that steering cylinder does not contact the
axle or frame as cylinder moves from fully retracted to
fully extended. Also, check that distance between the
drag links and steering stops are equal on both sides of
the machine. If necessary, adjust location of ball joint on
cylinder shaft.
8. If necessary, remove ball joints from steering cylin-
der barrel and shaft. If ball joint is to be removed from
cylinder shaft, fully retract cylinder shaft and measure
distance from cylinder front head to center of ball joint to
easeinstallationofballjointintocylindershaft(Fig.102).
9. If hydraulic fittings are to be removed from steering
cylinder, mark fitting orientation to allow correct assem-
bly. Remove fittings from steering cylinder and discard
O--rings.
FRONT HEAD
Installation (Fig. 101)
1. Ifhydraulicfittingswereremovedfromsteeringcylin-
der, lubricate new O--rings with clean hydraulic oil, posi-
tion O--rings to fittings and install fittings into steering
cylinder ports (see Hydraulic Fitting Installation in the
General Information section of this chapter). Make sure
that fittings are orientated correctly.
MEASURE DISTANCE
FOR ASSEMBLY PURPOSES
Figure 102
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 113
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering Cylinder Service
6
11
14
1
8
3
12
17
7
5
2
16
4
15
8
9
10
13
Figure 103
1. Front shaft (1”)
2. Rear shaft (1.250”)
3. Front head (1”)
4. Rear head (1.250”)
5. Roll pin
7. O--ring
13. Dust seal
14. Barrel
15. Piston seal
16. Rear head O--ring/backup ring
17. Front head O--ring/backup ring
8. External collar (2 used)
9. Piston
10. Rear head seal
11. Front head seal
12. Wear ring
6. Dust seal
Disassembly (Fig. 103)
5. Grasp end of front shaft and use a twisting and pull-
ing motion to carefully extractthe rearshaft, piston, front
shaft and front head assembly from the barrel.
1. Remove oil from steering cylinder into a drain pan by
slowly pumping the cylinder shaft. Plug both ports and
clean the outside of the cylinder.
6. Remove cylinder from vise.
IMPORTANT: Prevent damage when clamping the
steeringcylinderintoavise;clamponthebarrelcle-
vis ONLY. Do not close vise on barrel.
IMPORTANT: Whenremovingrollpinfromfrontand
rear shafts, make sure that shaft surfaces are not
damaged.
2. Mount steering cylinder securely in a vise by clamp-
ingonthebarrelclevis.Useofavisewithsoftjawsisrec-
ommended.
7. Remove and discard roll pin (item 5) that secures
front shaft to rear shaft. Then remove rear shaft (item 2),
piston (item 9) and front head (item 3) from front shaft.
3. Using a spanner wrench, loosen and remove exter-
nal collars from both ends of barrel.
8. Remove and discard seals, O--rings and wear ring
from piston and heads.
4. Use a twisting and pulling motion to carefully extract
the rear head from the barrel and rear shaft.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 114
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inspection
IMPORTANT:Make sure to not damage O--ring (item
7) as piston is installed over roll pin hole in front
shaft.
CAUTION
3. Install piston (item 9) with new seal, O--ring and wear
ring onto front shaft.
Use eye protection such as goggles when using
compressed air.
IMPORTANT:When installing roll pin into front and
rear shafts, make sure that shaft surfaces are not
damaged.
1. Wash all cylinder components in solvent. Dry parts
with compressed air.
4. Slide rear shaft into front shaftand align roll pin holes
in shafts. Install new roll pin to secure shafts.
2. Inspect internal surface of barrel for deep scratches,
out--of--roundness and bending.
IMPORTANT: Prevent damage when clamping the
cylinder’s barrel into a vise; clamp on the clevis
only. Do not close vise on barrel.
3. Inspect head, shaft and piston for excessive pitting,
scoring and wear.
5. Mount steering cylinder barrel in a vise equipped
with soft jaws by clamping on the barrel clevis.
4. Replace steering cylinder if internal components are
found to be worn or damaged.
6. Coat all internal cylinder components with clean hy-
draulicoil.Slideshaftassemblyintobarrel, beingcareful
to not damage seals during installation.
Assembly (Fig. 103)
1. Use a new seal kit to replace all seals, O--rings and
wear ring to piston and heads. Apply clean hydraulic oil
to all seal kit components before installing.
7. Insert rear head with new seals into the barrel being
careful to not damage head seals during installation.
2. Install front head (item 3) with new seals onto front
shaft (item 1) being careful to not damage head seals
during installation.
8. Secure front and rear heads in barrel with external
collars. Tighten collars with spanner wrench.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 115
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oil Cooler
18
19
10
9
8
RIGHT
FRONT
1
20
13
10
12
12
17
15
16
17
21
3
5
2
4
6
11
7
3
14
Figure 104
1. Screen assembly
2. Oil cooler bracket
3. Flange head screw (8 used)
4. Foam seal (2 used)
5. Draw latch
8. Hydraulic hose (2 used)
15. Pin
16. Clamp (2 used)
17. Flange nut (4 used)
o
9. 90 hydraulic fitting (2 used)
10. Hose clamp (4 used)
11. Foam seal (2 used)
12. Washer (4 used)
18. O--ring
o
19. 45 hydraulic fitting (2 used)
6. Rivet (2 used)
7. Oil cooler
13. Cap screw (2 used)
14. Mount plate (2 used)
20. O--ring
21. Radiator
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 116
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal (Fig. 104)
Installation (Fig. 104)
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting
decks, stop engine, engage parking brake and remove
key from the ignition switch.
1. If removed, install hydraulic fittings, clamps and
brackets to oil cooler using Figure 104 as a guide.
2. Position oil cooler to radiator and secure with
clamps.
2. Unlatch and open the rear screen.
3. Label all hydraulic connections for assembly pur-
poses. Thoroughly clean hydraulic connections prior to
loosening hydraulic hoses.
3. Install hydraulic hoses to oil cooler fittings and se-
cure with hose clamps.
4. Afteroilcoolerinstallation,cleanoilcooler, hosecon-
nections, fittings, radiator and surrounding area of ma-
chine to prevent future accumulation of dirt and debris
on machine components.
4. Loosen hose clamps that secure hydraulic hoses to
oil cooler fittings. Remove hoses from oil cooler. Allow
hoses to drain into a suitable container.
5. Rotate clamps that secure oil cooler to radiator
frame.
5. Install radiator screen to machine. Lower and secure
hood.
6. Pull oil cooler from machine.
6. Check oil level in hydraulic reservoir and add correct
oil if necessary.
7. If necessary, remove hydraulic fittings, clamps and
brackets from oil cooler using Figure 104 as a guide.
Inspection
1. Backflushoilcoolerwithcleaningsolvent. Aftercool-
er is clean, make sure all solvent is drained from the
cooler.
CAUTION
Use eye protection such as goggles when using
compressed air.
2. Dry inside of oil cooler using compressed air in the
opposite direction of the oil flow.
3. Plug both ends of oil cooler. Clean exterior of cooler.
Make sure oil cooler fins are clear of dirt and debris.
4. The oil cooler should be free of corrosion, cracked
tubes and excessive pitting of tubes.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 4 -- 117
Hydraulic System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is intentionally blank.
Hydraulic System
Page 4 -- 118
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
Electrical System
Table of Contents
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Operator’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Toro Electronic Controller (TEC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
CAN--bus Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Electrical Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Diagnostic Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Retrieving Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Clearing Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Diagnostic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Verify Diagnostic Display Input Functions . . . . . 8
Verify Diagnostic Display Output Functions . . 10
TEC Controller Logic Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Starting Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
General Run and Transport Problems . . . . . . . . . 14
Cutting Deck Operating Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM QUICK CHECKS . . . . . . . 17
Battery Test (Open Circuit Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Charging System Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Glow Plug System Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Check Operation of Interlock Switches . . . . . . . . 18
ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Traction Neutral Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Parking Brake Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Mow/Transport Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
COMPONENT TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Hour Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
PTO Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Seat Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Joystick Raise and Lower Switches . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Traction Neutral Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Parking Brake Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Mow/Transport Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Start Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Main Power and Glow Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Toro Electronic Controller (TEC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Diode Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Fusible Link Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Hydraulic Solenoid Valve Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Temperature Sender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
High Temperature Shutdown Switch . . . . . . . . . . 40
Oil Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Fuel Stop Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
SERVICE AND REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Battery Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Battery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Battery Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Battery Inspection and Maintenance . . . . . . . . 45
Battery Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Battery Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Hydraulic Solenoid Valve Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 5 -- 1
Electrical System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is intentionally blank.
Electrical System
Page 5 -- 2
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General Information
Operator’s Manual
The Operator’s Manual provides information regarding
the operation, general maintenance and maintenance
intervals for your Groundsmaster 4300--D machine. Re-
fer to that publication for additional information when
servicing the machine.
Toro Electronic Controller (TEC)
Groundsmaster 4300--D machines use a Toro Electron-
ic Controller (TEC) to manage machine electrical func-
tions. The controller is a microprocessor controlled
device that senses the condition of various switches (in-
puts) and then directs electrical power to control ap-
propriate machine functions (outputs) based on the
inputs. The status of inputs to the controllers as well as
outputs from the controllers can be monitored with the
Diagnostic Display (see Special Tools in this chapter).
IMPORTANT: Before performing any welding on the
machine, disconnect both positive and negative
battery cables from the battery, disconnect the wire
harness connector from the TEC controller and dis-
connect the terminal connector from the alternator.
This will prevent damage to the electrical system of
your Groundsmaster.
CAN--bus Communications
TheTECcontrollerusedontheGroundsmaster4300--D
communicates with other electrical components on a
CAN--bus communication system. The CAN--bus sys-
tem reduces the number of electrical components and
connections used on the machine and allows the num-
ber of wires in the wire harness to be reduced.
Each of the components that is controlled by the CAN--
buslinkonlyneedsfour(4)wirestooperateandcommu-
nicate to the system: CAN--high, CAN--low, B+ (power)
and ground.
IMPORTANT: The termination resistors at the ends
of the bus cables are required for proper electrical
system operation.
CAN identifies the Controller Area Network that is used
on the Groundsmaster. Two (2) specially designed,
twisted cables form the bus. These wires provide the
data pathways between machine components. The en-
gineering term for these two (2) cables are CAN--high
and CAN--low. At the ends of the twisted pair of bus
cables are 120 ohm termination resistors.
Electrical Drawings
The electrical schematic and wire harness drawings for
Groundsmaster 4300--D machines are located in Chap-
ter 8 -- Foldout Drawings.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 5 -- 3
Electrical System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Tools
Order Special Tools from your Toro Distributor. Some
tools may be available locally.
Multimeter
The multimeter can test electrical components and cir-
cuits for current, resistance or voltage. Obtain this tool
locally.
NOTE: Toro recommends the use of a DIGITAL Volt--
Ohm--Amp multimeter when testing electrical circuits.
Thehighimpedance(internalresistance)ofadigitalme-
ter in the voltage mode will make sure that excess cur-
rent is not allowed through the meter. This excess
current could cause damage to circuits not designed to
carry it.
Figure 1
Skin--Over Grease
Special non--conductive grease which forms a light pro-
tective skin to help waterproof electrical switches and
contacts.
Toro Part Number: TOR50547
Figure 2
Battery Terminal Protector
Aerosol spray that should be used on battery terminals
to reduce corrosion problems. Apply terminal protector
after the battery cable has been secured to the battery
terminal.
Toro Part Number: 107--0392
Figure 3
Electrical System
Page 5 -- 4
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostic Display
The Diagnostic Display (Fig. 4) can be connected to the
wiring harness connector located inside the control arm
to verify correct electrical functions of the machine. TEC
controller inputs and outputs can be checked using the
Diagnostic Display.
Toro Part Number for Diagnostic Display: 85--4750
Toro Part Number for Overlay (English): 117--0171
NOTE: Diagnostic Display overlays are available in
several languages for your Groundsmaster. Refer to
your Parts Catalog for overlay language options and
part numbers.
Figure 4
IMPORTANT: The Diagnostic Display must not be
left connected to the machine. It is not designed to
withstand the environment of the machine’s every
day use. When use of Diagnostic Display is com-
pleted, disconnect it from the machine and recon-
nect loopback connector to harness connector.
Machine will not operate without loopback connec-
torinstalledonharness. StoreDiagnosticDisplayin
a dry, secure, indoor location, not on machine.
DIAGNOSTIC
DISPLAY
OVERLAY
117--0171
Figure 5
Battery Hydrometer
Use the Battery Hydrometer when measuring specific
gravity of battery electrolyte. Obtain this tool locally.
Figure 6
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 5 -- 5
Electrical System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
CAUTION
For effective troubleshooting and repairs, there must be
a good understanding of the electrical circuits and com-
ponents used on this machine (see Chapter 8 -- Foldout
Drawings). If the machine has any interlock switches
by--passed, they must be reconnected for proper trou-
bleshooting and safety.
Remove all jewelry, especially rings and
watches, before doing any electrical trouble-
shooting or testing. Disconnect the battery
cables unless the test requires battery voltage.
NOTE: Use the Diagnostic Display (see Special Tools
in this chapter) to test Toro Electronic Controller inputs
and outputs when troubleshooting an electrical problem
on your Groundsmaster.
Diagnostic Light
Groundsmaster 4300--D machines are equipped with a
diagnostic light that indicates if the machine electrical
system is functioning correctly. The diagnosticlightislo-
cated on the control panel (Fig. 7).
2
When the ignition switch is moved to the RUN position
and the machine electrical system is functioning pro-
perly, the diagnostic light will be illuminated for approxi-
mately three (3) seconds and then will turn off. The light
should remain off during normal machine operation.
1
If the machine TEC controller detects an electrical sys-
tem malfunction (fault) during machine operation, the
diagnostic light will flash rapidly. The light will stop flash-
ing and will automatically reset when the ignition switch
is turned to the OFF position. The fault, however, will be
retained in controller memory and can be retrieved at a
future time (see Retrieving Fault Codes below).
Figure 7
If the diagnostic light does not illuminate when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the RUN position, possible
causes are:
1. Control panel
2. Diagnostic light
D The loopback connector is not connected to the
machine wire harness (Fig. 8).
D The diagnostic light (or circuit wiring) is faulty.
3
2
D TEC controller fuses are faulty (see Fuses in the
Component Testing section of this chapter).
1
D The TEC controller is faulty.
Check electrical connections, controller fuses and the
diagnostic light to determine malfunction. Make sure
that the loopback connector is secured to the wire har-
ness connector.
Figure 8
1. TEC controller location
2. Loopback connector
3. Harness connector
Electrical System
Page 5 -- 6
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Retrieving Fault Codes
Faultcodesdisplayedbythediagnosticlightaretwodig-
it numbers with no digit higher than five (5). Fault codes
are listed in the chart below. There will be a one (1) sec-
ond pause between the first and second digit of a code.
Up to three (3) fault codes retained in controller memory
will be displayed by the diagnostic light in order from the
most recent fault to the oldest fault. If there are multiple
faults in controller memory, there will be a three (3) sec-
ond pause between codes. The fault codes will continu-
ally repeat after a five (5) second pause until the ignition
key is turned off.
All machine fault codes are retained in the TEC control-
ler memory. The three (3) most recent fault codes that
have occurred within the last forty (40) hours of opera-
tion can be retrieved using the diagnostic light. To re-
trieve these fault codes from the controller memory,
perform the following switch sequence:
1. Operator seat should be UNOCCUPIED, traction
pedalinneutral, parkingbrakereleasedandPTOswitch
in the OFF position.
If there are no faults that have occurred within the last
forty (40) hours of operation, the diagnostic light will
flash continuously after performing the above switch se-
quence.
2. Place mow speed limiter in the TRANSPORT posi-
tion.
3. Move and hold joystick in the RAISE position.
4. Turn ignition switch to the RUN position.
5. Monitor the diagnostic light for fault code(s).
Ifa faultcodeis notretrieved fromthe controllermemory
within forty (40) hours of machine operating time, the
fault cannot be retrieved from controller memory using
this procedure. If necessary, contact your Toro distribu-
tor to retrieve older fault codes.
NOTE: Once the diagnostic light begins to display fault
codes, the joystick can be released.
Fault Code (Lamp Flashes)
Fault Description
1 -- 1
1 -- 2
1 -- 3
1 -- 4
High engine temp warning occurred (PTO was shutdown by controller)
High engine temp shutdown occurred (engine was shutdown by controller)
Low engine oil pressure occurred
Engine alternator fault occurred
Clearing Fault Codes
2. Operator seat should remain UNOCCUPIED.
After fault codes have been retrieved, clearing of those
faults can be completed using the following switch se-
quence:
3. Move mow speed limiter to the MOW position.
4. Move joystick to the RAISE position.
5. Monitor the diagnostic light for continuous flashing
indicating that all faults have been cleared from the con-
troller memory.
1. Place machine switches in fault retrieval (see
above). The diagnostic light should be displaying the
fault codes.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 5 -- 7
Electrical System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostic Display
Groundsmaster 4300--D machines are equipped with a
TEC controller which controls machine electrical func-
tions. The controller monitors various input switches
(e.g. ignition switch, seat switch, etc.) and energizes
outputs to actuate solenoids or relays for the requested
machine function.
3
For the controller to control the machine as desired,
each of the input switches, output solenoids and relays
must be connected and functioning properly.
2
1
The Diagnostic Display (see Special Tools in this chap-
ter)isatooltohelpthetechnicianverifycorrectelectrical
functions of the machine.
Figure 9
1. TEC controller location
2. Loopback connector
3. Harness connector
IMPORTANT: The Diagnostic Display must not be
left connected to the machine. It is not designed to
withstand the environment of the machine’s every
dayuse. WhenuseoftheDiagnosticDisplayiscom-
pleted, disconnect it from the machine and recon-
nect loopback connector to harness connector. The
machine will not operate without the loopback con-
nector installed on the harness. Store the Diagnos-
tic Display in a dry, secure, indoor location, not on
machine.
1
Verify Diagnostic Display Input Functions
2
CAUTION
Figure 10
The interlock switches are for the protection of
the operator and bystanders and to ensure cor-
rect operation of the machine. Do not bypass or
disconnect switches. Check the operation of the
interlockswitchesdailyforproperoperation. Re-
place any malfunctioning switches before oper-
ating the machine.
1. Diagnostic display
2. Loopback connector
DIAGNOSTIC
DISPLAY
OVERLAY
117--0171
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower the cutting
decks, stop the engine and engage the parking brake.
2. Open control panel cover. Locate wire harness and
connectors near TEC controller. Carefully unplug loop-
back connector from harness connector (Fig. 9).
3. ConnecttheDiagnosticDisplayconnectortothehar-
ness connector (Fig. 10). Make sure correct overlay de-
cal is positioned on the Diagnostic Display (Fig. 11).
4. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position, but do
not start machine.
NOTE: The red text on the overlay decal refers to con-
troller inputs and the green text refers to controller out-
puts.
Figure 11
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Electrical System
Page 5 -- 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. The “INPUTS DISPLAYED” LED, on lower right col-
umn of the Diagnostic Display, should be illuminated. If
the green “OUTPUTS DISPLAYED” LED is illuminated,
press the toggle button on the Diagnostic Display to
change to “INPUTS DISPLAYED” LED.
ponent Testing in this chapter). Replace all defective
switches and repair any damaged wiring.
NOTE: The TEMP WARNING and ALT FAULT TEC
controller inputs can not be reliably tested by grounding
the harness leads at the engine temperature sensor or
alternator. If engine temperature is very excessive or al-
ternator is faulty, a TEC controller fault should have
been detected. Refer to Diagnostic Light in this section
for information on retrieval and clearing of TEC control-
ler faults.
6. The Diagnostic Display will illuminate the LED
associated with each of the inputs when that input is in
the position identified on the Diagnostic Display overlay.
Individually, change the position of each of the inputs
(i.e. sit on seat, press traction pedal, etc.), and note that
the appropriate LED on the Diagnostic Display toggles
onandoffwhentheinputstateischanged(seechartbe-
low). Repeat for all inputs that can be changed by hand.
NOTE: When the ignition switch is in the OFF position,
all Diagnostic Display LED’s should be OFF.
8. After input function testing is completed, disconnect
the Diagnostic Display from wire harness. Plug loop-
back connector into harness connector. Install control
panel cover.
7. If appropriate LED does not toggle on and off when
input state is changed, check all wiring and connections
to the switch for that input and/or test switch (see Com-
Diagnostic Display
TEC Controller Inputs
Diagnostic Display
LED Operation
PARKING BRAKE OFF
TRACTION NEUTRAL
SEAT SWITCH
Parking brake released: LED ON
Parking brake applied: LED OFF
Traction pedal in neutral: LED ON
Traction pedal in forward or reverse: LED OFF
Seat occupied: LED ON
Seat NOT occupied: LED OFF
TRANSPORT OFF
JOYSTICK RAISE
JOYSTICK LOWER
PTO ENABLE
Mow speed limiter in MOW: LED ON
Mow speed limiter in TRANSPORT: LED OFF
Joystick moved rearward: LED ON
Joystick in neutral: LED OFF
Joystick moved forward: LED ON
Joystick in neutral: LED OFF
PTO switch ON: LED ON
PTO switch OFF: LED OFF
OIL PRES LOW
TEMP WARNING
TEMP SHUTDOWN
ALT FAULT
Engine not running OR low engine oil pressure: LED ON
Engine oil pressure OK: LED OFF
Excessive engine temperature: LED ON
Normal engine temperature: LED OFF
Very excessive engine temperature: LED ON
Normal engine temperature: LED OFF
Engine not running or alternator faulty: LED ON
Alternator OK: LED OFF
KEY START
Ignition switch in START: LED ON
Ignition switch in RUN: LED OFF
(NOTE: Turn PTO switch ON so en-
gine will not start when turning ignition
switch to START)
KEY RUN
Ignition switch in RUN or START: LED ON
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 5 -- 9
Electrical System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Verify Diagnostic Display Output Functions
B. If the output LED’s are on as specified, but the
machine does not function properly, consider that
the controller is operating correctly and a problem
exists with some other component. Inspect electrical
components and circuit for the affected function.
Also, suspect a non-electrical problem (e.g. hydrau-
lic component problem). Repair as necessary.
The Diagnostic Display also has the ability to detect
which output solenoids or relays are turned on by the
TEC controller. This is a quick way to determine if a ma-
chine malfunction is electrical or hydraulic.
NOTE: Anopenoutput(e.g.anunpluggedconnectoror
a broken wire) cannot be detected with the Diagnostic
Display.
C. If each input switch is in the correct position and
functioning correctly, but the output LED’s are not
correctly illuminated, this indicates a controller prob-
lem. If this occurs, contact your Toro Distributor for
assistance.
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower the cutting
decks, stop the engine and engage the parking brake.
2. Open control panel cover. Locate wire harness and
connectors near TEC controller. Carefully unplug loop-
back connector from harness connector (Fig. 12).
7. After output function testing is completed, discon-
nect the Diagnostic Display from wire harness. Plug
loopback connector into harness connector. Install con-
trol panel cover.
3. ConnecttheDiagnosticDisplayconnectortothehar-
nessconnector.Makesurecorrectoverlaydecalisposi-
tioned on the Diagnostic Display (Fig. 13).
4. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position.
NOTE: The red text on the overlay decal refers to con-
troller inputs and the green text refers to controller out-
puts.
3
2
5. The green “OUTPUTS DISPLAYED” LED, on lower
right column of the Diagnostic Display, should be illumi-
nated. If “INPUTS DISPLAYED” LED is illuminated,
press the toggle button on the Diagnostic Display to
change the LED to “OUTPUTS DISPLAYED”.
1
Figure 12
1. TEC controller location
2. Loopback connector
3. Harness connector
NOTE: It may be necessary to toggle between “IN-
PUTS DISPLAYED” and “OUTPUTS DISPLAYED” sev-
eral times to perform the following step. To change from
inputs to outputs, press toggle button once. This may be
done as often as required. Do not press and hold
toggle button.
DIAGNOSTIC
DISPLAY
OVERLAY
117--0171
6. Sit on seat, start engine and attempt to operate the
desired function of the machine. The appropriate output
LED’s should illuminate on the Diagnostic Display to in-
dicate that the TEC controller is turning on that function.
NOTE: If the “DIAG. LAMP” output LED is blinking, this
indicates that the TEC controller has detected a fault
during machine operation. Refer to Diagnostic Light in
this section for information on retrieval and clearing of
controller faults.
A. IfthecorrectoutputLED’sdonotilluminate, verify
that the required input switches are in the necessary
positions to allow that function to occur (see TEC
Controller Logic Chart in this section). Verify correct
switch function.
Figure 13
Electrical System
Page 5 -- 10
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TEC Controller Logic Chart
Each line of the following chart identifies the necessary
component position (INPUTS) in order for the TEC con-
troller to energize the appropriate OUTPUTS for ma-
chine operation.
Example: To start the engine with no operator in the
seat, when the ignition key is in start, the traction pedal
is in neutral and the parking brake is applied, the glow
plugs and other necessary engine starting components
will be energized.
KEY TO CHART
X
Component (Input) Position
Not Relevent for Function
P
Component (Output) Energized
MACHINE FUNCTION
Preheat
X
P
Start (No Operator in Seat)
Start (Operator in Seat)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
P
P
P
P
X
X
Run (No Operator in Seat)
Run (Operator in Seat)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
Lower Cutting Units to Ground
X
X
X
X
X
X
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
P
P
P
P
Mow (C.U. on Ground)
Raise (from Mow to Turn Around Position)
Lower/Mow (from Turn Around Position)
Raise (to Transport Position)
X
X
P
Diagnostic Light Fault Retrieval
X
X
X
X
X
Clearing Faults (From Retrieval Mode)
X
NOTE: ForStartmachinefunction, thejoystickmustbe
in the neutral (center) position and the PTO switch must
be OFF.
NOTE: The Diagnostic Light Fault Retrieval ma-
chine function requires that the seat be unoccupied, the
mow speed limiter be in the TRANSPORT position, the
PTO switch be OFF and the cutting decks be in the low-
ered, mow position.
NOTE: When the Lower/Mow machine function is
completed, the front cutting decks engage while lower-
ing to the ground followed shortly by the rear cutting
decksengagingwhileloweringtotheground.Thetiming
of this sequence is provided by the TEC controller.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 5 -- 11
Electrical System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting Problems
Problem
Possible Causes
No electrical power to machine (including gauges).
Battery is discharged.
Ignition switch or circuit wiring is faulty.
Fusible link harness at the engine starter motor is
faulty.
Battery cables are loose or corroded.
Fuse F1--1 (15 amp) or F1--2 (10 amp) is faulty.
Battery is discharged.
Starter solenoid clicks, but starter will not crank.
NOTE: If the starter solenoid clicks, the problem is not
in the interlock circuit.
Battery cables are loose or corroded.
Ground cable is loose or corroded.
Wiring at the starter motor is faulty.
Starter solenoid or starter motor is faulty.
Engine starts, but stops when the ignition switch is
released from the START position.
Engine fuel stop solenoid or circuit wiring is faulty (pull
coil operates but hold coil is faulty).
Engine cranks, but does not start.
Engine and/or fuel may be too cold.
Fuel tank is empty.
Glow plugs or circuit wiring are faulty.
Engine fuel stop solenoid or circuit wiring is faulty.
Engine or fuel system is malfunctioning (see Chapter 3
- Kubota Diesel Engine).
Hydraulic load is slowing engine cranking speed
(disconnect hydraulic pump drive shaft from engine to
test).
Electrical System
Page 5 -- 12
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting Problems (Continued)
Problem
Possible Causes
Engine cranks, but should not, when the traction pedal Traction neutral switch is out of adjustment.
is depressed.
Traction neutral switch or circuit wiring is faulty.
Nothing happens when start attempt is made. Control
panel lights and gauges operate with the ignition
switch in RUN.
Traction pedal is not in neutral position.
Operator seat is unoccupied OR the parking brake is
not applied.
Cutting decks are engaged (PTO switch is ON).
Traction neutral switch is out of adjustment.
Traction neutral switch or circuit wiring is faulty.
Seat switch or circuit wiring is faulty.
Parking brake switch or circuit wiring is faulty.
Joystick switch (raise or lower position) is faulty.
Ignition switch or circuit wiring is faulty.
Start relay or circuit wiring is faulty.
Main power relay or circuit wiring is faulty (headlights
and powerpoint inoperative as well).
TEC controller fuses are faulty.
Fusible link harness at the engine starter motor is
faulty.
Wiring to start circuit components is loose, corroded or
damaged (see Electrical Schematic and Circuit
Drawings in Chapter 8 -- Foldout Drawings).
High temperature shutdown switch or circuit wiring is
faulty.
Starter solenoid or starter motor is faulty.
TEC controller is faulty.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 5 -- 13
Electrical System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General Run and Transport Problems
Problem
Possible Causes
Engine continues to run, but should not, when the
ignition switch is turned off.
Engine fuel stop solenoid is faulty.
Ignition switch or circuit wiring is faulty.
Main power relay or circuit wiring is faulty.
Seat switch or circuit wiring is faulty.
Traction neutral switch is out of adjustment.
Traction neutral switch or circuit wiring is faulty.
TEC controller is faulty.
Engine continues to run, but should not, when the
traction pedal is engaged with no operator in the seat.
The engine stops during operation, but is able to
restart.
Parking brake is engaged.
Operator is raising from the seat (seat switch not fully
depressed).
NOTE: Excessive coolant temperature will cause the
cutting decks to be disengaged and can lead to engine
shutdown. If excessive coolant temperature causes en-
gine shutdown, the operator can restart the engine to al-
low the machine to be moved a short distance. After a re-
startin this condition, the engine will run for approximate-
ly ten (10) seconds before the engine shuts down again.
Seat switch or circuit wiring is faulty.
Ignition switch or circuit wiring is faulty.
The engine kills when the traction pedal is depressed. Parking brake is engaged.
Operator is not fully depressing the seat switch.
Seat switch or circuit wiring is faulty.
TEC controller fuses are faulty.
TEC controller is faulty.
Battery does not charge.
Wiring to charging circuit components is loose,
corroded or damaged (see Electrical Schematic and
Circuit Drawings in Chapter 8 -- Foldout Drawings).
Alternator belt is loose or damaged.
Battery cables are loose or corroded.
Fusible link harness at the engine starter motor is
faulty.
Alternator is faulty.
Battery is faulty.
Electrical System
Page 5 -- 14
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cutting Deck Operating Problems
Problem
Possible Causes
The cutting decks remain engaged, but should not,
with no operator in the seat.
Seat switch or circuit wiring is faulty.
TEC controller is faulty.
Cutting decks run, but should not, when raised. Cutting A hydraulic problem in cutting deck circuit exists (see
decks shut off with PTO switch.
Troubleshooting section of Chapter 4 - Hydraulic
System).
TEC controller is faulty.
Cutting decks run, but should not, when raised. Cutting PTO switch or circuit wiring is faulty.
decks do not shut off with PTO switch.
A hydraulic problem in cutting deck circuit exists (see
Troubleshooting section of Chapter 4 - Hydraulic
System).
TEC controller is faulty.
None of the cutting decks operate. Cutting decks are
able to raise and lower.
PTO switch is in the OFF position.
High coolant temperature has disabled cutting decks.
Seat switch or circuit wiring is faulty.
PTO switch or circuit wiring is faulty.
Mow/transport switch or circuit wiring is faulty.
Temperature sender or circuit wiring is faulty.
NOTE: For cutting deck operation, operator seat needs
to be occupied, mow speed limiter needs to be in mow
position, decks need to be fully lowered and PTO switch
needs to be engaged.
Circuit wiring to deck control manifold solenoids may
be faulty.
A hydraulic problem in cutting deck circuit exists (see
Troubleshooting section of Chapter 4 - Hydraulic
System).
TEC controller is faulty.
Cutting decks run, but should not, when lowered with
joystick and PTO switch in the OFF position.
The PTO switch or circuit wiring is faulty.
TEC controller is faulty.
The front cutting decks do not operate. Rear cutting
decks operate. Cutting decks are able to raise and
lower.
Deck control manifold PRV2 solenoid coil or circuit
wiring is faulty.
A hydraulic problem in front mow circuit exists (see
Troubleshooting section of Chapter 4 - Hydraulic
System).
TEC controller is faulty.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 5 -- 15
Electrical System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cutting Deck Operating Problems (Continued)
Problem
Possible Causes
The rear cutting decks do not operate. Front cutting
decks operate. Cutting decks are able to raise and
lower.
Deck control manifold PRV1 solenoid coil or circuit
wiring is faulty.
A hydraulic problem in rear mow circuit exists (see
Troubleshooting section of Chapter 4 - Hydraulic
System).
TEC controller is faulty.
None of the cutting decks will lower.
Mow speed limiter is in the transport position.
Lower/mow switch on joystick or circuit wiring is faulty.
Mow/transport switch or circuit wiring is faulty.
Lift control manifold PRV solenoid coil or circuit wiring
is faulty.
Lift control manifold S1 solenoid coil or circuit wiring is
faulty.
A hydraulic problem in cutting deck lift/lower circuit
exists (see Troubleshooting section of Chapter 4 -
Hydraulic System).
TEC controller is faulty.
None of the cutting decks will raise.
Raise switch on joystick or circuit wiring is faulty.
Lift control manifold PRV solenoid coil or circuit wiring
is faulty.
Lift control manifold S2 solenoid coil or circuit wiring is
faulty.
A hydraulic problem in cutting deck lift/lower circuit
exists (see Troubleshooting section of Chapter 4 -
Hydraulic System).
TEC controller is faulty.
One cutting deck will not raise or lower, but all other
cutting decks will raise and lower.
A hydraulic problem in cutting deck lift/lower circuit
exists (see Troubleshooting section of Chapter 4 -
Hydraulic System).
Electrical System
Page 5 -- 16
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electrical System Quick Checks
Battery Test (Open Circuit Test)
Use a digital multimeter to measure the battery voltage.
Voltage Measured
12.68 volts
Battery Charge Level
Fully charged (100%)
75% charged
Set the multimeter to the DC volts setting. The battery
should be at a temperature of 60o to 100oF (16o to
38oC). The ignition switch should be in the OFF position
and all accessories turned off. Connect the positive (+)
multimeter lead to the positive battery post and the neg-
ative (--) multimeter lead to the negative battery post.
Record the battery voltage.
12.45 volts
12.24 volts
50% charged
12.06 volts
25% charged
11.89 volts
0% charged
NOTE: This testprovides a relative condition ofthebat-
tery. Load testing of the battery will provide additional
and more accurate information (see Battery Service in
the Service and Repairs section).
Charging System Test
This is a simple test used to determine if a charging sys-
tem is functioning. It will tell you if the charging system
has an output, but not its capacity.
Start the engine and run at high idle (3200 RPM). Allow
the battery to charge for at least three (3) minutes. Re-
cord the battery voltage.
Use a digital multimeter set to DC volts. Connect the
positive (+) multimeter lead to the positive battery post
and the negative (--) multimeter lead to the negative bat-
tery post. Keep the test leads connected to the battery
posts and record the battery voltage.
After running the engine for at least three (3) minutes,
battery voltage should be at least 0.50 volt higher than
initial battery voltage.
An example of a charging system that is functioning:
NOTE: Upon starting the engine, the battery voltage
will drop and then should increase once the engine is
running.
At least 0.50 volt over initial battery voltage.
Initial Battery Voltage
= 12.30 v
= 12.85 v
= +0.55 v
Battery Voltage after 3 Minute Charge
Difference
NOTE: Depending upon the condition of the battery
charge and battery temperature, the battery voltage will
increase at different rates as the battery charges.
Glow Plug System Test
This is a fast, simple test that can help to determine the
integrity and operation of your Groundsmaster glow
plug system. The test should be run anytime hard start-
ing (cold engine) is encountered on a diesel engine
equipped with a glow plug system.
ammeter pickup around the main glow plug power sup-
ply wire and read the meter prior to activating the glow
plug system. Adjust the meter to read zero (if applica-
ble). Activate the glow plug system by turning the igni-
tion switch to RUN and record the multimeter results.
Use a digital multimeter and/or inductive Ammeter (AC/
DCCurrentTransducer). Properlyconnecttheammeter
to the digital multimeter (refer to manufacturers’ instruc-
tions) and set the multimeter to the correct scale. With
the ignition switch in the OFF position, place the
The Groundsmaster 4300--D glow plug system should
have a reading of approximately 36 amps total (9 amps
per glow plug). If low current reading is observed, one
(or more) glow plugs is faulty.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 5 -- 17
Electrical System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Check Operation of Interlock Switches
The interlock system used on your Groundsmaster in-
cludes the seat switch, the traction neutral switch, the
parking brake switch, the mow/transport switch and the
PTOswitch. Testingofindividualinterlockswitchesisin-
cluded in the Component Testing section of this Chap-
ter.
CAUTION
The interlock switches are for the protection of
the operator and bystanders and to ensure cor-
rect operation of the machine. Do not bypass or
disconnect switches. Check the operation of the
interlockswitchesdailyforproperoperation. Re-
place any malfunctioning switches before oper-
ating the machine.
NOTE: Use the Diagnostic Display (see Special Tools
in this chapter) to test TEC controller inputs and outputs
before further troubleshooting of an electrical problem
on your Groundsmaster.
Interlock switch operation is described in the Traction
Unit Operator’s Manual. Your Groundsmaster is
equipped with a TEC controller which monitors interlock
switch operation. Information on the controller is de-
scribedintheTractionUnitOperator’sManualandinthe
Component Testing section of this Chapter.
Electrical System
Page 5 -- 18
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustments
Traction Neutral Switch
The traction neutral switch is a normally open proximity
switch that closes when the traction pedal is in the neu-
tral position. The switch mounts to a bracket on the trac-
tion pump (Fig. 14). The sensing plate for the traction
neutralswitchisthetractionleverbracketthatissecured
to the pump control arm.
3
FRONT
5
6
4
Adjustment
1. Before adjusting the traction neutral switch, check
andadjusttractionsystemneutralposition(seeTraction
Unit Operator’s Manual).
2
IMPORTANT: To prevent traction neutral switch
damage, make sure that traction lever bracket does
not contact switch.
6
1
5
2. When the traction lever is in the neutral position, the
gap between the head of neutral switch and the traction
lever bracket should be from 0.070” to 0.100” (1.8 to 2.5
mm) (Fig. 15).
Figure 14
1. Traction pump
4. Pump control arm
5. Jam nut (2 used)
6. Lock washer (2 used)
2. Traction neutral switch
3. Traction lever bracket
3. If gap is incorrect, loosen jam nuts that secure neu-
tral switch to pump bracket. Position switch with jam
nuts to allow correct gap between switch and traction le-
ver bracket. Jam nuts should be torqued from 162 to
198 in--lb (18.4 to 22.4 N--m). After jam nuts are tight-
ened, make sure that clearance between head of neu-
tral switch and traction lever bracket has not changed.
1
4. After adjustment to the traction neutral switch, use
the Diagnostic Display (see Special Tools in this chap-
ter) to verify that traction neutral switch and circuitwiring
are functioning correctly (see Traction Neutral Switch in
the Component Testing section of this chapter).
2
3
0.070” to 0.100”
(1.8 to 2.5 mm)
Figure 15
1. Traction pump
3. Traction neutral switch
2. Traction lever bracket
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 5 -- 19
Electrical System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Brake Switch
The parking brake switch is a normally open proximity
switch. The parking brake switch is attached to the bot-
tom of the brake pedal (Fig. 16).
Whentheparkingbrakeisnotapplied,theparkingbrake
detent is positioned near the target end of the parking
brake switch so the switch is closed. The parking brake
detent is moved away from the switch when the parking
brake is applied causing the switch to open.
5
Adjustment
1. When the parking brake is not applied, the gap be-
tween the parking brake switch and the tab on the park-
ing brake detent should be from 0.070” to 0.100” (1.8 to
2.5 mm).
3
2
4
2. If gap is incorrect, loosen jam nuts that secures
switch to brake lever. Position switch with jam nuts to al-
low correct gap between switch and detent tab. Tighten
jam nuts to secure adjustment. Jam nuts should be
torqued from 162 to 198 in--lb (18.4 to 22.4 N--m). After
jam nuts are tightened, make sure that clearance be-
tween head of parking brake switch and tab on the park-
ing brake detent has not changed.
2
3
1
Figure 16
3. After adjustment to the parking brake switch, use the
Diagnostic Display (see Special Tools in this chapter) to
verify that parking brake switch and circuit wiring are
functioning correctly (see Parking Brake Switch in the
Component Testing section of this chapter).
1. Parking brake switch
2. Lock washer (2 used)
3. Jam nut (2 used)
4. Parking brake detent
5. Brake pedal
Electrical System
Page 5 -- 20
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mow/Transport Switch
Themow/transportswitchisanormally closedproximity
switch that opens when the mow speed limiter is placed
in the transport position. The switch mounts to a bracket
on the footrest platform (Fig. 17). The sensing plate for
the mow/transport switch is a tab on the mow speed lim-
iter.
3
2
Adjustment
1. The gap between the mow/transport switch and the
mow speed limiter should be from 0.070” to 0.100” (1.8
to 2.5 mm).
2. If gap is incorrect, loosen jam nuts that secure switch
to footrest platform. Position switch with jam nuts to al-
low correct gap between switch and mow speed limiter.
Tighten jam nuts to secure adjustment. Jam nuts should
be torqued from 162 to 198 in--lb (18.4 to 22.4 N--m).
After jam nuts are tightened, make sure that clearance
between head of mow/transport switch and the mow
speed limiter has not changed.
1
Figure 17
1. Mow speed limiter
2. Mow/transport switch
3. Gap
3. After adjustment to the mow/transport switch, use
the Diagnostic Display (see Special Tools in this chap-
ter) to verify that mow/transport switch and circuit wiring
are functioning correctly (see Mow/Transport Switch in
the Component Testing section of this chapter).
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 5 -- 21
Electrical System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Component Testing
For accurate resistance and/or continuity checks, elec-
trically disconnect the component being tested from the
circuit (e.g. unplug the ignition switch connector before
doing a continuity check of the switch).
NOTE: For engine component testing information, see
the Kubota Workshop Manual, Diesel Engine, 05--E3B
Series at the end of Chapter 3 -- Kubota Diesel Engine.
NOTE: Electrical troubleshooting of any 12 volt power
connectioncanbeperformedthroughvoltagedroptests
without disconnecting the component.
CAUTION
When testing electrical components for continu-
ity with a multimeter (ohms setting), make sure
that power to the circuit has been disconnected.
NOTE: Use the Diagnostic Display (see Special Tools
in this chapter) to test TEC controller inputs and outputs
before further troubleshooting of an electrical problem
on your Groundsmaster.
Ignition Switch
The ignition (key) switch has three positions (OFF, RUN
and START). The switch is mounted on the control con-
sole.
5. If switch tests correctly and circuit problem still ex-
ists, check wire harness (see Electrical Schematic and
Circuit Drawings in Chapter 8 -- Foldout Drawings).
Testing
6. Connect wire harness electrical connector to the
ignition switch.
1. Before disconnecting the ignition switch for testing,
the switch and its circuit wiring should be tested as a
TEC controller input with the Diagnostic Display (see
DiagnosticDisplayintheTroubleshootingsectionofthis
chapter). If the Diagnostic Display verifies that ignition
switch andcircuitwiringare functioningcorrectly, nofur-
ther switch testing is necessary. If, however, the Diag-
nostic Display determines that ignition switch and circuit
wiring are not functioning correctly, proceed with test
procedure.
7. Install control arm cover to machine (see Control
Arm Assembly in the Service and Repairs section of
Chapter 6 -- Chassis).
RUN
o
o
45
45
OFF
START
F
A
2. Remove outside control arm cover to gain access to
ignitionswitch(seeControlArmDisassemblyintheSer-
vice and Repairs section of Chapter 6 -- Chassis). Dis-
connect wire harness electrical connector from the
switch.
E
B
D
C
REAR VIEW
FRONT VIEW
Figure 18
3. With the use of a multimeter (ohms setting), the
switch functions may be tested to determine whether
continuity exists between the various terminals for each
switch position. The ignition switch terminals are
marked as shown in Figure 18. The circuitry of this
switch is shown in the chart below. Verify continuity be-
tween switch terminals.
POSITION
OFF
CIRCUIT
NONE
RUN
B + C + F, D + E
A + B + C
START
4. Replace ignition switch if necessary.
Electrical System
Page 5 -- 22
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indicator Lights
Glow Plug Indicator Light
3. Apply 12 VDC to terminals 1A and 2A (Fig. 20).
4. Ground terminals 1B and 2B (Fig. 20).
5. Both indicator lights should illuminate.
The glow plug indicator light should come on when the
ignitionswitchisplacedintheRUNpositionpriortoplac-
ing the ignition switch in START. The light should stay lit
for approximately six (6) seconds while the ignition
switch is left in the RUN position. The indicator light
should also be illuminated when the ignition switch is in
the START position.
6. Connect wire harness electrical connector to the in-
dicator light.
7. Install control arm cover to machine (see Control
Arm Assembly in the Service and Repairs section of
Chapter 6 -- Chassis).
High Temperature Warning Light
If the engine coolant temperature reaches 221oF
(105oC) (approximate), the high temperature warning
light should come on.
2
3
NOTE: When machine is in mow operation, high cool-
ant temperature will cause the cutting decks to shut off
in addition to warning light illumination.
1
4
Engine Oil Pressure Light
Figure 19
The engine oil pressure light should come on when the
ignition switch is in the RUN position with the engine not
running. Also, it should illuminate with the engine run-
ning if the engine oil pressure drops to an unsafe level.
1. Glow plug indicator
2. High temp warning
3. Engine oil pressure
4. Charge indicator
5
6
Totesttheoilpressurelightandcircuitwiring,groundthe
wire attached to oil pressure switch located on the en-
gine near the oil filter. Turn ignition switch to the RUN
position;theengineoilpressurelightshouldcome onin-
dicating correct operation of the indicator light and cir-
cuit wiring.
2
1
3
Charge Indicator Light
4
Thechargeindicatorlightshouldcomeonwhentheigni-
tionswitchisintheRUNpositionwiththeenginenotrun-
ning. Also, it should illuminate with an improperly
operating charging circuit while the engine is running.
1B (--)
2B (--)
1A (+)
2A (+)
Testing Indicator Lights
If testing of the indicator lights is necessary:
1. Remove control arm covers to gain access to indica-
tor light and harness connectors (see Control Arm Dis-
assembly in the Service and Repairs section of Chapter
6 -- Chassis).
Figure 20
1. Glow plug indicator
2. High temp warning
3. Engine oil pressure
4. Charge indicator
5. Indicator light front
6. Indicator light back
2. Locate the indicator light to be tested and disconnect
the wire harness electrical connector from the light.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 5 -- 23
Electrical System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hour Meter
The hour meter is located on the outside of the control
arm.
Hobbs
1. Remove control arm covers to gain access to hour
meter and meter terminals (see Control Arm Disassem-
bly in the Service and Repairs section of Chapter 6 --
Chassis).
QUARTZ
1
10
0 0 0 0 1
HOURS
2. Make sure ignition switch is in the OFF position. Lo-
cate the hour meter and disconnect the wire harness
electrical connector from the meter.
+
3. Connect the positive (+) terminal of a 12 VDC source
to the positive (+) terminal of the hour meter.
BACK
4. Connect the negative (--) terminal of the voltage
source to the other terminal of the hour meter.
Figure 21
5. The hour meter should move 1/10 of an hour every
six (6) minutes.
6. Disconnect the voltage source from the hour meter.
7. Replace the hour meter if necessary.
8. Connect wire harness electrical connector to the
hour meter.
9. Install control arm covers to machine (see Control
Arm Assembly in the Service and Repairs section of
Chapter 6 -- Chassis).
Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge on the control panel indicates
engine coolant temperature level during machine op-
eration.Thechangingresistanceoftheenginetempera-
ture sender signals the temperature gauge.
2
The temperature gauge should display the first green
segment when the ignition switch is turned to RUN. The
first yellow segment on the gauge should display when
engine coolant temperature is approximately 212oF
(100oC).
1
Whenenginecoolanttemperaturerisestoapproximate-
ly221oF(105oC), thetemperaturegaugeshoulddisplay
the first red segment. At this point, the temperature
gauge provides an input to the TEC controller. This con-
troller input causes the high temperature warning light
on the control panel to illuminate and the cutting decks
to shut down.
Figure 22
1. Control panel
2. Temperature gauge
Electrical System
Page 5 -- 24
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PTO Switch
The PTO switch is mounted on the control panel and al-
lows the cutting decks to operate when the front of the
switch is depressed. An indicator light on the switch
identifies when the PTO switch is engaged.
7. Connect wire harness electrical connector to the
PTO switch.
8. Install control arm cover to machine (see Control
Arm Assembly in the Service and Repairs section of
Chapter 6 -- Chassis).
The TEC controller monitors the position of the PTO
switch (up or down). Using inputs from the PTO switch
andotherswitchesinthe interlocksystem, thecontroller
controls the energizing of the hydraulic solenoid valves
used to drive the cutting deck motors.
NOTE: To engage the PTO, the seat has to be occu-
pied, the mow speed limiter has to be in the mow posi-
tion and the cutting decks have to be fully lowered.
Testing
1
1. Before disconnecting the PTO switch for testing, the
switch and its circuit wiring should be tested as a TEC
controller input with the Diagnostic Display (see Diag-
nostic Display in the Troubleshooting section of this
chapter). If the Diagnostic Display verifies that the PTO
switch andcircuitwiringare functioningcorrectly, nofur-
ther switch testing is necessary. If, however, the Diag-
nostic Display determines that the PTO switch and
circuit wiring are not functioning correctly, proceed with
test procedure.
2. Remove control arm covers to gain access to PTO
switch(seeControlArmDisassemblyinthe Serviceand
Repairs section of Chapter 6 -- Chassis).
Figure 23
1. PTO switch
3. Make sure ignition switch is in the OFF position. Dis-
connect wire harness electrical connector from the PTO
switch.
4. With the use of a multimeter (ohms setting), the
switch functions may be tested to determine whether
continuity exists between the various terminals for each
switch position. The PTO switch terminals are marked
as shown in Figure 24. The circuitry of this switch is
shown in the chart below. Verify continuity between
switch terminals.
BACK OF SWITCH
Figure 24
SWITCH
NORMAL
OTHER
CIRCUITS
POSITION
CIRCUITS
ON
2 + 3
2 + 1
5 + 6
5 + 4
NOTE: PTO switch terminals 7 and 8 are for the switch
indicator light. Switch terminals 1, 4, 5 and 6 are not
used on Groundsmaster 4300--D machines.
OFF
5. Replace PTO switch if necessary.
6. If PTO switch tests correctly and circuit problem still
exists, check wire harness (see Electrical Schematic
and Circuit Drawings in Chapter 8 -- Foldout Drawings).
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 5 -- 25
Electrical System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the operator side of
the control arm. This rocker switch allows the headlights
to be turned on and off.
Testing
1. Remove inside control arm cover to gain access to
headlight switch (see Control Arm Disassembly in the
Service and Repairs section of Chapter 6 -- Chassis).
1
2. Make sure ignition switch is in the OFF position. Dis-
connect wire harness electrical connector from the
headlight switch.
3. With the use of a multimeter (ohms setting), the
switch functions may be tested to determine whether
continuity exists between the various terminals for each
position. The switch terminals are marked as shown in
Figure 26. The circuitry of the headlight switch is shown
in the chart below. Verify continuity between switch ter-
minals.
Figure 25
1. Headlight switch
SWITCH
POSITION
NORMAL
CIRCUITS
OTHER
CIRCUITS
ON
2 + 3
2 + 1
5 + 6
5 + 4
OFF
BACK OF SWITCH
Figure 26
4. Replace headlight switch if necessary. Connect wire
harness electrical connector to the headlight switch.
5. Install control arm cover to machine (see Control
Arm Assembly in the Service and Repairs section of
Chapter 6 -- Chassis).
NOTE: Headlight switch terminals 3, 4, 5 and 6 are not
used on Groundsmaster 4300--D machines.
Electrical System
Page 5 -- 26
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seat Switch
The seat switch is normally open and closes when the
operator seat is occupied. This switch is used as an in-
put for the TEC controller. If the traction system or PTO
switch is engaged when the operator raises out of the
seat, the engine will stop. The seat switch is located di-
rectly under the operator seat.
1
Testing
1. Before disconnecting the seat switch for testing, the
switch and its circuit wiring should be tested as a TEC
controller input with the Diagnostic Display (see Diag-
nostic Display in the Troubleshooting section of this
chapter). If the Diagnostic Display verifies that the seat
switch andcircuitwiringare functioningcorrectly, nofur-
ther switch testing is necessary. If, however, the Diag-
nostic Display determines that the seat switch and
circuit wiring are not functioning correctly, proceed with
test procedure.
2
Figure 27
1. Seat switch lead
2. Electrical connector
2. Make sure ignition switch is in the OFF position.
3. Disconnect wire harness electrical connector from
the seat switch electrical lead near the operator manual
tube under the operator seat (Fig. 27).
4
4. Check the continuity of the switch by connecting a
multimeter (ohms setting) across the switch connector
terminals.
1
2
5. With no pressure on the seat, there should be no
continuity (open) between the seat switch terminals.
3
6. Press directly onto the seat switch through the seat
cushion. There should be continuity (closed) as the seat
cushion approaches the bottom of its travel.
7. If seat switch is faulty, replace switch (see Operator
Seat Removal in the Service and Repairs section of
Chapter 6 -- Chassis).
Figure 28
8. If the seatswitch tests correctly and a circuitproblem
still exists, check wire harness (see Electrical Schemat-
ic and Circuit Drawings in Chapter 8 -- Foldout Draw-
ings).
1. Operator seat
2. Seat switch
3. Screw (2 used)
4. Seat wire harness
9. Connect wire harness electrical connector to the
seat switch electrical lead.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 5 -- 27
Electrical System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Joystick Raise and Lower Switches
Two(2)microswitchesforthejoystickarelocatedonthe
lift control that is attached to the control arm. The rear
switch on the control is used to lower (and engage) the
cutting decks and the front switch to raise (and disen-
gage) them. These switches are used as inputs for the
TEC controller. A normally open contact in the switch
closes when the joystick is positioned to either lower or
raise the cutting decks. Each switch has an electrical
connector to make sure the normally closed contact on
the switch is not used. The raise switch has yellow/blue
and black harness wires connected to it and the lower
switch has orange and black harness wires connected
to it.
8. If joystick switch is faulty, replace switch.
9. Ifthejoystickswitchtestscorrectlyandacircuitprob-
lem still exists, check wire harness (see Electrical Sche-
matic and Circuit Drawings in Chapter 8 -- Foldout
Drawings).
10.Connect wire harness electrical connector to the
joystick switch.
11.Install control arm covers to machine (see Control
Arm Assembly in the Service and Repairs section of
Chapter 6 -- Chassis).
Testing
1. Before disconnecting the joystick switches for test-
ing, theswitchesand theircircuitwiringshould betested
as TEC controller inputs with the Diagnostic Display
(see Diagnostic Display in the Troubleshooting section
ofthis chapter). IftheDiagnostic Displayverifies thatthe
joystick switches and circuit wiring are functioning cor-
rectly, nofurtherswitchtestingisnecessary. If, however,
the Diagnostic Display determines that either joystick
switch and circuit wiring are not functioning correctly,
proceed with test procedure.
1
FRONT
3
2
2. Remove control arm covers to gain access to joys-
tick switches (see Control Arm Disassembly in the Ser-
vice and Repairs section of Chapter 6 -- Chassis).
Figure 29
1. Joystick
2. Lower switch
3. Raise switch
3. Make sure ignition switch is in the OFF position.
4. Disconnect wire harness electrical connector from
the raise or lower switch that is to be tested (Fig. 29).
1
3
5. Connect a multimeter (ohms setting) across the nor-
mally open (NO) and common terminals of the switch
(Fig. 30).
6. With the joystick in the neutral (center) position,
there should be no continuity (open) across the switch
terminals.
2
4
7. Move and hold the joystick to activate the switch be-
ing tested. There should be continuity (closed) across
the switch terminals.
Figure 30
1. NO terminal
2. Common terminal
3. NC terminal (not used)
4. Switch lever
Electrical System
Page 5 -- 28
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Traction Neutral Switch
The traction neutral switch is a normally open proximity
switch that closes when the traction pedal is in the neu-
tral position. The switch mounts to a bracket on the trac-
tion pump (Fig. 31). The sensing plate for the traction
neutralswitchisthetractionleverbracketthatissecured
to the pump control arm. The neutral switch is used as
an input for the TEC controller.
D. Turn ignition switch to the ON position (do not
start engine) and verify with a multimeter that ma-
chine wire harness connector terminal for pink wire
has system voltage (12 VDC) present.
E. If black wire is closed to ground, pink wire has
system voltage present and switch LED did not func-
tion, replace traction neutral switch. Adjust switch af-
ter installation (see Traction Neutral Switch in the
Adjustments section of this chapter).
Testing
1. Before disconnecting the traction neutral switch for
testing, the switch and its circuit wiring should be tested
as a TEC controller input with the Diagnostic Display
(see Diagnostic Display in the Troubleshooting section
ofthis chapter). IftheDiagnostic Displayverifies thatthe
traction neutral switch and circuit wiring are functioning
correctly, no further switch testing is necessary. If, how-
ever, theDiagnosticDisplay determinesthatthetraction
neutral switch and circuit wiring are not functioning cor-
rectly, proceed with testing procedure.
5. If the neutral switch tests correctly and a circuit prob-
lem still exists, check wire harness (see Electrical Sche-
matic and Circuit Drawings in Chapter 8 -- Foldout
Drawings).
6. Make sure that traction neutral switch is connected
to wire harness when testing is complete.
3
FRONT
5
6
2. Turn ignition switch to the ON position (do not start
engine) and check LED on cable end of neutral switch
(Fig. 31). LED should be illuminated when the traction
pedal is in the neutral position.
4
3. With the ignition switch still in the ON position (do not
startengine),presstractionpedaloutoftheneutralposi-
tion and check LED on cable end of neutral switch. LED
should not be illuminated when the traction pedal is
not in the neutral position.
2
6
1
4. If the neutral switch LED did not function correctly:
5
A. Makesurethatneutralswitchisproperlyadjusted
(see Traction Neutral Switch in the Adjustments sec-
tion of this chapter). If necessary, adjust switch and
return to step 2 above.
7
Figure 31
1. Traction pump
5. Jam nut (2 used)
2. Traction neutral switch
3. Traction lever bracket
4. Pump control arm
6. Lock washer (2 used)
7. Switch LED location
B. Make sure ignition switch is OFF and disconnect
the traction neutral switch connector from the ma-
chine wire harness.
C. Verify that the machine wire harness connector
terminal for black wire is closed (continuity) to
ground.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 5 -- 29
Electrical System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Brake Switch
The parking brake switch is a normally open proximity
switch. The parking brake switch is attached to the bot-
tom of the brake pedal (Fig. 32). The parking brake
switch is used as an input for the TEC controller.
D. Turn ignition switch to the ON position (do not
start engine) and verify with a multimeter that ma-
chine wire harness connector terminal for pink wire
has system voltage (12 VDC) present.
Whentheparkingbrakeisnotapplied,theparkingbrake
detent is positioned near the target end of the parking
brake switch so the switch is closed. The parking brake
detent is moved away from the switch when the parking
brake is applied causing the switch to open.
E. If black wire is closed to ground, pink wire has
system voltage present and switch LED did not func-
tion, replace parking brake switch. Adjust switch af-
ter installation (see Parking Brake Switch in the
Adjustments section of this chapter).
Testing
5. If the parking brake switch tests correctly and a cir-
cuit problem still exists, check wire harness (see Electri-
cal Schematic and Circuit Drawings in Chapter 8 --
Foldout Drawings).
1. Before disconnecting the parking brake switch for
testing, the switch and its circuit wiring should be tested
as a TEC controller input with the Diagnostic Display
(see Diagnostic Display in the Troubleshooting section
ofthis chapter). IftheDiagnostic Displayverifies thatthe
parking brake switch and circuit wiring are functioning
correctly, no further switch testing is necessary. If, how-
ever, theDiagnosticDisplaydeterminesthattheparking
brake switch and circuit wiring are not functioning cor-
rectly, proceed with testing procedure.
6. Make sure that parking brake switch is connected to
wire harness when testing is complete.
2. Turn ignition switch to the ON position (do not start
engine) and check LED on cable end of brake switch
(Fig. 32). LED should be illuminated when the parking
brake is not applied.
5
3. With the ignition switch still in the ON position (do not
start engine), apply parking brake and check LED on
cable end of parking brake switch. LED should not be
illuminated when the parking brake is applied.
3
4. If the brake switch LED did not function correctly:
2
4
A. Make sure that brake switch is properly adjusted
(see Parking Brake Switch in the Adjustments sec-
tion of this chapter). If necessary, adjust switch and
return to step 2 above.
3
1
B. Make sure ignition switch is OFF and disconnect
the parking brake switch connector from the ma-
chine wire harness.
6
Figure 32
C. Verify that the machine wire harness connector
terminal for black wire is closed (continuity) to
ground.
1. Parking brake switch
2. Lock washer (2 used)
3. Jam nut (2 used)
4. Parking brake detent
5. Brake pedal
6. Switch LED location
Electrical System
Page 5 -- 30
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mow/Transport Switch
Themow/transportswitchisanormally closedproximity
switch that opens when the mow speed limiter is placed
in the transport position. The switch mounts to a bracket
on the footrest platform. The sensing plate for the mow/
transport switch is the mow speed limiter. The mow/
transport switch is used as an input for the TEC
controller.
4. If the mow/transport switch tests correctly and a cir-
cuit problem still exists, check wire harness (see Electri-
cal Schematic and Circuit Drawings in Chapter 8 --
Foldout Drawings).
5. Makesure thatmow/transportswitchis connectedto
wire harness when testing is complete.
Testing
1. Before disconnecting the mow/transport switch for
testing, the switch and its circuit wiring should be tested
as a TEC controller input with the Diagnostic Display
(see Diagnostic Display in the Troubleshooting section
ofthis chapter). IftheDiagnostic Displayverifies thatthe
mow/transport switch and circuit wiring are functioning
correctly, no further switch testing is necessary. If, how-
ever, the Diagnostic Display determines that the mow/
transport switch and circuit wiring are not functioning
correctly, proceed with testing procedure.
2
1
3
2. Turn ignition switch to the ON position (do not start
engine) and check LED on cable end of mow/transport
switch (Fig. 33). LED should be illuminated when the
mow speed limiter is in the MOW position. The LED
should not be illuminated when the limiter is in the
TRANSPORT position.
Figure 33
1. Mow speed limiter
3. Switch cable
2. Mow/transport switch
3. If the mow/transport switch LED did not function cor-
rectly:
A. Make sure that the mow/transport switch is prop-
erly adjusted (see Mow/Transport Switch in the Ad-
justments section of this chapter). If necessary,
adjust switch and return to step 2 above.
B. Make sure ignition switch is OFF and disconnect
the mow/transport switch connector from machine
wire harness.
C. Verify that the machine wire harness connector
terminal for black wire is closed (continuity) to
ground.
D. Turn ignition switch to the ON position (do not
start engine) and verify with a multimeter that ma-
chine wire harness connector terminal for pink wire
has system voltage (12 VDC) present.
E. If black wire is closed to ground, pink wire has
system voltage present and switch LED did not func-
tion, replace mow/transport switch. Adjust switch af-
ter installation (see Mow/Transport Switch in the
Adjustments section of this chapter).
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 5 -- 31
Electrical System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Start Relay
The start relay is used in the engine starting circuit.
When energized by the TEC controller, the start relay
provides a current path to energize the engine starter
solenoid. The start relay is attached to a frame bracket
under the hood next to the hydraulic pump drive shaft
(Fig. 34).
6. Disconnect voltage from terminal 85 and multimeter
lead from terminal 87.
7. Connectmultimeter (ohmssetting) leadsto relayter-
minals 30 and 87A. With terminal 86 grounded, apply
+12 VDC to terminal 85. The relay terminals 30 and 87A
should not have continuity as +12 VDC is applied to ter-
minal 85. The relay terminals 30 and 87A should have
continuity as +12 VDC is removed from terminal 85.
The TEC controller controls and monitors the operation
of the start relay. The relay and its circuit wiring should
be tested as a controller output with the Diagnostic Dis-
play before disconnecting and testing the relay (see
DiagnosticDisplayintheTroubleshootingsectionofthis
chapter). If the controller has detected a malfunction in
the start relay circuit, the Diagnostic light can be used to
identify the fault (see Diagnostic Light in the Trouble-
shooting section of this chapter).
8. When testing is completed, disconnect voltage and
multimeterleads fromthe relayterminals. Replacerelay
if necessary.
9. Secure relay to machine and connect machine wire
harness connector to relay.
10.Lower and secure hood.
Testing
1. Before disconnecting the start relay for testing, test
relayanditscircuitwiringasaTECcontrolleroutputwith
the Diagnostic Display (see Diagnostic Display in the
Troubleshooting section of this chapter). If the Diagnos-
tic Display verifies that the relay and circuit wiring are
functioning correctly, no further relay testing is neces-
sary.
1
2
2. If the Diagnostic Display determines that start relay
and circuit wiring are not functioning correctly, park ma-
chine on a level surface, lower cutting decks, stop en-
gine, apply parking brake and remove key from ignition
switch. Open hood to gain access to relay.
Figure 34
1. Pump drive shaft
2. Start relay
3. Locate start relay and disconnect the machine wire
harness connector from the relay. Remove relay from
machine for easier testing.
4
3
1
NOTE: Prior to taking small resistance readings with a
digital multimeter, short the meter test leads together.
The meter will display a small resistance value (usually
0.5 ohms or less). This resistance is due to the internal
resistance of the meter and test leads. Subtract this val-
ue from the measured value of the component you are
testing.
86
85
87A
87
30
4. Using a multimeter (ohms setting), measure coil re-
sistance between terminals 85 and 86 (Fig. 35). Resist-
ance should be between 70 and 90 ohms.
1
2
Figure 35
5. Connectmultimeter (ohmssetting) leadsto relayter-
minals 30 and 87. Ground terminal 86 and apply +12
VDC to terminal 85. The relay terminals 30 and 87
shouldhavecontinuityas+12VDCisappliedtoterminal
85. The relay terminals 30 and 87 should not have conti-
nuity as +12 VDC is removed from terminal 85.
1. Coil terminal
2. Common terminal
3. Normally closed term.
4. Normally open term.
Electrical System
Page 5 -- 32
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Main Power and Glow Relays
The Groundsmaster electrical system includes two
identical relays for current control. The main power and
glow relays are attached to a frame bracket under the
hood next to the hydraulic pump drive shaft (Fig. 36).
Relays can be identified by a tag on the wire harness.
6. Disconnect voltage and test leads from the relay ter-
minals. Replace relay if necessary.
7. Secure relay to machine and connect machine wire
harness connector to relay.
8. Lower and secure hood.
The main power relay is used to provide current to the
TEC controller, headlights, power point and optional
electric equipment. When the ignition switch is in the
RUN or START position, the main power relay is ener-
gized.
1
2
3
The glow relay is used to provide current to the engine
glow plugs when energized by the TEC controller. The
controller controls and monitors the operation of the
glow relay. The glow relay and its circuit wiring should
be tested as a controller output with the Diagnostic Dis-
play before disconnecting and testing the relay (see
Special Tools and Troubleshooting in this chapter).
Testing
Figure 36
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting
decks, stop engine, apply parking brake and remove
key from ignition switch.
1. Pump drive shaft
2. Main power relay
3. Glow relay
2. Open hood to gain access to relay.
3. Locate relay and disconnect the machine wire har-
ness connector from the relay. Remove relay from ma-
chine for easier testing.
30
85
86
NOTE: Prior to taking small resistance readings with a
digital multimeter, short the meter test leads together.
The meter will display a small resistance value (usually
0.5 ohms or less). This resistance is due to the internal
resistance of the meter and test leads. Subtract this val-
ue from from the measured value of the component you
are testing.
87
86
85
87
4. Verify coil resistance between terminals 85 and 86
with a multimeter (ohms setting) (Fig. 37). Resistance
should be approximately 72 ohms.
30
5. Connectmultimeter (ohmssetting) leadsto relayter-
minals 30 and 87. Ground terminal 86 and apply +12
VDCtoterminal85. Therelayshouldhavecontinuitybe-
tween terminals 30 and 87 as +12 VDC is applied to ter-
minal 85. The relay should not have continuity between
terminals 30 and 87 as +12 VDC is removed from termi-
nal 85.
Figure 37
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 5 -- 33
Electrical System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Toro Electronic Controller (TEC)
The Groundsmaster 4300--D uses a Toro Electronic
Controller (TEC) to monitor the condition of various
switches (inputs) and then direct power output to allow
certain machine functions. The controller is located be-
hind the control arm access cover next to the fuse block
(Fig. 38). The handheld Diagnostic Display (see Special
Tools in this chapter) with the correct overlay should be
used when checking inputs and outputs of the controller
used on your Groundsmaster (see Troubleshooting in
this chapter).
2
1
Inputs from the ignition, neutral, parking brake, PTO,
seat, mow/transport, joystick lower/raise, temperature
gauge output, hydraulic pressure, engine oil pressure
and engine high temperature shutdown switches are all
monitored by the controller.
Figure 38
1. TEC controller
2. Fuse block
Current output to the cutting deck circuit hydraulic valve
solenoid coils, lift circuit hydraulic valve solenoid coils,
diagnostic light and engine components (glow plug
relay, startrelay, fuelpump and engine run solenoid)are
controlled based on the inputs received by the control-
ler.
If the controller detects a malfunction in any of the con-
trolled circuits, the diagnostic light can be used to identi-
fy the fault (see Diagnostic Light in the Troubleshooting
section of this chapter).
Because of the solid state circuitry built into the control-
ler, there is no method to test it directly. The controller
may be damaged if an attempt is made to test it with an
electrical test device, such as a digital multimeter.
IMPORTANT: Before performing any welding on the
machine, disconnect both positive and negative
battery cables from the battery, disconnect the wire
harness connector from the TEC controller and dis-
connect the terminal connector from the alternator.
This will prevent damage to the electrical system of
your Groundsmaster.
Electrical System
Page 5 -- 34
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
The fuse block is located behind the control arm access
cover (Fig. 39).
In addition to the fuses in the fuse block, a 2 amp fuse
(F3) is included in the wire harness to protect the logic
power circuit for the TEC controller. This fuse resides in
a fuse holder near the battery (Fig. 41).
1
Identification and Function
UseFigure40toidentifyeachindividualfuseanditscor-
rectamperage. Fuses for your Groundsmaster have the
following function:
F1 -- 1 (15 Amp): Protects starter circuit power sup-
ply.
Figure 39
1. Fuse block
F1 -- 2 (10 Amp): Protects main power supply.
F1 -- 3 (10 Amp): Protects power supply for head-
lights.
F1
F2
F1 -- 4 (10 Amp): Protects power supply for power
point.
F2 -- 1 (7.5 Amp): Protects power supply for TEC
controller outputs.
4
3
2
1
10A
10A
10A
15A
OPTIONAL
7.5A
4
3
2
1
F2 -- 2 (7.5 Amp): Protects power supply for TEC
controller outputs.
7.5A
F2 -- 3 (7.5 Amp): Protects power supply for TEC
controller outputs.
7.5A
F2 -- 4 (15 Amp) (if equipped): Protects power sup-
ply for the optional air ride operator seat.
Testing
Figure 40
Turn ignition switch to the ON position (do not start en-
gine). With the fuse installed in the fuse block, use a
multimeter to verify that 12 VDC exists at both of the ter-
minal test points on the fuse. If 12 VDC exists at one of
the fuse test points but not at the other, the fuse is faulty.
1
If necessary, remove fuse from the fuse block to check
fuse resistance. Fuse should have continuity between
the fuse terminals.
2
Figure 41
1. Battery
2. Fuse F3
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 5 -- 35
Electrical System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diode Assembly
A diode assembly (Fig. 42) is used in the Groundsmas-
ter 4300--D engine wire harness. The diode is used for
circuit protection from voltage spikes that occur when
the engine starter solenoid is de--energized. Refer to
wire harness drawings in Chapter 8 -- Foldout Drawings
for additional diode assembly information.
Testing
2
Locate diode assembly and remove cable tie that se-
cures diode to wire harness. Unplug the diode from the
wire harness for testing. The diode (Fig. 43) can be
tested using a digital multimeter (diode test or ohms set-
ting)andthetablebelow.Aftertestingiscomplete,make
sure that diode is fully installed into harness connector
and secured to harness with cable tie.
1
Figure 42
1. Engine wire harness
2. Diode assembly
Multimeter
Red Lead (+)
on Terminal
Multimeter
Black Lead (--)
on Terminal
Continuity
2
Female
Male
Male
YES
NO
1
Female
3
Figure 43
1. Diode
3. Female terminal
2. Male terminal
Electrical System
Page 5 -- 36
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fusible Link Harness
The Groundsmaster 4300--D uses four (4) fusible links
for circuit protection. Three (3) of these fusible links are
located in a harness that connects the starter B+ termi-
nal to the wire harness (Figs. 44 and 45). The remaining
fusible link is included in the wire harness and connects
the starter terminal to the engine run solenoid pull coil.
If any of these links should fail, current to the protected
circuit will cease. Refer to wire harness drawings in
Chapter 8 -- Foldout Drawings for additional fusible link
information.
1
Testing
2
Make sure that ignition switch is OFF. Disconnect nega-
tive (--) battery cable from battery terminal and then dis-
connect positive (+) cable from battery (see Battery
Service in the Service and Repairs section of this chap-
ter). Locate and unplug fusible link connector from ma-
chine wire harness. Use a multimeter to make sure that
continuity exists between the fusible link terminal on the
starter B+ terminal (terminal J1 on fusible link harness)
and each of the terminals in the link harness connector
P1.Ifanyofthefusiblelinksareopen,replacethefusible
link harness.
Figure 44
1. Starter motor
2. Fusible link harness
FUSIBLE LINK
NOTE: It is not recommended to replace individual fus-
ible link conductors of the fusible link harness. If any of
the harness links are open (failed), replace the entire
fusible link harness.
FUSIBLE LINK
FUSIBLE LINK
Figure 45
After testing is complete, make sure that fusible link is
securely attached to starter B+ terminal and machine
wire harness. Connect positive (+) battery cable to bat-
tery terminal first and then connect negative (--) cable to
battery.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 5 -- 37
Electrical System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydraulic Solenoid Valve Coil
The Groundsmaster 4300--D hydraulic system uses
severalhydraulicsolenoidvalvecoilsforsystemcontrol.
The deck control manifold includes two (2) solenoid
valves (Fig. 46) and the lift control manifold includes
three (3) solenoid valves (Fig. 47). When the solenoid
coils are energized, hydraulic valve shift occurs to con-
trol hydraulic flow. Testing of the coils can be done with
the coil installed on the hydraulic valve.
NOTE: The two (2) solenoid valve coils on the deck
control manifold (PRV1 and PRV2) are identical. Sole-
noid valve coils SV1 and PRV on the lift control manifold
are identical and are the same as those used on the
deck manifold. The remaining lift manifold coil (SV2) is
different. To assist in troubleshooting, identical coils can
be exchanged. If the problem follows the exchanged
coil, an electrical problem likely exists with the coil. If the
problem remains unchanged, something other than the
solenoid coil is the problem source (e.g. switch, circuit
wiring, hydraulic problem).
Testing
1. Before disconnecting solenoid valve coils, test the
solenoids and their circuit wiring as TEC controller out-
putswiththeDiagnosticDisplay(seeDiagnosticDisplay
in the Troubleshooting section of this chapter). If the
DiagnosticDisplayverifiesthatsolenoidcoilsandcircuit
wiring are functioning correctly, no further testing is nec-
essary.
7. Connect wire harness electrical connector to the so-
lenoid valve coil after testing is completed.
8. Lower and secure seat if deck control manifold was
accessed. Install operator floor plate if lift control man-
ifold was accessed.
2. If the Diagnostic Display determines that coils and
circuitwiringarenotfunctioningcorrectly, parkmachine
on level surface, lower cutting decks, stop engine, apply
parking brake and remove key from ignition switch.
1
3
3. To gain access to deck control manifold (Fig. 46),
raise and prop the operator seat. Access to the lift con-
trol manifold (Fig. 47) can be obtained by removing the
operator floor plate.
2
4. Disconnect harness electrical connector from hy-
draulic solenoid valve coil that is to be tested (Fig. 46 or
47).
FRONT
NOTE: Prior to taking small resistance readings with a
digital multimeter, short the meter test leads together.
The meter may display a small resistance value (usually
0.5 ohms or less). This resistance is due to the internal
resistance of the meter and test leads. Subtract this val-
ue from the measured value of the component you are
testing.
Figure 46
1. Deck control manifold
2. PRV2 solenoid
3. PRV1 solenoid
5. Using a multimeter (ohms setting), measure resis-
tance between the two connector terminals on the sole-
noid valve coil. The resistance for the solenoid coils is
identified below:
2
4
3
Solenoid Valve Coil
PRV1 and PRV2 (deck)
SV1 and PRV (lift)
SV2 (lift)
Resistance
7.1 ohms
7.1 ohms
8.7 ohms
FRONT
1
6. If solenoid coil resistance is incorrect, replace sole-
noid (see Hydraulic Solenoid Valve Coil Removal and
Installation in the Service and Repairs section of this
chapter).
Figure 47
1. Lift control manifold
2. SV1 solenoid
3. SV2 solenoid
4. PRV solenoid
Electrical System
Page 5 -- 38
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature Sender
The temperature sender is attached to the water pump
housing on the engine and has a gray wire attached to
it(Fig. 48). The resistance of the temperature sender re-
duces as the engine coolant temperature increases.
4. Check resistance of the sender with a multimeter
(ohms setting) as the temperature increases. Replace
sender if specifications are not met.
COOLANT TEMP TEMP SENDER RESISTANCE
The changing resistance of the temperature sender sig-
nals the console temperature gauge to indicate engine
coolant temperature level during machine operation.
When coolant temperature rises to approximately
221oF (105oC), temperature sender resistance causes
the temperature gauge to provide an input to the TEC
controller. This controller input causes the high temper-
ature warning light to illuminate and the cutting decks to
shut down. The temperature gauge, temperature send-
er and circuit wiring should be tested as a controller in-
put with the Diagnostic Display (see Special Tools and
Troubleshooting in this chapter).
100oF (38oC)
160oF (71oC)
200oF (93oC)
221oF (105oC)
460 ohms (approximate)
140 ohms (approximate)
54 to 78 ohms
50 ohms (approximate)
5. After testing, install sender to the engine housing.
A. Clean threads of housing and sender thoroughly.
Apply a light coating of thread sealant to the threads
of the sender.
B. Thread sender into the housing. Torque sender
from 16 to 20 ft--lb (22 to 27 N--m).
Iftheexcessivecoolanttemperaturecausedthecontrol-
ler to shut down the cutting decks, the Diagnostic light
can be used to identify the fault (see Diagnostic Light in
the Troubleshooting section of this chapter).
C. Connect wire harness connector to sender.
6. Fill engine cooling system (see Radiator Installation
intheServiceandRepairssectionofChapter3 -- Kubota
Diesel Engine).
Testing
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting
decks, stop engine, apply parking brake and remove
key from ignition switch. Open and support hood.
7. Lower and secure hood.
CAUTION
Make sure engine is cool before removing the
temperature sender from engine.
1
2. Lower the coolant level in the engine, remove wire
harness connector from temperature sender and re-
move the sender from the engine.
3. Put the end of the sender in a container of oil with a
thermometer and slowly heat the oil (Fig. 49).
Figure 48
1. Temperature sender
CAUTION
Handle the hot oil with extreme care to prevent
personal injury or fire.
NOTE: Prior to taking resistance readings with a digital
multimeter, short the meter test leads together. The me-
ter will display a small resistance value (usually 0.5
ohms or less). This resistance is due to the internal re-
sistance of the meter and test leads. Subtract this value
fromfrom themeasured valueofthecomponentyouare
testing.
Figure 49
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 5 -- 39
Electrical System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
High Temperature Shutdown Switch
The high temperature shutdown switch is located on the
water pump housing (Fig. 50). The high temperature
shutdown switch is normally open and closes when en-
gine coolant temperature reaches approximately 239oF
(115oC). When excessive coolant temperature causes
the shutdown switch to close, the engine shuts down.
There is a tan wire attached to the shutdown switch.
5. Replace shutdown switch if specifications are not
met.
6. After testing is complete, install shutdown switch to
the engine housing.
A. Clean threads of housing and switch thoroughly.
Apply a light coating of thread sealant to the threads
of the switch.
NOTE: If excessive coolant temperature causes en-
gine shutdown, the operator can restart the engine to al-
low the machine to be moved a short distance. After a
restart in this condition, the engine will run for approxi-
mately ten (10) seconds before the engine shuts down
again.
B. Thread switch into the housing. Torque switch
from 22 to 28 ft--lb (30 to 39 N--m).
C. Reconnect harness wire to switch.
7. Fill engine cooling system (see Radiator Installation
intheServiceandRepairssectionofChapter3 -- Kubota
Diesel Engine).
The TEC controller monitors the operation of the high
temperature shutdown switch. The switch and its circuit
wiring should be tested as a controller input with the
Diagnostic Display (see Special Tools and Trouble-
shooting in this chapter).
8. Lower and secure hood.
If excessive coolant temperature caused the TEC con-
troller to shut down the engine, the Diagnostic light can
be used to identify the fault (see Diagnostic Light in the
Troubleshooting section of this chapter).
Testing
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting
decks, stop engine, apply parking brake and remove
key from ignition switch. Open and support hood to gain
access to engine.
1
Figure 50
1. High temperature shutdown switch
CAUTION
Make sure engine is cool before removing the
temperature switch from engine.
2. Lower the coolantlevel in the engine and remove the
high temperature shutdown switch from the engine.
3. Put the end of the switch in a container of oil with a
thermometer and slowly heat the oil (Fig. 51).
CAUTION
Handle the hot oil with extreme care to prevent
personal injury or fire.
Figure 51
4. Check resistance of the switch with a multimeter
(ohms setting) as the oil temperature increases. The
high temperature shutdown switch is normally open and
should close from 234o to 244oF (112o to 118oC).
Electrical System
Page 5 -- 40
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oil Pressure Switch
The engine oil pressure switch is located on the engine
near the oil filter (Fig.52). The oil pressure switch is a
normally closed switch that opens with pressure.
The oil pressure switch should open at approximately 8
PSI (0.56 kg/cm2).
The TEC controller monitors the operation of the oil
pressureswitch. Theswitchand itscircuitwiring should
be tested as a controller input with the Diagnostic Dis-
play (see Special Tools and Troubleshooting in this
chapter).
2
1
Iflow engine oil pressure allowed the oil pressure switch
to close during engine operation, the Diagnostic light
can be used to identify the fault (see Diagnostic Light in
the Troubleshooting section of this chapter).
Figure 52
1. Oil filter
2. Oil pressure switch
Testing
NOTE: Refer to Kubota Workshop Manual, Diesel En-
gine, 05--E3B Series at the end of Chapter 3 -- Kubota
Diesel Engine for information regarding engine lubrica-
tion system and testing.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position. The oil
pressure indicator light on the control panel should be
illuminated.
2. If the indicator light is not illuminated, open hood to
gain access to engine.
3. Locate oil pressure switch on engine and disconnect
the wire harness connector from the switch.
4. With the ignition switch in the RUN position, ground
the disconnected wire to the engine block.
5. If the indicator light comes on, the oil pressure switch
is faulty.
6. If the indicator light does not come on after step 5,
check the oil pressure indicator light and circuit wiring
(see Indicator Lights in this section).
7. After testing is completed, connect the wire harness
connector to the oil pressure switch. Lower and secure
hood.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 5 -- 41
Electrical System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel Stop Solenoid
The fuel stop solenoid used on your Groundsmaster
mustbeenergized forthe dieselengine torun. Thesole-
noidismountedtotheinjectionpumpontheengine(Fig.
53).
5. Using a digital multimeter (ohms setting), touch one
test lead to the hold coil terminal and the other test lead
to the fuel stop solenoid frame (ground) (Fig. 54). The
resistance of the hold coil should be approximately 15
ohms.
The TEC controller monitors the operation of the fuel
stop solenoid. The solenoid and its circuit wiring should
be tested as a controller output with the Diagnostic Dis-
play (see Special Tools and Troubleshooting in this
chapter).
6. If either coil resistance is incorrect, replace fuel stop
solenoid.
7. Connect wire harness connector to the fuel stop so-
lenoid.
If the controller detected a fuel stop solenoid problem
during engine operation, the Diagnostic light can be
used to identify the fault (see Diagnostic Light in the
Troubleshooting section of this chapter).
8. Lower and secure hood.
1
Testing
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting
decks, stop engine, apply parking brake and remove
key from ignition switch. Open hood to gain access to
engine.
2
2. Disconnect wire harness connector from fuel stop
solenoid.
NOTE: The fuel stop solenoid may be removed from
the engine or tested in place.
Figure 53
3. If the solenoid is removed from the engine, make
sure that the solenoid plunger moves freely and is free
of dirt, debris and corrosion.
1. Injection pump
2. Fuel stop solenoid
2
NOTE: Prior to taking small resistance readings with a
digital multimeter, short the test leads together. The me-
ter will display a small resistance value (usually 0.5
ohms or less). This resistance is due to the internal re-
sistance of the meter and test leads. Subtract this value
from the measured value ofthe componentyou are test-
ing.
1
3
4. Using a digital multimeter (ohms setting), touch one
test lead to the pull coil terminal and the other test lead
to the fuel stop solenoid frame (ground) (Fig. 54). The
resistance of the pull coil should be less than 1 ohm (but
not zero).
Figure 54
1. Fuel stop solenoid
2. Pull coil terminal
3. Hold coil terminal
Electrical System
Page 5 -- 42
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel Pump
The fuel pump used on the Groundsmaster 4300--D is
attached to the inside of the left side frame rail near the
fuel tank (Fig. 55).
10.Connect wire harness electrical connector to the en-
gine fuel stop solenoid.
11.Bleed the fuel system.
IMPORTANT: When testing fuel pump, make sure
that pump is not operated without fuel.
12.Lower and secure operator seat and hood.
Fuel Pump Specifications
DANGER
Pump Capacity
Pressure
64 fl oz/min (1.9 l/min)
7 PSI (48.3 kPa)
2.0 amp
Becausedieselfuelishighlyflammable, usecau-
tionwhenhandlingit. Donotsmokewhiletesting
thefuelpump. Donottestfuelpumpwhileengine
is hot. Make sure that there is adequate ventila-
tion when testing. Always wipe up any spilled
fuel before starting the engine.
Current Draw
3
Fuel Pump Capacity Test
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting
decks, stop engine and engage parking brake. Remove
key from ignition switch. Raise and support operator
seat and hood.
2
1
2. Disconnect wire harness electrical connector from
the engine fuel stop solenoid to prevent the engine from
starting (see Fuel Stop Solenoid in this section).
Figure 55
3. Disconnect fuel hose (pump discharge) from the
fuel/water separator inlet fitting (Fig. 56).
1. Fuel pump
3. Hydraulic gear pump
2. Pump discharge hose
4. Make sure fuel hoses attached to the fuel pump, fuel
filter and fuel tank suction tube screen are free of ob-
structions.
3
5. Placedisconnected fuelhose intoa large, graduated
cylinder sufficient enough to collect 1 quart (0.95 liter).
IMPORTANT: When testing the fuel pump, DO NOT
turn ignition switch to START.
2
6. Collect fuel in the graduated cylinder by turning igni-
tion switch to the RUN position. Allow pump to run for 15
seconds, then turn ignition switch to OFF.
1
7. Fuel collected in the graduated cylinder should be
approximately 16 fl oz (475 ml) after 15 seconds.
Figure 56
8. Replace fuel pump if necessary.
1. Fuel/water separator
2. Fuel hose (from pump)
3. Inlet fitting
9. Install fuel hose to the fuel/water separator. Make
sure to secure fuel hose with hose clamp.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 5 -- 43
Electrical System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Repairs
NOTE: See the Kubota Workshop Manual, Diesel En-
gine, 05--E3B Series at the end of Chapter 3 -- Kubota
Diesel Engine for engine electrical component repair in-
formation.
Battery Storage
If the machine will be stored for more than 30 days:
4. Store battery in a cool atmosphere to avoid quick de-
terioration of the battery charge.
1. Remove the battery from the machine and charge it
fully (see Battery Service in this section).
5. To help prevent the battery from freezing, make sure
it is fully charged (see Battery Service in this section).
2. Either store battery on a shelf or on the machine.
3. Leave cables disconnected if the battery is stored on
the machine.
Battery Care
1. Battery electrolyte level must be properly main-
tained. The top of the battery must be kept clean. lf the
machine is stored in a location where temperatures are
extremely high, the battery will discharge more rapidly
than if the machine is stored in a location where temper-
atures are cool.
3. Battery cables must be tight on terminals to provide
good electrical contact.
CAUTION
Connecting battery cables to the wrong bat-
tery post could result in personal injury and/or
damage to the electrical system.
CAUTION
Wear safety goggles and rubber gloves when
working with electrolyte. Charge battery in a
well ventilated place so gasses produced
while charging can dissipate. Since the gases
are explosive, keep open flames and electrical
sparks away from the battery; do not smoke.
Nausea may result if the gases are inhaled. Un-
plug charger from electrical outlet before con-
necting or disconnecting charger leads to or
from battery posts.
4. If corrosion occurs at terminals, disconnect cables.
Always disconnect negative (--) cable first. Clean
clamps and terminals separately. Reconnect cables
with positive (+) cable first. Coat battery posts and cable
connectors with Battery Terminal Protector (Toro Part
No. 107--0392) or petroleum jelly to prevent corrosion.
5. Check electrolyte level every 25 operating hours,
and every 30 days if machine is in storage.
6. Maintain cell level with distilled or demineralized wa-
ter. Do not fill cells above the fill line.
IMPORTANT: Do not remove battery fill caps while
cleaning.
2. Check battery condition weekly or after every 50
hours of operation. Keep terminals and entire battery
case clean because a dirty battery will discharge slowly.
A. Clean battery by washing entire case with a solu-
tionofbakingsodaandwater. Rinsewithclearwater.
B. Coat battery posts and cable connectors with
Battery Terminal Protector (Toro Part No. 107--0392)
or petroleum jelly to prevent corrosion.
Electrical System
Page 5 -- 44
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Service
The battery is the heart of the electrical system. With
regular and proper service, battery life can be extended.
Additionally, battery and electrical component failure
can be prevented.
7
6
8
FRONT
1
4
CAUTION
3
When working with batteries, use extreme cau-
tion to avoid splashing or spilling electrolyte.
Electrolyte can destroy clothing and burn skin or
eyes. Always wear safety goggles and a face
shield when working with batteries.
2
Electrolyte Specific Gravity
5
o
o
Fully charged: 1.265 corrected to 80 F (27 C)
Discharged: less than 1.240
Figure 57
Battery Specifications
BCI Group Size 55
1. Battery
2. Battery tray
3. Retainer
4. Flange nut
5. Carriage screw
6. Negative battery cable
7. Positive battery cable
8. Fusible link
o
o
585 CCA at 0 F (--18 C)
Reserve Capacity of 95 minutes at 80 F (27 C)
o
o
Dimensions (including terminal posts)
Length
Width
Height
8.3 inches (211 mm)
6.0 inches (152 mm)
8.5 inches (216 mm)
B. Checkbatteryterminalsforcorrosion.Ifcorrosion
occurs at terminals, disconnect cables. Always dis-
connect negative (--) cable first. Clean cable clamps
and battery terminals separately. Reconnect cables
with positive (+) cable first. Coat battery posts and
cable connectors with Battery Terminal Protector
(Toro Part No. 107--0392) or petroleum jelly to pre-
vent corrosion.
Battery Removal and Installation (Fig. 57)
1. Raise and support hood.
2. Loosen and remove negative (--) cable from battery.
After negative (--) cable is removed, loosen and remove
positive (+) cable.
IMPORTANT: Before cleaning the battery, tape
or block vent holes to the filler caps and make
sure the caps are on tightly.
3. Loosen flange nut that secures battery retainer.
4. Carefully remove battery from machine.
C. Check for signs of wetness or leakage on the top
of the battery which mightindicate a loose or missing
filler cap, overcharging, loose terminal post or over-
filling. Also, check battery case for dirt and oil. Clean
the battery with a solution of baking soda and water,
then rinse it with clean water.
5. Install battery in reverse order making sure to con-
nect and tighten positive (+) cable to battery before con-
necting negative (--) cable.
NOTE: Before connecting the negative (ground) cable
to the battery, connect a digital multimeter (set to DC
Amps) between the negative battery post and the nega-
tive (ground) cable connector. The reading should be
less than 0.1 amp. If the reading is 0.1 amp or more, the
machine’s electrical system should be tested for short
circuits or faulty components and repaired.
D. Check that the cover seal is notbroken away. Re-
place the battery if the seal is broken or leaking.
E. Check the electrolyte level in each cell. Ifthelevel
is below the tops of the plates in any cell, fill all cells
with distilled water between the minimum and max-
imum fill lines. Charge at 15 to 25 amps for 15 min-
utes to allow sufficient mixing of the electrolyte (see
battery charging in this section).
6. Lower and secure hood.
Battery Inspection and Maintenance
1. Perform the following inspections and maintenance:
A. Check battery case for cracks. Replace battery if
cracked or leaking.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 5 -- 45
Electrical System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Testing
B. If the battery has recently been charged, remove
the battery surface charge before performing the
load test. Disconnecttheengine fuelstop solenoidto
prevent the engine from starting. Engage the starter
motor for ten (10) seconds to remove battery surface
charge. Reconnect the fuel stop solenoid.
1. Conduct a hydrometer test of the battery electrolyte.
IMPORTANT: Make sure the area around the cells is
clean before opening the battery caps.
A. Measure the specific gravity of each cell with a
hydrometer. Draw electrolyte in and out of the
hydrometer barrel prior to taking a reading to warm--
up the hydrometer. At the same time take the tem-
perature of the cell.
C. Make sure batteryterminals arefree ofcorrosion.
D. Measure the temperature of the center battery
cell.
E. Connect a battery load tester to the battery termi-
nals following the load tester manufacturer’s in-
structions. Connect a digital multimeter to the
battery terminals.
B. Temperature correct each cell reading. For each
10oF (5.5oC) above 80oF (26.7oC) add 0.004 to the
specific gravity reading. For each 10oF (5.5oC) be-
low 80oF (26.7oC) subtract 0.004 from the specific
gravity reading.
F. Applyatestloadof295amps(onehalftheCrank-
ing Performance rating of the battery) for 15 se-
conds.
o
Example: Cell Temperature
Cell Gravity
100 F
1.245
o
o
o
100 F minus 80 F equals 20 F
G. Take a battery voltage reading after 15 seconds,
then remove the load.
o
o
o
(37.7 C minus 26.7 C equals 11.0 C)
o
o
20 F multiply by 0.004/10 F equals 0.008
o
o
(11 C multiply by 0.004/5.5 C equals 0.008)
ADD (conversion above) 0.008
1.253
H. Using the table below, determine the minimum
voltage for the cell temperature reading:
o
o
Correction to 80 F (26.7 C)
C. If the difference between the highest and lowest
cell specific gravity is 0.050 or greater or the lowest
cellspecificgravityislessthan1.225,chargethebat-
tery. Charge at the recommended rate and time giv-
en in Battery Charging in this section or until
specific gravity of all cells is 1.225 or greater with the
differenceinspecificgravitybetweenthehighestand
lowest cell less than 0.050. If these charging condi-
tions can not be met, replace the battery.
Minimum
Voltage
Battery Electrolyte
Temperature
9.6
9.5
9.4
9.3
9.1
8.9
8.7
8.5
70oF (and up)
21oC (and up)
16oC
60oF
50oF
40oF
30oF
20oF
10oF
0oF
10oC
4oC
-- 1 oC
-- 7 oC
-- 1 2 oC
-- 1 8 oC
2. Perform a high--discharge test with an adjustable
load tester.
Thisisoneofthemostreliablemeansoftestingabattery
asitsimulatesthecold--crankingtest.Acommercialbat-
tery load tester is required to perform this test.
I. Ifthe testvoltage is below the minimum voltage in
the chart, replace the battery. If the test voltage is at
or above the minimum, return the battery to service.
CAUTION
Follow the battery load tester manufacturer’s
instructions when using a battery load tester.
A. Check the voltage across the battery terminals
prior to testing the battery. If the voltage is less than
12.4 VDC, charge the battery (see battery charging
in this section).
Electrical System
Page 5 -- 46
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Charging
CAUTION
To minimize possible damage to the battery and allow
the battery to be fully charged, the slow charging meth-
od is presented here. This charging method can be ac-
complished with a constant current battery charger
which is commonly available.
Do not charge a frozen battery because it can ex-
plode and cause injury. Let the battery warm to
60oF (16oC) before connecting to a charger.
Charge the battery in a well--ventilated place to
dissipate gases produced from charging. These
gases are explosive; keep open flame and elec-
trical spark away from the battery. Do not smoke.
Nausea may result if the gases are inhaled. Un-
plug the charger from the electrical outlet before
connecting or disconnecting the charger leads
from the battery posts.
CAUTION
Follow the battery charger manufacturer’s
instructions when using a battery charger.
NOTE: Using specific gravity of the battery cells is the
most accurate method of determining battery condition.
3. Following the battery charger manufacturer’s
instructions, connect the charger cables to the battery.
Make sure a good connection is made.
1. Determine the battery charge level from either its
specific gravity or open circuit voltage.
4. Charge the battery following the battery charger
manufacturer’s instructions.
Battery Charge
Level
Specific
Gravity
Open Circuit
Voltage
5. Occasionally check the temperature of the battery
electrolyte. If the temperature exceeds 125oF (52oC) or
the electrolyte is violently gassing or spewing, the
charging rate must be lowered or temporarily stopped.
100%
75%
50%
25%
0%
1.265
1.225
1.190
1.155
1.120
12.68
12.45
12.24
12.06
11.89
6. Three (3)hours priorto theend ofthe charging, mea-
sure the specific gravity of a battery cell once per hour.
The battery is fully charged when the cells are gassing
freely at a low charging rate and there is less than a
0.003 change in specific gravity for three (3) consecu-
tive readings.
2. Determine the charging time and rate using the bat-
tery charger manufacturer’s instructions or the fol-
lowing table:
Battery
Reserve
Capacity
(Minutes)
Battery Charge Level
(Percent of Fully Charged)
75%
50%
25%
0%
80 or less 3.8 hrs
@
7.5 hrs 11.3 hrs 15 hrs
@
@
@
3 amps 3 amps 3 amps 3 amps
81 to 125 5.3 hrs 10.5 hrs 15.8 hrs 21 hrs
@
@
@
@
4 amps 4 amps 4 amps 4 amps
126 to
170
5.5 hrs
@
11 hrs
@
16.5 hrs 22 hrs
@
@
5 amps 5 amps 5 amps 5 amps
171 to
250
5.8 hrs 11.5 hrs 17.3 hrs 23 hrs
@
@
@
@
6 amps 6 amps 6 amps 6 amps
above
250
6 hrs
@
12 hrs
@
18 hrs
@
24 hrs
@
10 amps 10 amps 10 amps 10 amps
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 5 -- 47
Electrical System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydraulic Solenoid Valve Coil
A hydraulic solenoid valve coil on the deck control man-
ifold (Fig. 58) or lift control manifold (Fig. 59) can be re-
placed without opening the hydraulic system.
FRONT
2
Removal
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting
decks, stop engine and engage parking brake. Remove
key from ignition switch.
2. Locate the solenoid valve coil that is to be replaced.
A. Tilt operator seat up to gain access to hydraulic
deckcontrolmanifold.RefertoFigure58forsolenoid
coil locations on the deck control manifold.
1
3
B. The lift control manifold is attached to a frame
bracket under the operator floor plate. Access to the
lift control manifold can be obtained by removing the
floor plate. Refer to Figure 59 for solenoid coil loca-
tions on the lift control manifold.
48 to 60 in--lb
(5.4 to 6.7 N--m)
4
Figure 58
1. Deck control manifold
2. Solenoid coil PRV2
3. Solenoid coil PRV1
4. Nut
3. Disconnect the wire harness electrical connector
from the solenoid valve coil to be replaced.
48 to 60 in--lb
(5.4 to 6.7 N--m)
4. Remove the nut from the hydraulic valve.
5. Slide the solenoid coil from the valve.
6. Clean any corrosion or dirt from the valve.
Installation
5
3
4
1. Slide new coil assembly onto the hydraulic valve.
2
6
2. Install the nut onto the valve and torque nut from 48
to 60 in--lb (5.4 to 6.7 N--m) (do not over--tighten).
3. Connect the machine wire harness connector to the
solenoid coil.
4. Lower and secure seat if deck control manifold was
accessed. Install operator floor plate if lift control man-
ifold was accessed.
FRONT
1
Figure 59
1. Lift control manifold
2. Solenoid coil PRV
3. Nut
4. Solenoid coil S2
5. Nut
6. Solenoid coil S1
Electrical System
Page 5 -- 48
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
Chassis
Table of Contents
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Operator’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
SERVICE AND REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Brake Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Rear Axle Motor Housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Control Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Operator Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Mechanical Seat Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Front Lift Arms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Rear Lift Arms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 6 -- 1
Chassis
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Item
Description
Front Tire Pressure
12 to 15 PSI (83 to 103 kPa)
(26.5 x 14.0 -- 12, 4 ply, tubeless)
Rear Tire Pressure
(20 x 12.0 -- 10, 4 ply, tubeless)
12 to 15 PSI (83 to 103 kPa)
70 to 90 ft--lb (95 to 122 N--m)
Wheel Lug Nut Torque
General Information
Operator’s Manual
The Operator’s Manual provides information regarding
the operation, general maintenance and maintenance
intervals for your Groundsmaster 4300--D machine. Re-
fer to that publication for additional information when
servicing the machine.
Special Tools
Order Special Tools from your Toro Distributor.
Wheel Hub Puller
The wheel hub puller allows safe removal of the wheel
hub from the wheel motor shaft.
Toro Part Number: TOR6004
Figure 1
Chassis
Page 6 -- 2
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 6 -- 3
Chassis
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Repairs
Wheels
10
8
9
11
7
2
3
1
6
5
70 to 90 ft--lb
(95 to 122 N--m)
4
RIGHT
7
FRONT
Figure 2
1. Front wheel motor (LH shown)
2. Brake assembly (LH shown)
3. Front wheel hub
5. Brake drum
6. Front wheel
7. Lug nut (5 used per wheel)
9. Rear wheel hub
10. Rear wheel
11. Lock nut
4. Lock nut
8. Rear wheel motor (LH shown)
Chassis
Page 6 -- 4
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal (Fig. 2)
Installation (Fig. 2)
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting
decks, stop engine, engage parking brake and remove
key from the ignition switch.
1. Install wheel and secure with five (5) lug nuts.
2. Lower machine to ground.
3. Torque lug nuts evenly in a crossing pattern from 70
to 90 ft--lb (95 to 122 N--m).
2. Chock wheels to prevent machine from shifting.
3. Loosen wheel lug nuts.
CAUTION
When changing attachments, tires or perform-
ing other service, use correct supports, hoists
and jacks. Make sure machine is parked on a
solid, level surface such as a concrete floor.
Prior to raising machine, remove any attach-
ments that may interfere with the safe and
proper raising of the machine. Always chock or
block wheels. Use jack stands or other ap-
propriate load holding devices to support the
raised machine. If the machine is not properly
supported, the machine may move or fall,
which may result in personal injury.
4. Using a jack, raise machine so wheel is off ground
(see Jacking Instructions in Chapter 1 -- Safety). Sup-
port machine with jack stands.
5. Remove lug nuts and then remove wheel from ma-
chine.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 6 -- 5
Chassis
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering Column
4
Antiseize
Lubricant
20 to 26 ft--lb
(28 to 35 N--m)
20
1
21
84 to 120 in--lb
(9.5 to 13.5 N--m)
3
Antiseize
Lubricant
6
17
16
11
5
10
8
2
12
9
22
19
14
7
19
RIGHT
FRONT
7
13
15
18
Figure 3
1. Steering column
9. Hydraulic tube
10. Hydraulic tube
11. Hydraulic tube
12. Hydraulic tube
13. Column brace
14. Steering control valve
16. Flange head screw (2 used)
17. Socket head screw (4 used)
18. Flange nut (2 used)
19. Tube clamp
20. Lock nut
21. Flat washer
2. Hydraulic fitting (4 used)
3. Steering wheel
4. Steering wheel cover
5. Gear pump
6. Socket head screw (4 used)
7. Flange nut
15. Flange head screw (2 used)
22. O--ring
8. O--ring
Removal (Fig. 3)
3. Remove lock nut and flat washer that secure steer-
ing wheel to steering column.
1. Park the machine on a level surface, engage the
parking brake, lower the cutting decks and stop the en-
gine. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
4. Use a suitable puller to remove steering wheel from
steering column.
2. Remove cover from steering wheel by carefully pry-
ing up on one of the cover spokes.
Chassis
Page 6 -- 6
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Remove platform shroud from machine to allow ac-
cess to steering column fasteners (Fig. 4).
9. Install steering wheel cover to steering wheel.
3
A. Remove cover plate from platform.
1
2
B. Remove fasteners that secure shroud to ma-
chine.
4
C. Remove shroud from machine.
D. Locate and retrieve two (2) rubber bushings and
spacers.
5
3
6. Slide rubber bellows up steering column to allow ac-
cess to fasteners that secure steering column to ma-
chine.
6
7
8
7. Support steering control valve to prevent it from fal-
ling during steering column removal.
8. Loosen and remove four (4) socket head screws
(item 6) that secure steering control valve to steering
column.
9. Loosen and remove four (4) socket head screws
(item 17) and flange nuts (item 7) that secure steering
column to machine.
Figure 4
1. Washer (2 used)
2. Screw (2 used)
3. Washer head screw
5. Lock nut (2 used)
6. Cover plate
7. Bushing (2 used)
4. Platform shroud
8. Spacer (2 used)
10.Slide steering column assembly from steering con-
trol valve and machine.
11.Disassemble steering column assembly as needed
using Figure 5 as a guide.
1
Installation (Fig. 3)
1. Apply antiseize lubricant to input shaft of steering
control valve.
4
2. Slide steering column onto steering control valve.
Secure steering column in place with four (4) socket
head screws (item 17) and flange nuts (item 7).
5
6
3. Securesteeringcontrolvalvetosteeringcolumnwith
four (4) socket head screws (item 6).
7
8
2
3
4. Slide rubber bellows to bottom of steering column.
9
12
11
10
5. Place rubber bushings and spacers into holes of
platform shroud (Fig. 4). Position shroud in place and
secure with removed fasteners.
Figure 5
1. Steering column
2. Pin
3. Universal joint
7. Bolt (2 used)
8. Pin
6. Thoroughlycleantaperedsurfacesofsteeringwheel
and steering column.
9. Pedal block
10. Pedal cover
11. Pedal
4. Pin
5. Lock washer (2 used)
6. Cylinder
12. Spring
7. Apply antiseize lubricant to splines of steering col-
umn taking care to keep antiseize lubricant from column
taper. Slide steering wheel onto steering column.
8. Secure steering wheel to steering column with flat
washer and lock nut. Torque lock nut from 20 to 26 ft--lb
(28 to 35 N--m).
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 6 -- 7
Chassis
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Brake Service
25
5
11
14
9
10
6
28
23
29
30
7
31
32
33
16
12
13
21
24
26
9
27
22
8
19
18
15
5
11
20
14
1
28
3
17
2
RIGHT
70 to 90 ft--lb
(95 to 122 N--m)
315 to 385 ft--lb
(427 to 521 N--m)
FRONT
4
Figure 6
1. LH wheel motor
2. Lug nut (5 used per wheel)
3. Hub
12. Lock nut (4 used per wheel motor)
13. Cap screw (4 used per wheel motor)
14. Brake bracket (2 used)
23. Clevis pin (2 used)
24. LH brake assembly
25. RH brake assembly
4. Wheel assembly
5. Hydraulic fitting (2 used per motor)
6. Hydraulic tube
7. Hydraulic tube
8. Cap screw (2 used per wheel shield)
9. O--ring
15. Lock nut (2 used per wheel shield)
16. RH wheel motor
17. Lock nut (2 used)
18. Flat washer (2 used per wheel shield)
19. Brake drum (2 used)
20. Front wheel shield (LH shown)
21. Rear wheel shield (LH shown)
22. Wheel stud (5 used per wheel)
26. Cap screw (4 used per brake assy)
27. Lock nut (4 used per brake assy)
28. Square key
29. Return spring (1 used per bracket)
30. Brake spring bracket (2 used)
31. Flange nut (1 used per bracket)
32. Jam nut (1 used per bracket)
33. Cap screw (1 used per bracket)
10. Hydraulic tube
11. O--ring
Removal (Fig. 6)
3. Loosen, but do not remove, wheel lug nuts and lock
nut (item 17) from wheel motor shaft.
1. Park the machine on a level surface, lower the cut-
ting decks and stop the engine. Remove the key from
the ignition switch.
4. Jack up front of machine and remove front wheel as-
sembly (see Wheel Removal in this section). Make sure
to support machine with jack stands.
2. Chock rear wheels to prevent machine from shifting.
5. Make sure parking brake is disengaged.
Chassis
Page 6 -- 8
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Remove return spring and clevis pin that secure
brakecabletobrakeactuatorlever. Positionbrakecable
end away from lever.
6. Mount square key in the wheel motor shaft, then
install the wheel hub onto the wheel motor shaft.
IMPORTANT: Do not reuse lock nut that secures
wheelhub to wheelmotor after it has beenremoved.
7. Remove brake drum.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT hit wheel hub, puller or wheel
motor with a hammer during wheel hub removal or
installation. Hammering may cause damage to the
wheel motor.
7. Install new lock nut (item 17) onto the wheel motor
shaft to secure wheel hub to motor shaft.
8. Install brake drum.
9. Position brake cable end to brake actuator lever. Se-
cure cable to actuator lever with clevis pin and return
spring.
8. Make sure that lock nut on wheel motor shaft is loos-
ened at least two (2) turns. Use hub puller (see Special
Tools) to loosen wheel hub from wheel motor.
10.Install front wheel assembly (see Wheel Installation
in this section).
9. Remove lock nut and wheel hub from motor shaft.
Discard lock nut. Locate and retrieve square key.
11.Check and adjust brakes.
12.Lower machine to ground.
NOTE: If desired, the complete brake assembly can be
removed from the machine for disassembly (see step
12).
13.Torque lug nuts evenly in a crossing pattern from 70
to 90 ft--lb (95 to 122 N--m). Torque lock nut (item 17)
that secures wheel hub from 315 to 385 ft--lb (427 to
521 N--m).
10.Remove upper and lower shoe springs from brake
shoes.
11.Remove shoe hold down cups and hold down
springs. Remove brake shoes and hold down pins from
backing plate.
CAUTION
12.If necessary, remove brake backing plate from ma-
chine by loosening and removing four (4) cap screws
(item 26) and lock nuts (item 27).
After servicing the brakes, always check the
brakes in a wide open, level area that is free of
other persons and obstructions.
Installation (Fig. 6)
1. Remove rust and debris from all brake parts with a
wire brush prior to installation. Clean all parts. Inspect
brake shoe contact surfaces of the brake drum for ex-
cessive wear. Replace any worn or damaged parts.
14
13
12
2. If brake backing plate was removed from machine,
secure backing plate to brake bracket with four (4) cap
screws (item 26) and lock nuts (item 27).
11
10
5
3. Lightly lubricate brake shoe pivot points with general
purpose grease.
14
9
2
3
4. Position one brake shoe to the backing plate. Install
brake hold down pin and secure with hold down spring
and cup. Repeat for second brake shoe.
1
4
5
5. Install upper and lower shoe springs to brake shoes.
Make sure that brake shoes are properly positioned to
pivot and actuator points.
6
7
8
Figure 7
1. Backing plate
2. Rivet (4 used)
3. Clevis pin
4. Retaining ring
5. Brake shoe
6. Lower shoe spring
7. Hold down spring
8. Hold down cup
9. Upper shoe spring
10. Brake actuator
11. Actuator lever
12. Back--up plate
13. Boot
IMPORTANT: Before wheel hub is installed, thor-
oughly clean tapers of wheel hub and wheel motor
shaft. Make sure that tapers are free of grease, oil
and dirt. Do not use antiseize lubricant when instal-
ling wheel hub.
14. Hold down pin
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 6 -- 9
Chassis
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Axle Motor Housings
30
22
21
35
33
34
32
24
31
23
25
12
13
37
11
4
3
10
9
2
37
29
20
14
36
70 to 90 ft--lb
9
(95 to 122 N--m)
20
27
5
8
7
26
3
6
1
17
18
RIGHT
19
28
15
16
FRONT
315 to 385 ft--lb
(427 to 521 N--m)
Figure 8
1. Lug nut (5 used per wheel)
2. Rear axle
3. Motor housing (2 used)
4. RH drag link
5. Tie rod
6. O--ring
7. Hydraulic fitting (2 used per motor)
14. Flange head screw (3 used per link)
15. Wheel hub
16. Lock nut
17. Wheel motor (LH shown)
18. Lock washer (4 used per motor)
19. Cap screw (4 used per motor)
20. Cotter pin
26. Wheel assembly
27. LH drag link
28. Woodruff key
29. Thrust washer
30. Grease fitting
31. Grease fitting
32. O--ring
8. O--ring
9. Slotted hex nut
10. Jam nut
21. Steering cylinder
22. Ball joint
23. Ball joint
33. Hydraulic fitting (2 used)
34. O--ring
35. Jam nut
11. Grease fitting
12. Spindle cap
24. Retaining ring
25. Flange head screw
36. Hydraulic hose
37. Flange bushing (4 used)
13. Retaining ring
Chassis
Page 6 -- 10
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal (Fig. 8)
C. Apply grease to the inside and outside of the new
flange bushings.
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting
decks, stop engine, engage parking brake and remove
key from the ignition switch.
D. Press new flange bushings into the top and bot-
tom of the axle tube until bushing flange bottoms on
tube.
2. Chock frontwheelsto preventmachine fromshifting.
3. Loosen, but do not remove, rear wheel lug nuts.
E. After bushing installation, make sure that motor
housing shaftslides easilyinto bushings. Ifbindingis
noted, locate and correct source of binding.
4. Jack up rear of machine and remove rear wheel as-
sembly (see Wheel Removal in this section). Make sure
to support machine with jack stands.
Installation (Fig. 8)
1. If removed, secure drag link to motor housing.
5. Remove cotter pin and slotted hex nut that secure
the tie rod end to the drag link. Separate the tie rod end
from the drag link.
2. Apply a light coating of grease to motor housing
shaft.
6. If right side motor housing is being removed, remove
cotter pin and slotted hex nut that secure steering cylin-
derballjointtodraglink. Separatesteeringcylinderfrom
drag link.
3. Install thrust washer (item 29) onto the motor hou-
sing shaft and slide the shaft up through the axle tube.
Hold the motor housing in place and install the retaining
ring (item 13) onto the end of the spindle shaft.
7. Remove four (4) cap screws and lock washers that
securewheelmotortomotorhousing.Slidewheelmotor
assembly (with wheel hub and hydraulic hoses at-
tached) from motor housing. Position wheel motor away
from housing.
4. Place the spindle cap to the top of the motor housing
shaft and secure with flange head screw.
5. Slide wheel motor assembly (with wheel hub and hy-
draulic hoses attached) into motor housing. Secure
wheel motor to motor housing with four (4) cap screws
and lock washers.
8. Support motor housing to prevent it from falling.
9. Remove the flange head screw, spindle cap and re-
taining ring that secure the motor housing shaft into the
axle tube. Slide the motor housing out of the axle tube.
Locate and retrieve thrust washer (item 29) from motor
housing shaft.
6. Connect the tie rod end to the drag link with slotted
hex nut and cotter pin.
7. If right side motor housing was removed, secure
steeringcylinderballjointtodraglinkwithslottedhexnut
and cotter pin.
10.If necessary, remove drag link from motor housing.
8. Lubricate the motor housing shafts through the
grease fittings on the rear axle.
11.Thoroughly clean the motor housing shaft. Inspect
the shaft for wear and replace motor housing if shaft is
worn or damaged.
9. Install rear wheel assembly (see Wheel Installation
in this section). Make sure that lug nuts are torqued
evenly in a crossing pattern from 70 to 90 ft--lb (95 to
122 N--m).
12.Thoroughly clean the rear axle bore and inspect the
flangebushingsinrearaxle forwear ordamage. Ifbush-
ings need replacement:
10.Check rear wheel toe--in (see Operator’s Manual).
A. Use a bushing removal tool to extract both flange
bushings from the axle tube. Take care to not dam-
age the bore of the axle tube.
11.After all adjustments have been made, make sure
that no contact is made between any machine compon-
ents as the rear wheels are moved from lock to lock. Ad-
just if necessary.
B. Clean the inside of the axle tube to remove any
dirt or foreign material.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 6 -- 11
Chassis
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Axle
6
90 to 120 ft--lb
(123 to 162 N--m)
8
9
10
27
23
36
4
15
30
11
35
24
22
21
37
41
7
44
42
43
45
28
14
11
28
45
16
7
20
2
40
29
70 to 90 ft--lb
(95 to 122 N--m)
29
31
18
33
20
39
12
19
3
5
26
14
34
1
25
RIGHT
32
38
13
FRONT
315 to 385 ft--lb
17
(427 to 521 N--m)
Figure 9
1. Lug nut (5 used per wheel)
2. Rear axle assembly
3. Hydraulic fitting (2 used per motor)
4. Hydraulic fitting (2 used)
5. Tie rod assembly
6. Axle pivot pin
16. Jam nut (2 used)
17. Lock nut
18. Hydraulic hose
19. O--ring
20. Cotter pin
21. Steering cylinder
22. Ball joint
31. Thrust washer
32. Cap screw (4 used per motor)
33. O--ring
34. Wheel stud (5 used per hub)
35. Grease fitting
36. O--ring
7. Thrust washer
37. Hydraulic hose
8. Roll pin
9. Thrust washer
23. Ball joint
24. Retaining ring
38. Woodruff key
39. LH drag link
10. Jam nut
11. Grease fitting
12. Wheel motor (LH shown)
13. Wheel hub assembly
14. Motor housing
25. Lock washer (4 used per motor)
26. Wheel assembly
27. Grease fitting
28. Bushing
29. Slotted hex nut
30. Hydraulic hose
40. Flange head screw (3 used per link)
41. Flange head screw
42. Spindle cap
43. Retaining ring
44. RH drag link
15. O--ring
45. Flange bushing (4 used)
Chassis
Page 6 -- 12
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Axle Removal (Fig. 9)
D. Press new bushings into the axle pivot bore until
bushing is flush with axle.
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting
decks, stop engine, engage parking brake and remove
key from the ignition switch.
E. After bushing installation, make sure that pivot
pin slides easily into bushings. If binding is noted, lo-
cate and correct source of binding.
2. Chock frontwheelsto preventmachine fromshifting.
3. Removebothrearwheelassemblies(seeWheelRe-
moval in this section). Make sure that machine is sup-
ported with appropriate jack stands.
5
4
2
4. Remove cotter pins and slotted hex nuts that secure
the tie rod ends to the drag links. Separate the tie rod
ends from the drag links and remove tie rod from axle.
3
5. Remove steering cylinder from rear axle (see Steer-
ingCylinderRemovalintheServiceandRepairssection
of Chapter 4 -- Hydraulic System).
6. Remove wheel motor housings from rear axle (see
Rear Axle Motor Housing Removal in this section).
1
7. To allow removal of the rear axle pivot pin, remove
the three (3) cap screws, lock washers and spacers that
secure CrossTraxTM AWD control manifold to frame
(Fig. 10). Lower and support manifold taking care to not
damage hydraulic tubes.
FRONT
Figure 10
1. AWD control manifold
2. Frame bracket
3. Spacer (3 used)
4. Lock washer (3 used)
5. Cap screw (3 used)
8. Remove the jam nut (item 10) and thrust washer
(item 9) that secure the axle pivot pin (item 6) to the
frame.
Tie Rod Assembly (Fig. 11)
9. Support rear axle to prevent it from falling.
NOTE: The tie rod ball joint and jam nut at the grooved
end of the tie rod have left hand threads.
10.Pull the axle pivot pin from frame and rear axle. This
will release the rear axle and thrust washers (item 7)
from the frame.
1. Loosenjamnutsandthenunscrewballjointsfromtie
rod.
11.Carefully remove the rear axle from the machine.
Take care to not damage the CrossTraxTM AWD control
manifold or attached hydraulic tubes during axle remov-
al.
2. Thread new ball joints equally into tie rod so that ball
joint center to center length is 36.240” (920.5 mm).
3. Thoroughly clean the tapered surfaces of the tie rod
ball joints before installing tie rod to drag links on rear
axle.
Rear Axle Service
1. Thoroughly clean the rear axle pivot pin. Inspect the
pin for wear and replace pivot pin if worn or damaged.
36.240”
(920.5 mm)
2. Thoroughly clean the rear axle pivot and inspect the
bushings in rear axle for wear or damage. If bushings
need replacement:
1.490”
(37.8 mm)
A. Use a bushing removal tool to extract both bush-
ings from the axle pivot. Take care to not damage the
bore of the axle.
2
3
6
1
5
4
B. Clean the inside of the axle pivot to remove any
dirt or foreign material.
Figure 11
1. Tie rod
2. Ball joint (LH thread)
3. Jam nut (LH thread)
4. Ball joint
5. Jam nut
6. Tie rod groove
C. Apply grease to the inside and outside of the new
bushings.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 6 -- 13
Chassis
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Axle Installation (Fig. 9)
6. Position tie rod to axle and insert tie rod ends to drag
links. Secure tie rod ends to drag links with slotted hex
nuts and cotter pins.
1. Position the rear axle assembly to the frame. Install
thrust washer (item 7) between each side of axle and
frame. Slidepivotpinthrough frame, thrustwashersand
axle. Make sure that roll pin on pivot pin is positioned in
frame reliefs.
7. Installbothrearwheelassemblies(seeWheelInstal-
lation in this section). Make sure that lug nuts are
torqued evenly in a crossing pattern from 70 to 90 ft--lb
(95 to 122 N--m).
2. Install thrust washer (item 9) and jam nut (item 10)
onto pivot pin. Torque jam nut (item 10) from 90 to 120
ft--lb(123to162N--m). Makesurethatrearaxlecanstill
pivot freely after jam nut is tightened.
8. Check rear wheel toe--in (see Operator’s Manual).
9. Check oil level in hydraulic reservoir.
3. Raise the CrossTraxTM AWD control manifold to the
frame. Position spacers between manifold and frame
(Fig. 10). Secure manifold to frame with three (3) cap
screws and lock washers.
10.Lubricate the rear axle grease fittings.
11.After all adjustments have been made, make sure
that no contact is made between any machine compon-
ents as the rear wheels are moved from lock to lock. Ad-
just if necessary.
4. Install wheel motor housings to rear axle (see Rear
Axle Motor Housing Installation in this section).
12.Operate machine and check hydraulic connections
for leaks.
5. Install steering cylinder to rear axle (see Steering
Cylinder Installation in the Service and Repairs section
of Chapter 4 -- Hydraulic System).
Chassis
Page 6 -- 14
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 6 -- 15
Chassis
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control Arm
1
2
FRONT
RIGHT
5
3
16
4
19
22
22
17
6
23
24
26
8
13
7
27
28
18
10
29
11
12
9
8
25
14
5
20
15
16
21
Figure 12
1. Arm rest
2. Headlight switch
3. LH control arm cover
4. Screw (2 used)
5. Lock nut
11. Clevis pin
12. Cap screw
13. Latch
14. Swell latch (2 used)
15. Access cover
21. Foam seal
22. Flange nut
23. Spacer
24. Cotter pin
25. Retainer bracket
6. Screw
7. RH control arm cover
16. Washer head screw (10 used)
17. Flat washer
26. Spring
27. Clevis pin
8. Bushing
9. Control arm assembly
10. Seat wire harness
18. Foam seal
19. Cotter pin
20. Throttle control assembly
28. Flange head screw (2 used)
29. Flat washer (2 used)
Chassis
Page 6 -- 16
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disassembly (Fig. 12)
4
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting
decks, stop engine and engage parking brake. Remove
key from ignition switch.
3
2
2. Loosen latches and remove access cover from out-
side of control arm.
3. At front of control arm, remove screw (item 6) and
lock nut (item 5) that secure control arm covers to each
other.
1
4. Remove five (5) washer head screws (item 16) that
secure each cover to control arm.
5. Remove control arm covers from machine. As LH
control arm cover (item 3) is removed from control arm,
unplug wire harness connector from headlight switch.
Figure 13
1. Wire harness
2. Harness foam seal
3. Throttle control cable
4. Cable foam seal
6. Remove electrical components from control arm as
needed using Figure 14 as a guide.
7
8
6
5
Assembly (Fig. 12)
9
1. Install all removed electrical components to control
arm using Figure 14 as a guide.
4
2
2. Position covers to control arm. As LH cover (item 3)
is placed, plug wire harness connector to headlight
switch. Also, make sure that wire harness and throttle
control cable are routed correctly through cover open-
ings (Fig. 13).
10
3
3. Secureeachcovertocontrolarmwithfive(5)washer
headscrews(item16).Installscrew(item6)andlocknut
(item 5) to secure covers at front of control arm.
1
4. Install access cover to outside of control arm.
Figure 14
1. Fuse block
2. Hour meter
3. Joystick assembly
4. Ignition switch
5. Indicator light
6. Temperature gauge
7. Diagnostic light
8. PTO switch
9. Indicator light
10. TEC controller
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 6 -- 17
Chassis
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operator Seat
12
10
11
14
1
9
5
6
8
17
2
7
20
21
4
21
15
16
22
13
3
24
23
24
23
RIGHT
25
26
FRONT
19
18
Figure 15
1. Seat
2. Seat base
10. Armrest
11. Cap screw
12. Flange nut
13. Flat washer (4 used)
14. Flange head screw (3 used)
15. Socket head screw (4 used)
16. Seat adjuster
19. Cap screw (4 used)
20. Housing cap
21. R--clamp (2 used)
22. Manual housing
23. Cap (4 used)
24. Flange nut (4 used)
25. Seat suspension
26. Flange head screw (4 used)
3. Seat adjuster w/latch
4. Flat washer (4 used)
5. Seat switch harness
6. Seat switch
7. Washer head screw (2 used)
8. Armrest bracket
9. Spacer
17. Flat washer
18. Seat bracket (2 used)
IMPORTANT: The operator seat, seat base and con-
trol arm assembly are attached to the machine with
the same fasteners. Make sure to support the seat
base and control arm to prevent them from shifting
when removing the seat. Damage to the throttle
cable, control arm electrical components and con-
trol arm wiring harness can occur if the seat base
and control arm are not properly supported during
seat removal.
Chassis
Page 6 -- 18
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal (Fig. 15)
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting
decks, stop engine, engage parking brake and remove
key from the ignition switch.
1
2
2. Disconnect negative battery cable from battery (see
Battery Service in the Service and Repairs section of
Chapter 5 -- Electrical System).
3. Disconnect seat switch electrical connector from
wire harness (Fig. 16).
4
4. Removetwo(2)flangeheadscrewsandflatwashers
that secure control arm assembly to seat base (Figs. 16
and 17).
3
Figure 16
IMPORTANT: Take care to not damage the throttle
cable or electrical harness when removing seat and
control arm assembly from machine.
1. Seat switch lead
2. Throttle cable
3. Wire harness
4. Flange head screw
5
5. Carefully slide control arm assembly from seatbase.
Locate and retrieve two (2) bushings (Fig. 17). Position
and support control arm assembly to allow seat remov-
al.
1
6. Remove four (4) socket head screws and flat
washers that secure seat and seat base to seat adjust-
ers.
4
6
3
2
7. Support seat base to keep it positioned on seat ad-
justers.
6
8. Remove operator seat from seat adjusters.
Installation (Fig. 15)
Figure 17
1. Control arm assembly
2. Flange screw (2 used)
3. Flat washer (2 used)
4. Retainer bracket assy.
5. Seat base
6. Bushing
1. Position seat and seat base to seat adjusters.
2. Secureseatandseatbasetoseatadjusterswithfour
(4) flat washers and socket head screws.
IMPORTANT: Takecaretonotdamagethrottlecable
or electricalharness when installing controlarmas-
sembly to machine.
3. Make sure that two (2) bushings are positioned in
control arm. Carefully slide control arm assembly onto
seat base post. Secure control arm assembly to seat
base with two (2) flange head screws and flat washers
(Figs. 16 and 17).
4. Connect seat switch electrical connector to wire har-
ness (Fig. 16).
5. Connect negative battery cable to battery (see Bat-
tery Service in the Service and Repairs section of Chap-
ter 5 -- Electrical System).
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 6 -- 19
Chassis
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mechanical Seat Suspension
18
31
40
37
34
11
41
19
1
28
10
29
26
20
38
30
6
8
2
23
27
21
7
16
33
22
24
4
36
14
12
13
35
25
17
9
32
3
39
15
42
5
Figure 18
1. Upper housing
15. Lower shock bolt
29. Weight indicator assembly
30. Weight adjust nut
31. Rivet
32. Roller (4 used)
33. Extension spring
34. Bumper
35. Hex nut (2 used)
36. Retainer (3 used)
37. Flat washer
2. Weight adjust knob
3. Lower housing
4. Scissor assembly
5. Lock nut
6. Weight adjuster
7. Drive arm
16. Upper shock bushing (2 used)
17. Lower shock bushing (2 used)
18. Stop bumper
19. Height adjust rod
20. Lock nut
21. Stop bumper (2 used)
22. Bearing tube (2 used)
23. Spring shaft
8. Extension spring (2 used)
9. Roller guide
10. Weight adjust knob
11. Cap
12. Suspension boot
13. Pivot block (2 used)
14. Damper
24. Pivot pin
25. Roller pin
26. Spring bushing (2 used)
27. Shaft block (2 used)
28. Weight adjust spacer
38. Flat washer
39. Thread forming screw (8 used)
40. Roll pin (2 used)
41. Roll pin
42. Clip (20 used)
Chassis
Page 6 -- 20
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT: When removing the seat suspension,
make sure to support the control arm to prevent
damage to the throttle cable, control arm electrical
components and control arm wiring harness.
13
12
14
FRONT
11
Removal (Figs. 18 and 19)
1
8
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting
decks, stop engine, engage parking brake and remove
key from the ignition switch.
2
5
3
9
7
2. Disconnect negative battery cable from battery (see
Battery Service in the Service and Repairs section of
Chapter 5 -- Electrical System).
10
3. Remove seat from machine (see Operator Seat Re-
moval in this section).
6
IMPORTANT: Take care to not damage the throttle
cableorelectricalharnesswhenremovingseatsus-
pension from machine.
5
4
4. Tilt and support seat frame to allow access to seat
suspension fasteners.
Figure 19
5. Support seat suspension to prevent it from falling.
Remove four (4) flange head screws (Figure 19 item 8)
and flange nuts (Figure 19 item 5) that secure seat sus-
pension to seat frame.
1. Seat suspension
2. Seat bracket (2 used)
3. Screw (4 used)
4. Seat frame
8. Flange screw (4 used)
9. Cap (4 used)
10. Manual tube
11. R--clamp (2 used)
12. Flat washer (4 used)
13. Seat adjuster
5. Flange nut (8 used)
6. Seatbase cover
7. Spacer (4 used)
6. Remove seat suspension from machine. Locate and
retrieve four (4) spacers (Figure 19 item 7) from be-
tween seat suspension and seat frame.
14. Seat adjuster w/latch
7. Remove seat suspension components as needed
using Figures 18 and 19 as guides.
Installation (Figs. 18 and 19)
1. Install all removed seat suspension components us-
ing Figures 18 and 19 as guides.
IMPORTANT: Take care to not damage the throttle
cable or electrical harness when installing seat sus-
pension to machine.
2. Positionseatbasecoverandfour(4)spacers(Figure
19 item 7) to seat frame.
3. Position seat suspension to seat frame and secure
with four (4) flange head screws (Figure 19 item 8) and
flange nuts (Figure 19 item 5). Use forward holes in seat
brackets to mount suspension.
4. Install seat to machine (see Operator Seat Installa-
tion in this section). Make sure to connect harness elec-
trical connector to the seat switch.
5. Connect negative battery cable to battery (see Bat-
tery Service in the Service and Repairs section of Chap-
ter 5 -- Electrical System).
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 6 -- 21
Chassis
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Lift Arms
75 to 95 ft--lb
(102 to 128 N--m)
2
Permatex
Threadlocker
5
Permatex
Threadlocker
3
6
18
15
11
17
Antiseize
Lubricant
2
1
13
Permatex
Threadlocker
14
7
11
18
6
11
14
Antiseize
Lubricant
2
12
9
9
10
2
13
19
75 to 95 ft--lb
8
(102 to 128 N--m)
15
12
4
16
RIGHT
10
Permatex
Threadlocker
FRONT
135 to 165 ft--lb
(183 to 223 N--m)
Figure 20
1. #1 lift arm
8. LH tipper bracket
9. Cap screw (2 used)
10. Bumper (4 used)
11. Flat washer
14. Lift arm pivot shaft (3 used)
15. Lock nut (4 used)
16. Pivot shaft (1 used per lift arm)
17. Grease fitting (1 used per lift arm)
18. Cap screw (2 used)
2. Flange bushing (2 used per lift arm)
3. Roll pin (1 used per lift arm)
4. #4 lift arm
5. #5 lift arm
12. Cap screw (1 used per lift arm)
6. Flange nut (2 used)
7. RH tipper bracket
13. Flat washer (1 used per lift arm)
19. Cap screw (1 used per lift arm)
Chassis
Page 6 -- 22
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal (Fig. 20)
2. If pivot shaft (item 16) was removed from lift arm, in-
sert pivot shaft in lift arm and secure with cap screw
(item 19).
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting
decks, stop engine, engage parking brake and remove
key from the ignition switch.
3. Slide front lift arm onto pivot shaft.
4. Secure front lift arm to machine:
2. Remove cutting deck from front lift arm to be re-
moved (see Cutting Deck Carrier Frame Removal in the
Service and Repairs section of Chapter 7 -- Cutting
Decks).
A. ApplyPermatexBlueGelThreadlocker(orequiv-
alent) to threads of screws (items 9, 12 and 18).
B. Position tipper bracket to lift arm and frame
bracket.
3. Disconnect lift cylinder from lift arm (Fig. 21):
A. Remove one (1) retaining ring and thrust washer
from the cylinder pin that secures lift cylinder to lift
arm.
C. Install screws, flat washers (items 11 and 13) and
flange nut (item 6) to tipper bracket, pivot shaft and
frame bracket.
B. Pull cylinder pin from the lift cylinder and lift arm.
Locate and retrieve second thrust washer.
D. Torque 1/2” fasteners (items 9 and 18) from 75 to
95 ft--lb (102 to 128 N--m). Then, torque 5/8” fasten-
ers(item18)from135to165ft--lb(183to223N--m).
C. Pivot lift cylinder rod end away from lift arm.
4. Remove fasteners that secure tipper bracket (item 7
or 8) to machine. Remove tipper bracket.
5. Connect lift cylinder to lift arm (Fig. 21):
A. Align lift cylinder rod end to lift arm mounting hole
5. Slide front lift arm from lift arm pivot shaft.
B. Slide cylinder pin with retaining ring and thrust
washer through the lift cylinder and lift arm.
6. Inspect flange bushings in lift arm for wear or dam-
age. If necessary, replace bushings:
C. Install second thrust washer on pin and secure
with second retaining ring.
A. Use bushing removal tool to extract bushings
from the lift arm. Take care to not damage the bore.
6. Mount cutting deck to lift arm (see Cutting Deck Car-
rier Frame Installation in the Service and Repairs sec-
tion of Chapter 7 -- Cutting Decks).
B. Clean the inside of the bore to remove any dirt or
foreign material.
C. Apply grease to the inside and outside of the new
bushings.
7. Lubricate lift arm and lift cylinder grease fittings.
D. Use an arbor press to install the bushings into lift
arm. Lift arm bushings should be pressed until bush-
ing flange is against lift arm bore.
E. After bushing installation, make sure that lift arm
slides easily onto pivot shaft. If binding is noted, lo-
cate and correct source of binding.
3
4
5
7. If necessary, remove cap screw that secures pivot
shaft (item 16) in lift arm. Remove pivot shaft from lift
arm.
2
1
4
3
8. Ifnecessary, removerollpin(item3)andliftarmpivot
shaft (item 14) from frame. Discard roll pin.
Figure 21
Installation (Fig. 20)
1. Lift arm (#1 shown)
2. Lift cylinder
3. Retaining ring
4. Thrust washer
5. Cylinder pin
1. If lift arm pivot shaft (item 14) was removed from
frame, apply antiseize lubricant to pivot shaft surface
andinsertshaftintoframe.Alignholesinframeandpivot
shaft. Secure pivot shaft with new roll pin.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 6 -- 23
Chassis
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Lift Arms
135 to 165 ft--lb
(183 to 223 N--m)
75 to 95 ft--lb
(102 to 128 N--m)
RIGHT
135 to 165 ft--lb
(183 to 223 N--m)
Permatex
Threadlocker
3
Permatex
Threadlocker
FRONT
Permatex
Threadlocker
6
4
12
10
16
12
1
5
9
Antiseize
Lubricant
8
6
10
13
11
2
15
12
14
9
7
Antiseize
Lubricant
Figure 22
1. Bridge plate
2. #2 lift arm
3. #3 lift arm
4. Cap screw
7. Flange nut
12. Flange bushing (2 used per lift arm)
13. Roll pin (1 used per pivot shaft)
14. Cap screw (1 used per pivot shaft)
15. Grease fitting (1 used per lift arm)
16. Bulkhead bracket
8. Flange head screw
9. Lift arm pivot shaft (2 used)
10. Flat washer (2 used)
11. Pivot shaft (1 used per lift arm)
5. Thrust washer (2 used)
6. Cap screw (2 used)
Removal (Fig. 22)
3. Disconnect lift cylinder from lift arm (Fig. 23):
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting
decks, stop engine, engage parking brake and remove
key from the ignition switch.
A. Remove one (1) retaining ring and thrust washer
from the cylinder pin that secures lift cylinder to lift
arm.
2. Removecuttingdeckfromrearliftarmtoberemoved
(see Cutting Deck Carrier Frame Removal in the Ser-
vice and Repairs section of Chapter 7 -- Cutting Decks).
B. Pull cylinder pin from the lift cylinder and lift arm.
Locate and retrieve second thrust washer.
Chassis
Page 6 -- 24
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Remove screw that secures r--clamp to lift arm.
Position r--clamp and hydraulic hoses away from lift
arm.
C. Install screws, flat washers (items 5 and 10) and
flange nut (item 7) to bridge plate, bulkhead bracket,
pivot shafts and frame bracket.
D. Pivot lift cylinder rod end away from lift arm.
D. Torque 1/2” fasteners (items 4 and 8) from 75 to
95 ft--lb (102 to 128 N--m). Then, torque 5/8” fasten-
ers (item 6) from 135 to 165 ft--lb (183 to 223 N--m).
4. Remove fasteners that secure bridge plate (item 1)
and bulkhead bracket (item 16) to machine. Position
bulkhead bracket with attached hydraulic hoses away
from lift arm. Remove bridge plate.
5. Connect lift cylinder to lift arm (Fig. 21):
A. Align lift cylinder rod end to lift arm mounting
holes.
5. Slide rear lift arm from lift arm pivot shaft.
6. Inspect flange bushings in lift arm for wear or dam-
age. If necessary, replace bushings:
B. Slide cylinder pin with retaining ring and thrust
washer through the lift cylinder and lift arm.
A. Use bushing removal tool to extract both flange
bushings from the lift arm. Take care to not damage
the lift arm bore.
C. Install second thrust washer on pin and secure
with second retaining ring.
D. Position r--clamp and hydraulic hoses to lift arm.
Secure r--clamp with screw.
B. Clean the inside of the bore to remove any dirt or
foreign material.
6. Mount cutting deck to lift arm (see Cutting Deck Car-
rier Frame Installation in the Service and Repairs sec-
tion of Chapter 7 -- Cutting Decks).
C. Apply grease to the inside and outside of the new
flange bushings.
D. Use an arbor press to install the bushings into lift
arm. Bushings should be pressed until bushing
flange is against lift arm bore.
7. Lubricate lift arm and lift cylinder grease fittings.
E. After bushing installation, make sure that lift arm
slides easily onto pivot shaft. If binding is noted, lo-
cate and correct source of binding.
2
3
7. If necessary, remove cap screw that secures pivot
shaft (item 11) in lift arm. Remove pivot shaft from lift
arm.
4
5
7
8. Ifnecessary,removerollpin(item13)andliftarmpiv-
ot shaft (item 9) from frame. Discard roll pin.
1
6
4
Installation (Fig. 22)
3
1. If lift arm pivot shaft (item 9) was removed from
frame, apply antiseize lubricant to pivot shaft surface
andinsertshaftintoframe.Alignholesinframeandpivot
shaft. Secure pivot shaft with new roll pin (item 13).
Figure 23
1. Lift arm (#2 shown)
2. Lift cylinder
3. Retaining ring
5. Cylinder pin
6. R--clamp
7. Screw
4. Thrust washer
2. If pivot shaft (item 11) was removed from lift arm, in-
sert pivot shaft into lift arm and secure with cap screw
(item 14).
3. Slide rear lift arm onto pivot shaft.
4. Secure rear lift arm to machine:
A. ApplyPermatexBlueGelThreadlocker(orequiv-
alent) to threads of screws (items 4, 6 and 8).
B. Position bridge plate and bulkhead bracket with
attached hydraulic hoses to lift arm and frame brack-
et.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 6 -- 25
Chassis
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is intentionally blank.
Chassis
Page 6 -- 26
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
Cutting Decks
Table of Contents
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Operator’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Factors That Can Affect Quality of Cut . . . . . . . . . 4
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Blade Stopping Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SERVICE AND REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Blade Spindle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Blade Spindle Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Rear Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Rear Roller Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Front Roller Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Cutting Deck Carrier Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 7 -- 1
Cutting Decks
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
MOUNTING: All cutting decks are supported by inde-
pendent lift arms and are interchangeable to any cutting
deck positions. The Groundsmaster 4300--D uses five
(5) cutting decks.
DISCHARGE:Clippingsaredischargedfromthe rearof
the mowing decks. Pre--drilled mounting holes in the
cutting deck allow attachment of optional mulching
baffle.
CONSTRUCTION: Deck chamber and frame are
welded steel construction reinforced with channels and
plates.
CUTTING DECK LIFT: Cutting decks on the Ground-
smaster 4300--D are controlled with the operator joy-
stick.
HEIGHT--OF--CUT RANGE: 3/4 to 4 inch (19 to 101
mm) in 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) increments. Height--of--cut ad-
justment is made by repositioning deck on deck frame.
SUSPENSION SYSTEM: A fully floating suspension
with hydraulic counterbalance. Main center pivot allows
side--to--side deck oscillation. Individual decks sup-
ported with two (2) front rollers and one, full width, rear
roller.
DECK DRIVE: Closed loop, integrated relief, hydraulic
system operates cutting deck hydraulic motors. Blade
spindles are 1--1/4 inch (31.7 mm) shafts supported by
greaseable, tapered roller bearings in a ductile iron
housing.
WEIGHT: Individual cutting deck weighs approximately
140 lb (63.5 kg).
CUTTING BLADE: Each cutting deck equipped with a
22 inch (559 mm)length, 0.250inch (6.4mm) thick, heat
treated, steel blade. Anti--scalp cup installed on cutting
blade. The standard blade is optimized for most cutting
applications. Optional high lift, angled sail and Atomic
blades are available for those situations where the stan-
dard blade is not ideal.
Cutting Decks
Page 7 -- 2
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General Information
CAUTION
Never install or work on the cutting decks or lift
arms with the engine running. Always stop en-
gine and remove key from ignition switch first.
Operator’s Manual
The Cutting Deck Operator’s Manual provides informa-
tion regarding the operation, general maintenance and
maintenance intervals for the cutting deck on your
Groundsmaster machine. Refer to that publication for
additional information when servicing the cutting deck.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 7 -- 3
Cutting Decks
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
There are a number of factors that can contribute to un-
satisfactory quality of cut, some of which may be turf
conditions. Turf conditions such as excessive thatch,
“sponginess”, uneven ground conditions or attempting
to cut off too much grass height may not always be over-
come by adjusting the machine. It is important to re-
member that the lower the height--of--cut, the more
critical these factors are.
Remember that the “effective” or actual height--of--cut
dependsoncuttingdeckweight, counterbalancesetting
and turf conditions. Effective height--of--cutwill be differ-
ent than the bench set height--of--cut.
Factors That Can Affect Quality of Cut
Factor
Possible Problem/Correction
1. Maximum governed engine speed.
Check maximum governed engine speed. Adjust
speed to specifications if necessary.
2. Blade speed.
All deck blades should rotate at the same speed.
See items in Troubleshooting Section of Chapter 4 --
Hydraulic System.
3. Tire pressure.
Check air pressure of each tire. Adjust to pressures
specified in Operator’s Manual.
4. Blade condition.
Sharpen blades if their cutting edges are dull or nicked.
Inspect blade sail for wear or damage. Replace blade if
needed.
5. Mower housing condition.
6. Height--of--cut.
Make sure that cutting chambers are in good condition.
Keep underside of deck clean. Debris buildup will
reduce cutting performance.
Make sure all cutting decks are set at the same
height--of--cut. Adjust cutting decks as specified in the
Cutting Deck Operator’s Manual.
Adjust height--of--cut setting to remove only 1 inch (25
mm) or 1/3 of the grass blade when cutting.
7. Cutting deck alignment and ground following.
Check lift arms and cutting deck pivot linkages for
wear, damage or binding. Also inspect for bent or
damaged pivot shafts.
8. Roller condition.
9. Grass Conditions.
All rollers should rotate freely. Replace bearings if worn
or damaged.
Mow when grass is dry for best cutting results.
Cutting Decks
Page 7 -- 4
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Tools
Order special tools from your Toro Distributor.
Rear Roller Bearing and Seal Installation Tools
These tools are used to assemble the cutting deck rear
roller.
Inner Seal Tool
Toro Part Numbers:
Inner Seal Tool
Bearing/Outer Seal Tool
Bearing Installation Washer
115--0852
115--0853
107--8133
Bearing/Outer Seal
Tool
Bearing Installation
Washer
Figure 1
Spindle Plug
The spindle plug can be used to prevent contaminant
entry into the cutting deck spindle assembly when the
hydraulic motor is removed from the spindle.
Toro Part Number: 94--2703
Figure 2
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 7 -- 5
Cutting Decks
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustments
CAUTION
Never install or work on the cutting decks or lift
arms with the engine running. Always stop en-
gine and remove key from ignition switch first.
See the Cutting Deck Operator’s Manual for adjustment
procedures for cutting decks on the Groundsmaster
4300--D.
Blade Stopping Time
The blades of the cutting decks are to come to a com-
plete stop in approximately five (5) seconds after the
PTO is disengaged.
To verify this stopping time, have a second person stand
back from the machine at least twenty (20) feet and
watch the blade on one of the cutting decks. Have the
machine operator disengage the PTO and record the
time it takes for the cutting deck blade to come to a com-
plete stop. If this time is greater than seven (7) seconds,
the deck control manifold braking valve (RV) may need
adjustment.
NOTE: Make sure the decks are lowered onto a clean
section of turf or hard surface to avoid dust and debris.
Cutting Decks
Page 7 -- 6
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 7 -- 7
Cutting Decks
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Repairs
CAUTION
Never install or work on the cutting decks or lift
arms with the engine running. Always stop en-
gine and remove key from ignition switch first.
Blade Spindle Assembly
11
12
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
88 to 108 ft--lb
(120 to 146 N--m)
RIGHT
FRONT
10
9
Figure 3
1. Flange nut (6 used)
2. Hydraulic deck motor
3. Spindle plate
5. O--ring
9. Anti--scalp cup
10. Blade bolt
11. Socket head screw (2 used)
12. Flat washer (2 used)
6. Spindle assembly
7. Stud (6 used)
8. Cutting blade
4. Cutting deck
Cutting Decks
Page 7 -- 8
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal (Fig. 3)
5. Remove cover from top of spindle that was placed to
prevent debris from entering spindle.
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting
decks, stop engine, engage parking brake and remove
key from the ignition switch.
6. Make sure that O--ring is positioned to top of spindle
housing. Secure hydraulic motor to the cutting deck with
two (2) socket head screws and flat washers.
2. Remove two (2) socket head screws and flat wash-
ers that secure hydraulic motor to the cutting deck (Fig.
4). Remove hydraulic motor and O--ring from deck.
IMPORTANT: Pneumatic grease guns can produce
high pressure inside spindle housing that can dam-
age spindle seals. Pneumatic grease guns, there-
fore, are not recommended to be used for greasing
of spindle housings.
3. Cover top of spindle to prevent debris from entering
spindle. A spindle plug (see Special Tools in this chap-
ter) can be used to cover spindle.
7. Attach a hand pump grease gun to one of the grease
fittingsonhousingand fillhousing cavitywith greaseun-
til grease starts to come out of lower seal.
4. Start the engine and raise the cutting deck. Stop en-
gine and remove key from the ignition switch. Support
the cutting deck so it cannot fall accidentally. If required
for easier service, remove cutting deck from machine.
8. After assembly, raise and lower the cutting deck to
verify that hydraulic hoses and fittings do not contact
anything.
5. Remove blade bolt, anti--scalp cup and cutting
blade.
6. Remove six (6) flange nuts that secure spindle as-
sembly to cutting deck. Slide spindle assembly out the
bottom of the deck. Remove spindle plate from top of
deck.
7. If necessary, press studs from spindle housing.
Installation (Fig. 3)
1
1
2
1. If studs were removed from spindle housing, press
studs fully into housing holes. Make sure that stud head
is seated squarely against housing.
2. Position spindle assembly and spindle plate to cut-
ting deck. Align grease fittings on spindle with notches
on cutting deck and spindle plate toward front of deck.
Figure 4
1. Socket head screw
2. Hydraulic motor
3. Secure spindle to cutting deck with six (6) flange
nuts. Tighten flange nuts in a star pattern.
4. Install cutting blade, anti--scalp cup and blade bolt.
Tighten blade bolt from 85 to 110 ft--lb (115 to 149
N--m).
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 7 -- 9
Cutting Decks
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Blade Spindle Service
Disassembly (Fig. 5)
2
6
1. Remove blade spindle from cutting deck (see Blade
Spindle Removal in this section).
4
130 to 160 ft--lb
(177 to 216 N--m)
2. Loosen and remove spindle nut from top of spindle
shaft.
11
10
3. Remove the spindle shaft from the spindle housing
whichmayrequiretheuseofanarborpress.Thespindle
shaft spacer should remain on the spindle shaft as the
shaft is being removed.
9
8
12
7
1
4. Carefully remove oil seals from spindle housing not-
ing direction of seal lips.
4
5
5. Allow the bearing cones, inner bearing spacer and
spacer ring to drop out of the spindle housing.
6. Using an arbor press, remove both of the bearing
cups and the outer bearing spacer from the housing.
3
7. The large snap ring can remain inside the spindle
housing. Removal of this snap ring is very difficult.
Assembly (Fig. 5)
Figure 5
1. Spindle housing
2. Spindle plug
3. Spindle shaft
4. Oil seal
5. Shaft spacer
6. Spindle nut
7. Grease fitting (2 used)
8. Bearing
9. Spacer ring
10. Spacer set (2 piece)
11. Bearing
12. Large snap ring
NOTE: A replacement spindle bearing set contains two
(2) bearings, a spacer ring and a large snap ring (items
1, 2 and 3 in Fig. 6). These parts cannot be purchased
separately. Do not mix bearing set components from
one deck spindle to another.
NOTE: A replacement bearing spacer set includes the
inner spacer and outer spacer (items 4 and 5 in Fig. 6).
Do not mix bearing spacers from one deck spindle to
another.
1
4
IMPORTANT: If new bearings are installed into a
used spindle housing, it may not be necessary tore-
place the original large snap ring. If the original
large snap ring is in good condition with no evi-
dence of damage (e.g. spun bearing), leave thesnap
ring in the housing and discard the large snap ring
that comes with the new bearings. If the large snap
ring is found to be damaged, replace the snap ring.
2
5
3
1
Figure 6
1. Iflargesnapringwasremovedfromspindlehousing,
install snap ring into housing groove. Make sure snap
ring is fully seated in groove.
1. Bearing
2. Spacer ring
3. Large snap ring
4. Inner bearing spacer
5. Outer bearing spacer
2. Install outer bearing spacer into top of spindle hous-
ing. The spacer should fit against the large snap ring.
Cutting Decks
Page 7 -- 10
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Using an arbor press, push the bearing cups into the
top and bottom of the spindle housing. The top bearing
cup must contact the outer bearing spacer previously
installed, and the bottom bearing cup must contact the
large snap ring. Make sure that the assembly is correct
by supporting the firstbearing cup and pressing the sec-
ond cup against it (Fig 7).
PRESS
4
3
4. Pack the bearing cones with grease. Apply a film of
grease on lips of oil seals.
1
6
2
5
5. Install lower bearing cone and greased oil seal into
bottom of spindle housing. Note: The bottom seal must
have the lip facing out (down) (Fig. 8). This seal installa-
tion allows grease to purge from the spindle during the
lubrication process.
Figure 7
1. Bearing cups
2. Large snap ring
3. Large spacer
4. Arbor press
5. Support
6. Arbor press base
IMPORTANT: If bearings are being replaced, make
sure to use the spacer ring that is included with the
new bearing set (Fig. 6).
2
6. Slide spacer ring and inner bearing spacer into
spindle housing, then install upper bearing cone and
greased oil seal into top of housing. Note: The upper
seal must have the lip facing out (up) (Fig. 8).
7. Inspect the spindle shaft and shaft spacer to make
sure there are no burrs or nicks that could possibly dam-
age the oil seals. Lubricate the shaft and spacer with
grease.
8. Install spindle shaft spacer onto shaft. Place thin
sleeve or tape on spindle shaft splines to prevent seal
damage during shaft installation.
1
9. Carefully slide spindle shaft with spacer up through
spindle housing. The bottom oil seal and spindle spacer
should fit together when the spindle is fully installed.
Figure 8
1. Bottom seal installation
2. Upper seal installation
10.Thread spindle nut onto shaft and tighten nut from
130 to 160 ft--lb (177 to 216 N--m).
IMPORTANT: Pneumatic grease guns can produce
high pressure inside spindle housing that can dam-
age spindle seals. Pneumatic grease guns, there-
fore, are not recommended to be used for greasing
of spindle housings.
11.Attach a hand pump grease gun to one of the grease
fittings on housing and fill housing cavity with grease.
12.Rotate spindle shaft to make sure that it turns freely.
13.Install blade spindle assembly to cutting deck (see
Blade Spindle Installation in this section).
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 7 -- 11
Cutting Decks
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Roller
4
29 to 35 ft--lb
(40 to 47 N--m)
5
3
6
29 to 35 ft--lb
(40 to 47 N--m)
1
2
7
3
8
29 to 35 ft--lb
(40 to 47 N--m)
4
6
5
7
8
29 to 35 ft--lb
(40 to 47 N--m)
RIGHT
FRONT
Figure 9
1. Deck frame
2. Rear roller assembly
3. Grease fitting
4. Roller shaft screw
5. Roller mount
6. Flange head screw
7. Skid bracket
8. Cap screw
Cutting Decks
Page 7 -- 12
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal (Fig. 9)
30 ft--lb
(41 N--m)
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting
decks, stop engine, engage parking brake and remove
key from the ignition switch.
4
1
29 to 35 ft--lb
(40 to 47 N--m)
3
2
2. If cutting deck is equipped with a roller scraper (Fig.
10), removefastenerssecuringleftandrightscraperrod
brackets to roller mounts. Remove scraper rod assem-
bly.
3. Remove four (4) flange head screws securing roller
mountstorearofdeckframe. Removerollermountsand
rear roller assembly from deck frame.
6
4. Loosen fasteners securing each end ofroller to roller
mounts. Remove mounts and skid brackets from roller.
5
Installation (Fig. 9)
Figure 10
1. Slide roller mounts onto roller shaft.
1. Grease fitting
2. Roller shaft screw
3. Scraper plate
4. Cap screw
5. Roller scraper
6. Roller mount
2. Install roller and roller mount assembly into rear of
deckframe.Secureassemblytodeckframewithfour(4)
flange head screws.
IMPORTANT: During assembly, make sure the
grease groove in each roller mount aligns with the
grease hole in each end of the roller shaft.
3. Align roller shaft grease hole with the roller mount
grease groove. Use alignment mark on end of roller
shaft to assist with alignment.
4. Positionskidbracketstorollermountsandinstallcap
screws to retain brackets in place.
5. Ifequippedwith scraperrod, installand adjustscrap-
er rod assembly to roller mounts (Fig. 10). The gap be-
tween the scraper rod and roller should be from 0.020
to 0.040 in (0.5 to 1.0 mm). Torque cap screws 30 ft--lb
(41 N--m).
6. Install and tighten fasteners that secure each end of
roller to roller mounts. Torque roller shaft screws (item
4) and cap screws (item 8) from 29 to 35 ft--lb (40 to 47
N--m).
7. After assembly, raise and lower the cutting deck to
verify that hydraulic hoses and fittings do not contact
anything.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 7 -- 13
Cutting Decks
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Roller Service
Disassembly (Fig. 11)
2
50 to 60 ft--lb
(68 to 81 N--m)
1. Remove bearing lock nut from each end of roller
shaft.
3
4
5
2. Loosely secure roller assembly in bench vise and
lightly tap one end of roller shaft until outer seals and
bearing are removed from opposite end of roller tube.
Remove second setofouter seals and bearing from roll-
er tube by tapping on opposite end of shaft. Remove
shaft from roller tube.
6
7
1
4
3
2
5
3. Carefully remove inner seal from both ends of roller
tube taking care to not damage tube surfaces.
6
Loctite #242
4. Discard removed seals and bearings.
5. Clean roller shaft and all surfaces on the inside ofthe
roller tube. Inspect components for wear or damage.
Also, carefully inspect seating surface and threads of
bearing lock nuts. Replace all damaged components.
7
Assembly (Fig. 11)
1
Figure 11
1. Install inner seals into roller tube making sure that
seal lip (and garter spring) faces end of tube. Use inner
seal tool (see Special Tools in this chapter) and soft face
hammer to fully seat seals against roller shoulder (Fig.
12). Apply a small amount of grease around the lip of
both inner seals after installation.
1. Roller tube
2. Roller shaft
3. Inner seal
4. Bearing
5. Outer seal
6. Bearing lock nut
7. Set screw
1
2
3
IMPORTANT: During assembly process, frequently
check that bearings rotate freely and do not bind. If
any binding is detected, consider component re-
moval and reinstallation.
2. Install new bearing and outer seals into one end of
roller tube:
A. Position a new bearing into one end of roller tube.
Use bearing/outer seal tool (see Special Tools in this
chapter) with a softfacehammer tofully seatbearing
against roller shoulder (Fig. 13). After bearing instal-
lation, makesurethatitrotatesfreelywithnobinding.
Figure 12
1. Roller tube
2. Inner seal
3. Inner seal tool
1
2
3
B. Apply a small amount of grease around the lip of
both outer seals.
4
C. Install first outer seal into roller tube making sure
that seal lip (and garter spring) faces end of tube.
Use bearing/outer seal tool (see Special Tools in this
chapter) and soft face hammer to lightly seat seal
against roller shoulder (Fig. 14). Make sure that
bearing still freely rotates after seal installation.
Figure 13
D. Using the same process, install second outer
sealmakingsuretonotcrushtheinstalledouterseal.
Again, make sure that bearing still freely rotates.
1. Roller tube
2. Inner seal
3. Bearing
4. Bearing/outer seal tool
Cutting Decks
Page 7 -- 14
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. From the roller tube end with only the inner seal
installed, carefully install the roller shaft into the roller
tube. Make sure that seals are not damaged as shaft is
installed.
NOTE: After roller is installed to cutting deck, lubricate
roller grease fittings, rotate roller to properly distribute
grease in bearings and clean excess grease from roller
ends. A properly assembled roller should rotate with
less than 5 in--lbs (0.68 N--m) resistance.
4. Install new bearing and outer seals into second end
of roller tube:
1
4
3
2
5
A. Position a second new bearing to roller shaft and
tube. Position washer (see Special Tools in this
chapter) on bearing to allow pressing on both inner
and outer bearing races simultaneously.
B. Use washer and bearing/outer seal tool (see
SpecialToolsinthischapter)withasoftfacehammer
to fully seat bearing (Fig. 15). After bearing installa-
tion, make sure that shaft freely rotates and that no
binding is detected. If necessary, lightly tap bearing
and/or shaft ends to align shaft and bearings. Re-
move washer from roller.
Figure 14
1. Roller tube
2. Inner seal
3. Bearing
4. Outer seal
5. Bearing/outer seal tool
C. Apply a small amount of grease around the lip of
both outer seals.
1
2
3
4
5
D. Carefully install first outer seal into roller tube
making sure that seal lip (and garter spring) faces
end of tube. Use bearing/outer seal tool (see Special
Tools in this chapter) and soft face hammer to lightly
seat seal (Fig. 16). Make sure that shaft and bear-
ings still freely rotate after seal installation.
6
E. Using the same process, install second outer
sealmakingsuretonotcrushtheinstalledouterseal.
Again, make sure that shaft and bearings still freely
rotate.
Figure 15
1. Roller tube
2. Roller shaft
3. Inner seal
4. Bearing
5. Washer
6. Bearing/outer seal tool
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all grease is removed
from shaft threads to prevent bearing lock nut loos-
ening.
5. Thoroughly clean threads on both ends of roller
shaft.
1
5
2
3
4
6
NOTE: If original bearing lock nut(s) are being used,
apply Loctite #242 (or equivalent) to threads of lock
nut(s).
6. Install bearing lock nut onto each end of the roller
shaft. Make sure that outer seals are not damaged dur-
ing nut installation. Torque lock nuts from 50 to 60 ft--lb
(68 to 81 N--m).
Figure 16
7. If set screw was removed from either end of roller
shaft, apply Loctite #242 (or equivalent) to threads of re-
moved set screw and install into roller shaft. Tighten set
screw until it bottoms in shaft and is recessed in shaft.
1. Roller tube
2. Roller shaft
3. Inner seal
4. Bearing
5. Outer seal
6. Bearing/outer seal tool
IMPORTANT: When roller assembly is installed to
cutting deck, make sure that grease groove in each
roller mount aligns with the grease hole in each end
of roller shaft.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 7 -- 15
Cutting Decks
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Roller Service
Disassembly (Fig. 17)
6
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting
decks, stop engine, engage parking brake and remove
key from the ignition switch.
2. Remove front roller mounting bolt.
3. Remove front roller assembly and spacer from deck
frame.
1
4. To remove bearings and bearing spacer from front
roller:
5
2
65 to 95 ft--lb
(89 to 128 N--m)
3
A. Insertpunchthrough endofrollerand driveoppo-
sitebearingoutbyalternatingtapstooppositesideof
innerbearingrace.Thereshouldbealipofinnerrace
exposed for this process.
4
2
Figure 17
B. Remove bearing spacer. Remove second bear-
ing from roller using a press.
1. Mounting bolt
2. Bearing
4. Front roller
5. Spacer
3. Bearing spacer
6. Deck frame
C. Discard bearings after removal.
5. Inspect roller housing and bearing spacer for dam-
age or wear. Replace components as needed.
Assembly (Fig. 17)
1. Install new bearings and bearing spacer into front
roller:
A. Press first bearing into roller. Press on outer race
only or equally on inner and outer races.
B. Insert bearing spacer.
C. Press second bearing into roller pressing equally
oninnerand outerraces untilthe innerrace comesin
contact with the bearing spacer.
2. Install front roller assembly and spacer to deck
frame.
3. Insert mounting bolt and torque to 65 to 95 ft--lb (89
to 128 N--m).
Cutting Decks
Page 7 -- 16
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 7 -- 17
Cutting Decks
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cutting Deck Carrier Frame
RIGHT
FRONT
5
13
4
13
10
9
3
1
2
1
2
3
6
10
6
4
15
12
11
11
18
9
16
14
7
17
7
8
14
15
16
8
Decks #2 and #3
Figure 18
Decks #1, #4 and #5
1. Carrier frame
2. Lynch pin
3. Thrust washer
4. Pivot shaft
5. Lift arm (#4 shown)
7. Cutting deck assembly
8. Cap screw (4 used per deck)
9. Cap screw (2 used per deck)
10. Bushing (2 used per frame)
11. Pin (2 used per deck)
13. Grease fitting
14. Bushing
15. Flange nut (4 used per deck)
16. Pivot bracket (2 used per deck)
17. Flange nut
6. Flange nut (2 used per deck)
12. Lift arm (#2 shown)
18. Bumper
Cutting Decks
Page 7 -- 18
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal (Fig. 18)
Each cutting deck is suspended from a carrier frame.
The cutting deck carrier frame is attached to the lift arm
and allows the cutting deck to pivot on the lift arm pivot
shaft. Cutting deck positions are identified in Figure 19.
#4
#1
#5
To remove cutting decks from the lift arm pivot shaft:
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting
decks, stop engine, engage parking brake and remove
key from the ignition switch.
GROUNDSMASTER
4300--D CUTTING
DECK LOCATIONS
#2
#3
2. Remove lynch pin and thrust washer that secures
carrier frame to lift arm pivot shaft.
3. Slide cutting deck assembly off pivot shaft and away
from machine.
Figure 19
4. Disassemble carrier frame as needed using Fig. 18
as a guide.
Installation (Fig. 18)
1. Assemble carrier frame as needed using Fig. 18 as
a guide.
2. Slide cutting deck assembly onto pivot shaft on lift
arm.
3. Secure cutting deck to pivot shaft with thrust washer
and lynch pin.
4. Lubricate carrier frame grease fittings.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 7 -- 19
Cutting Decks
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is intentionally blank.
Cutting Decks
Page 7 -- 20
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Foldout Drawings
Table of Contents
HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Sheet 1 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Sheet 2 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
WIRE HARNESS DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Main Wire Harness Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Main Wire Harness Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Seat Wire Harness Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Seat Wire Harness Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Engine Wire Harness Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Engine Wire Harness Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Page 8 -- 1
Foldout Drawings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is intentionally blank.
Foldout Drawings
Page 8 -- 2
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GEAR
PUMP
BYPASS
VALVE
CROSSTRAX
MANIFOLD
STEERING
CONTROL
VALVE
STEERING
CYLINDER
PISTON
(TRACTION)
PUMP
LIFT
CONTROL
MANIFOLD
DECK
CONTROL
MANIFOLD
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Hydraulic Schematic
Page 8 -- 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Electrical Schematic
Sheet 1 of 2
All relays and solenoids
are shown as de-energized.
All ground wires are black.
Page 8 -- 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(PRV1)
(PRV2)
TORO
ELECTRONIC
CONTROLLER
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Electrical Schematic
Sheet 2 of 2
All relays and solenoids
are shown as de-energized.
All ground wires are black.
Page 8 -- 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Main Wire Harness Drawing
Page 8 -- 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RED
BROWN/BLACK
VIOLET/BLACK
WHITE
BLUE
PINK
BLACK
BLACK
BLUE
PINK
RED
WHITE/GREEN
GREEN/WHITE
GRAY
PINK
YELLOW
BLACK
PINK
TAN
RED
BLACK
RED/BLACK
RED/BLACK
BLACK
PINK
ORANGE
BLACK
GREEN
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Main Wire Harness Diagram
Page 8 -- 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE CLOCK POSITION
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Seat Wire Harness Drawing
Page 8 -- 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GRAY
GRAY/BLACK
WHITE/BLUE
VIOLET
TAN/WHITE
BLUE
BROWN
BROWN/WHITE
RED/BLACK
ORANGE
GREEN/YELLOW
YELLOW
GREEN/WHITE
TAN
WHITE
GREEN/BLACK
ORANGE/BLACK
BLACK
BLUE/YELLOW
PINK
BLACK
YELLOW/BLUE
BROWN/YELLOW
PINK
RED
PINK
BLACK
RED
WHITE
RED
YELLOW/GREEN
BLACK
TAN/BLACK
VIOLET/WHITE
GRAY
ORANGE
BLUE/WHITE
VIOLET/BLACK
WHITE/BLACK
WHITE/VIOLET
(PRV2)
(PRV1)
BROWN
GREEN
BLACK/WHITE
RED/WHITE
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
GRAY
RED/WHITE
RED/WHITE
BLACK/WHITE
BLACK/WHITE
GRAY
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Seat Wire Harness Diagram
Page 8 -- 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Engine Wire Harness Drawing
Page 8 -- 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ORANGE
BLACK
GREEN/WHITE
BLUE
Groundsmaster 4300--D
Engine Wire Harness Diagram
Page 8 -- 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|